GNS-XL
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Operator’s Manual
Global
006-08852-0000
Rev. 4 Nov/04
N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History and Instructions
Manual
GNS-XL Operator’s Manual
Revision
4, November 2004
006-08852-0000
Part Number
This revision adds descriptions of operational procedures required to fly
three kinds of SIDs.
Insert the contents of this revision packet according to the following
instructions:
Title Page
Remove and Replace
Revision History Page
Section 3
Insert Ahead of Existing Revision History Pages
Remove and Replace Pages 3-17 through 3-22
Remove and Replace
Back Cover Page
Back Binder Insert
Remove and Replace
R-1
Rev. 4
Nov/04
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History and Instructions
Manual
GNS-XL Operator’s Manual
Revision
3, October, 2002
006-08852-0000
Part Number
This revision incorporates AFIS Printer Control, deletes Air Canada and calri-
fies SID/STAR operation.
Insert the contents of this revision packet according to the following
instructions:
Front Binder Insert
Title Page
Remove and Replace
Remove and Replace
Revision History Page
Table of Contents
Insert Ahead of Existing Revision History Page
Remove and Replace Pages v/vi and xi through
xvi
Section 3
Remove and Replace Pages 3-9 through 3-12
Insert Page 3-12a/3-12b after Page 3-12
Remove and Replace Pages 3-13 through 3-20
and Page 3-75/3-76
Section 7
Remove and Replace Pages 7-1/7-2,7-7/7-8,
7-17 through 7-22, 7-35/7-36, 7-43 through
7-66 and insert Pages 7-67 through 7-72
Back Cover Page
Back Binder Insert
Remove and Replace
Remove and Replace
R-1
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History and Instructions
Manual
GNS-XL Operator’s Manual
Revision
2, April, 2000
Part Number
006-08852-0000
This revision incorporates GNS-XL Software Mod 6.
Insert the contents of this revision packet according to the following
instructions:
Front Binder Insert
Title Page
Remove and Replace
Remove and Replace
Revision History Page
Table of Contents
Section 2
Insert Ahead of Existing Revision History Page
Remove and Replace Pages v/vi
Remove and Replace Pages 2-1/2-2, 2-73
through 2-76 and 2-79/2-80
Section 3
Remove and Replace Pages 3-1 through 3-4,
3-15/3-16, 3-36.1/3-36.2 and 3-109/3-110
Back Cover Page
Back Binder Insert
Remove and Replace
Remove and Replace
R-1
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History and Instructions
Manual
GNS-XL Operator’s Manual
Revision
1, July 1998
Part Number
006-08852-0000
This revision consists of the following:
Add Company Routes (vi, 2-2, 3.36.1, 3-36.2, I-2)
Add Dedicated DME Interface (2-57)
Add Approach Note (3-36.3)
Add Waypoint Type Identifier (2-54, 3-48, 3-49, 3-62)
Revise Procedure Turn (3-41, 3-42, 3-43, 3-44)
Remove H Hot Key (3-57, 3-58, 3-61)
Add Fuel Use Reset Function (ix, 2-48, 3-105, 3-106)
Typographic/Administrative Corrections (Front Covers, 2-1, 2-4, 2-9, 2-10,
2-11, 2-12, 2-27, 2-28, 2-79, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-40, 3-42, 3-43, 3-45,
3-59, 3-60, 7-12, 7-15, 7-20, 7-22, 7-54, 7-55, 7-56, 7-57, 7-58, 7-59, Back
Covers)
R-1
Rev. 1
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Jul/98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History and Instructions
Manual
GNS-XL Operator’s Manual
Revision
0, October 1996
006- 08852-0000
Part Number
This revision is a complete manual revision and supersedes previous revi-
sion level manuals. Superseded manuals should be discarded.
R-1
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Feb/96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
GENERAL TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
ON: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
BRIGHTNESS (BRT): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
MESSAGE KEY/ANNUNCIATOR (MSG): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
ALPHA KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
NUMERIC KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
HOLD KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
BACK KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
SPACE (SP) KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
ENTER (ENT) KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
DISPLAY SELECTOR KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
PREVIOUS (PRV) KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
NEXT (NXT) KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
LINE SELECT KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
UP/DOWN KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
COLORS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
SECTION 2
PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
PAGE DISPLAYS AT POWER-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
SELF TEST PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
INITIALIZATION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
FLIGHT PLAN SECTION (FPL KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
FLIGHT PLAN PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
i
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Oct/96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
FLIGHT PLAN “X” 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
NAVIGATION SECTION (NAV KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
NAVIGATION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
NAVIGATION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
NAVIGATION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
NAVIGATION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
NAVIGATION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
VLF SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
VLF SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
VLF SUBSECTION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
VLF SUBSECTION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
VLF SUBSECTION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
IRS/INS SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
IRS (or INS) SUBSECTION 1/2 (Page 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
IRS SUBSECTION 2/2 (Page 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
VPU SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
VPU SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
VPU SUBSECTION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
VPU SUBSECTION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
VPU SUBSECTION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
GPS SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
GPS SUBSECTION 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
GPS SUBSECTION 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 (Page 3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
VERTICAL NAVIGATION SECTION (VNAV KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
VNAV 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) - (First line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
ii
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
VNAV MODE: (Second line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
VNAV 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) - FLIGHT PLAN WayPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
VNAV DATA 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
AFIS SECTION (AFIS KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
PLANNING SECTION (PLAN KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
PLAN PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
PLAN 1/8 (Page 1 of 8) FUEL STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
PLAN 2/8 (Page 2 of 8) TRIP PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
PLAN 3/8 (Page 3 of 8) FUEL PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
PLAN 4/8 (Page 4 of 8) FUEL FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
PLAN 5/8 (Page 5 of 8) DATE/GMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
PLAN 6/8 (Page 6 of 8) AIRCRAFT WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
PLAN 7/8 (Page 7 of 8) FDE PREDICTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
PLAN 8/8 (Page 8 of 8) FDE COMPUTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
HEADING SECTION (HDG KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
HEADING PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
HEADING VECTOR 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
TUNING SECTION (TUNE KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
TUNE 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
TUNE 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
TUNE 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
TUNE 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) XPDR/ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
HOLDING PATTERN SECTION (HOLD KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
HOLDING PATTERN PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
iii
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
POSITION FIX PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
DIRECT TO SECTION ( d KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
DIRECT TO PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
DIRECT 1/2 (Page 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
WAYPOINT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
WAYPOINT PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
DATABASE WPT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
SPECIAL DATABASE WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
PILOT ENTERED WPT (Personalized) Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
OFFSET WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70
SPECIAL WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71
OCEANIC REPORTING WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
MESSAGES (MSG Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74
ACTION REQUIRED: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74
ADVISORY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75
SENSOR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78
SECTION 3
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
PRE-DEPARTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
POWER ON/OFF AND PARALLAX ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
INITIALIZATION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
DATE and GMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
INITIALIZATION POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Option 1: Using the IDENT field for non-IRS equipped systems . . . . . .3-3
Option 2: Using the POS field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
BUILDING FLIGHT PLANS (FPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
iv
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
To Delete a Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
MODIFYING A FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
To Access The Desired Flight Plan: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Deleting A Waypoint: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
ADDING A WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
ADDING OCEANIC WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
USING DUPLICATE WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
REVIEWING WAYPOINT DATA/COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
To Access The Desired Flight Plan: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12a
ERASING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
FLIGHT PLAN (FPL) SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
INITIAL LEG SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
BEFORE TAXI (IRS EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
RUNWAY LINE-UP (IRS EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
IRS, VLF (RPU), GPS AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
VLF (RPU) AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
SIDs, STARs, APPROACHES AND ENROUTE AIRWAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
ENTERING A SID ON THE ACTIVE FPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
REVIEWING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3-20
EDITING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . .3-21
ERASING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . .3-22
ADDING OR DELETING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A SID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
To Delete a Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
ENTERING AN AIRWAY FROM ANY STORED FPL
OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
v
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
EDITING AN AIRWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
ENTERING A STAR OR PROFILE DESCENT ON ANY STORED FPL
OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
REVIEWING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE .3-29
EDITING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . .3-29
ERASING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . .3-30
ADDING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
DELETING WAYPOINTS OF A STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
ENTERING AN APPROACH ON A STORED FPL
OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
REVIEWING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL
OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
EDITING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL
OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
ERASING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL
OR THE ACTIVE FPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
DELETING AN APPROACH WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
USING A STAR AND AN APPROACH IN THE SAME FLIGHT PLAN . . . . .3-36
SELECTING A COMPANY ROUTE AND ADDING IT TO THE
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36.1
EXECUTING APPROACHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
LOADING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
EXECUTING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Using Radar Vectors to FINAL APPROACH COURSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
After receiving the final intercept vector from ATC: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
USING OWN NAVIGATION - NO DME ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
PROCEDURE TURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
USING RADAR VECTORS TO INTERCEPT A DME ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
ENROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
DIRECT TO - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
DIRECT TO - HP WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
vi
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
To Select and Go Direct To HP Waypoint: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
To Cancel Holding Pattern:(from the Holding Pattern page) . . . . . . . .3-52
DIRECT TO - RANDOM WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
DIRECT TO - CLOSEST AIRPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
PSEUDO-VORTAC (SELECTED COURSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
USING HEADING VECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
PROGRAMMING A HEADING VECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
CHANGING HEADING VECTOR WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE . . . .3-58
CHANGING TO WAYPOINT WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE . . . . . . .3-58
CANCELING HEADING SELECT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
PROGRAMMING AN INTERCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
PROGRAMMING A HEADING INTERCEPT TO THE
FINAL APPROACH COURSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61
PROGRAMMING A HOLDING PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63
REVIEWING, EDITING, OR CANCELING A HOLDING PATTERN . . . . . . . . . .3-65
REVIEWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
CANCELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
EXITING A HOLDING PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
EXITING HOLDING PATTERN NEXT TIME OVER HOLDING FIX . . . . . . . .3-67
EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY GOING DIRECT TO HOLDING FIX . . . .3-68
EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY PERFORMING A LEG CHANGE . . . . . .3-68
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) OPERATION - PRE-DEPARTURE . . . . . . .3-71
SETTING CRUISE ALTITUDE, TRANSITION LEVEL,
AND DEFAULT FLIGHT PATH ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-71
CREATING/CHANGING VNAV WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-72
To program a Path Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-74
REVIEWING VNAV WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
vii
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Using Active Flight Plan Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
Using VNAV Flight Plan Waypoints Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
VERTICAL NAVIGATION - ENROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
PROGRAMMING VERTICAL PATH DESCENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
Using Database (DB) FPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77
Using Default ( DEF) FPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77
Using Manual (MAN) FPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77
Using Automatic (AUTO) FPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-78
EDITING ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Option 1: Using VNAV Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Option 2: Using VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Option 3: Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80
DIRECT TO - VNAV WAYPOINT AS LATERAL WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . .3-81
DIRECT TO - VNAV WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83
CREATING VNAV PROFILE WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
Top of Climb (#TOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
Top of Descent (#TOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85
Pre-Selected Altitude Intercept Point (#PRESL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
Descent Reference Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
REMOTE TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89
TUNING COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89
TUNING NAVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
Keyboard Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
TRANSPONDER AND ADF KEYBOARD TUNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93
PLANNING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95
FUEL PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95
TRIP PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-96
viii
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
To Enter Manual Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-98
To Return to Automatic Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-98
To update the TRIP PLAN leg to the current TO waypoint
with an Active Flight Plan selected: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100
FLIGHT PLAN FUEL PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100
To Enter Manual Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102
To Return To Automatic Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102
To Enter A Manual Fuel Flow: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102
To Return to Automatic Fuel Flow: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102
VERIFYING OR CHANGING DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-104
VERIFYING OR CHANGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT PARAMETERS . . . . . .3-105
RESETTING FUEL USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-106
SPECIAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107
PILOT ENTERED LEG CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107
PREVENTING AUTOMATIC LEG CHANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-109
DEAD RECKONING (DR) TO PRIMARY NAVIGATION MODE -
VLF (RPU) ONLY EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110
POSITION CHECK AND UPDATE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110
Using a Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110
Over Known Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-111
Using An Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-112
PARALLEL COURSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-114
MANUAL MAGNETIC VARIATION ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-115
RETURNING TO AUTOMATIC VARIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-115
SELECTING ETE, ETA, DIS, OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-115
SELECTING NAV PAGE ETA OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . .3-116
INITIALIZATION ENROUTE VLF (RPU) ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-117
Position Update: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-118
MANUAL TAS ENTRY only VLF is available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-118
ix
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
MANUAL HEADING ENTRY only if IRS or VLF is available . . . . . . . . . . .3-119
VLF/OMEGA STATION DESELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-120
SENSOR DESELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-121
EXTERNAL WAYPOINT ACCEPTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-122
PRESENT POSITION AS A WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-123
TRUE HEADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-124
Aircraft Equipped With TRUE/MAG Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-124
Aircraft Not Equipped With A TRUE/MAG Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-125
SET HEADING ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-125
LOSS OF POWER IN FLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-126
CREATING/CHANGING PILOT ENTERED
(PERSONALIZED) WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-127
Creating Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128
Changing Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128
CREATING AN OFFSET WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-129
PERFORMING FDE PREDICTION FOR OCEANIC/REMOTE OPERATION .3-130
SECTION 4
VLF/OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
VLF COMMUNICATIONS STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
SECTION 5
DATABASE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
DATA BASE UPDATE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
TO UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
WHEN UPDATE IS COMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
IF UPDATE FAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
x
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
SECTION 6
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
Global Data Center (GDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Data Transfer Unit (DTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Data Management Unit (DMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Antenna Switching Unit (ASU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Satellite Communications Unit (SCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
High Power Amplifier/ Low Noise Amplifier (HPA/LNA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
AFIS Flight Plan List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Flight Plan Progress (NAVIGATION Page 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
AFIS Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
AFIS FLT PLAN Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
AFIS FLT PLAN Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Fuel and Time Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
AFIS FLT PLAN Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Weights, Flight Level and Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
AFIS FLT PLAN Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Operator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
AFIS FLT PLAN Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Performance Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
SIGMETS Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
TERMINAL WEATHER Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
TERMINAL WX DATA Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
xi
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Oct/96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
WINDS ALOFT Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
WINDS ALOFT Data Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
RECALL AFIS FPL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
SEND AFIS MESSAGE Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
PPM MENU Page (Preprogrammed Messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
DISPLAY AFIS MSG Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
OPERATING MODES Page (For AFIS Users Equipped with
Satellite Data Communications System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
AUTO REPORT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
AUTO WX UPDT (weather update): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
VHF LINK CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
SAT LINK CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
OPERATING MODES Page (For AFIS Users NOT Equipped with
Satellite Data Communications System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
AUTO REPORT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
AUTO WX UPDT (weather update): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Active Flight Plan Page (for AFIS Flight Plan Updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
AFIS UPDATE Verification Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
SYSTEM MESSAGES Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
ADVISORY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Pre-Departure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
AFIS Flight Plan Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
To enter an AFIS Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
ENROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Reviewing Flight Plan Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
xii
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Reviewing AFIS Planned Leg Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Reviewing AFIS Flight Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
AFIS Flight Plan Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
AFIS Flight Plan Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
AFIS Flight Plan Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31
AFIS Flight Plan Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31
SIGMETS Review/update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Terminal Weather Menu - Data update and Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33
To insert a new identifier: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
To delete text when there is no data entry in progress: . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
Winds Aloft Menu - Data update and Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
To insert a new identifier: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
To delete text when there is no data entry in progress: . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Recalling AFIS Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Recall Option 1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Recall Option 2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Sending a Text Message or pdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
To Return to the AFIS Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
Sending/building a Preprogrammed Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Editing/entering a Preprogrammed Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
Continue Sending Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
AFIS Messages Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Selecting Operating Modes (For AFIS Users Equipped with
Satellite Data Communications System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Auto Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Turning AUTO REPORT / auto wx update OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44
Returning to AUTO REPORT/auto wx update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Auto Weather Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
xiii
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Turning AUTO WX UPDT OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
Returning to AUTO WX UPDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
VHF and Satellite Network Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Turning VHF Network OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Turning VHF Network ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49
Turning AUTO to MAN or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50
Returning to AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50
Turning Satellite Network OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51
Turning Satellite Network ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
Turning AUTO to MAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-53
Returning to AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-53
PRINTER CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Message DEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Weather DEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Auto Form Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55
Auto Print MSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
Auto Print WX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
PRINTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57
Printing Flight Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57
Printing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57
Printing Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-58
SELECTING OPERATING MODES (For AFIS Users NOT Equipped with
Satellite Data Communications System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Auto Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Turning AUTO REPORT OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Returning to AUTO REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-61
Auto Weather Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62
Turning AUTO WX UPDT OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62
xiv
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Returning to AUTO WX UPDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63
Ground Network Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64
AUTO to MAN or OFF Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64
Returning to AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-65
Updating AFIS Flight Plan and Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66
Updating AFIS Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66
Selecting Update as Active Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67
Updating SIGMETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-68
Updating Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-69
To Update Terminal Weather Data Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70
To insert a new identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70
Updating Winds Aloft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70
To update the Winds Aloft Data Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
To insert a new identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
xv
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
xvi
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
SECTION 1
DESCRIPTION
OVERVIEW
The GNS-XL Flight Management System is an integrated system
designed to give the pilot centralized control for the navigation sen-
sors, computer based flight planning, fuel management, and radio
management. The GNS-XL has a full color flat panel LCD display,
alpha-numeric and function keys, a Global Positioning Sensor (GPS),
and a navigation data base. All these are housed in a panel/pedestal
mounted Control Display Unit (CDU).
All aircraft interface requirements are accomplished through the
GNS-XL. The system supports analog and digital inputs in any com-
bination. Specific aircraft requirements are programmed into a
Configuration Module. This module mounts directly to the rear con-
nector, thus remaining in the aircraft. This allows hardware to be
easily moved between aircraft types without changing system config-
uration. The following is a summary of the digital and analog inter-
faces:
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AFIS
Altitude
Air Data Computer
EFIS
Fuel Flow
Altitude Rate
Cross Track Deviation
Discretes
Inertial Navigation Sensor
Inertial Reference Sensor
Dual VOR/DME
Fuel Flow
VOR/DME, ADF, XPDR, COMM Heading
Radio Tuning
HSI Course & Bearing
RPU - VLF/Omega
Cross Side FMS
Roll Steering
True Air Speed
Vertical Deviation
In addition to the GPS sensor, position information is accepted from
up to eight navigation sensors, such as an optional VLF/Omega
RPU, inertial position sensors, or VOR/DME radios. These navigation
sensor inputs can be blended to form a single composite position.
Accuracy of this composite position is enhanced by using the best
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
characteristics of each type of sensor. For example, an Inertial
Reference System (IRS) has excellent short term characteristics
while VLF/Omega has excellent long term stability. The internal GPS
sensor has excellent overall characteristics and will usually be the
dominant sensor during blending. However, when RAIM is available,
the GPS sensor is the sole contributor to the composite position.
NOTE: RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a quali-
ty factor used to determine the accuracy of the GPS position. It is an
internal function of the GPS receiver and determines the accuracy of
it’s navigation solution.
The navigation data base is updated on a 28-day cycle by way of a
memory card. This card is inserted in a Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association (PCMCIA) slot located under the lower
portion of the alpha keyboard. This worldwide database contains
over 50,000 waypoints, navaids and airports. It also contains alti-
tudes at appropriate waypoints, SID, STAR, AIRWAY, and
APPROACH procedures. In addition to this database, the memory
can store up to 999 operator generated waypoints. Individual naviga-
tion points can be organized into 56 different stored flight plans, each
containing up to 50 waypoints.
Due to the way the GNS-XL database is structured, waypoints must
have unique identifiers. However, some duplicate ICAO identifiers
exist for more than one waypoint. In these cases the waypoint identi-
fiers are renamed in the database. Two naming conventions are
used, one for four character identifiers and one for five character
identifiers.
Four character waypoints keep the first four characters and the last
two characters of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following
example.
MA11 at KPRC becomes MA11RC in the database.
Five character waypoints keep the first five characters and add the
last character of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following
example.
MA27L at KOAK becomes MA27LK in the database.
Additional capabilities of the GNS-XL include direct navigation from
present position to any waypoint, and data crossfill capability for dual
installations. Trip Plan and Fuel Plan functions are also available.
There is capability for creating a PSEUDO-VORTAC (selected
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
course) to any waypoint and establishing an offset parallel course.
NAVs, COMMs, ADFs and transponders can be tuned through the
system or by using the individual control heads.
GENERAL TERMS
FIELD:
A line of information.
CURSOR: Yellow rectangular box placed over a field to enter or
change the information in that field. The cursor is nor-
mally out of view unless brought into view by depressing
the Line Select Keys on either side of the screen. When
information is entered into a field and the ENT Key is
depressed, the cursor will move to the next enterable
field or disappear from the screen when the last field is
entered. Blinking of a field indicates that the computer
has not accepted the entry because of unreasonable or
invalid information.
PAGE:
Information is arranged in sections and subsections
much like chapters in a book. Individual screen displays
are referred to as pages. Each section is selected by
depressing the appropriate Display Selector Key located
at the top of the keyboard. Each subsequent push of the
key will select the next page of that section. A subsec-
tion page is selected by depressing the Line Select Key
next to the topic desired, then depressing the ENT Key.
The PRV or NXT Key can be used to move forward or
backward through pages of a subsection. If the first
page of a subsection is displayed, the BACK Key will
exit the subsection.
WAYPOINT:A navigation point consisting of 1 to 6 alpha, numeric
characters that has a specific latitude and longitude.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
ON
BRT
ON:
AFIS
HOLD
MSG
D
Depress and release the ON
Key to apply power to the sys-
tem. There is a warm-up period
of approximately 30 seconds.
The display illumination will ini-
tially be set at 75% of full bright.
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
F
Depressing the ON Key for
approximately three seconds
will initiate the system power off
sequence. During the sequence
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
K
L
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
the display will show SYSTEM TURNING OFF. This is to prevent
inadvertent system shutdown.
NOTE: The system is also capable of being turned on and off by
cycling aircraft power.
ON
BRT
AFIS
HOLD
MSG
D
BRIGHTNESS (BRT):
The BRT Key is used to change
the illumination of the display.
This key is also used for paral-
lax adjustment of the Line
Select Keys
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
F
NOTE: The illumination of the
front panel and keyboard is nor-
mally controlled through the air-
craft panel lighting control.
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
K
L
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
ON
AFIS
BRT
HOLD
MSG
D
MESSAGE KEY/ANNUNCIA-
TOR (MSG):
The MSG annunciator will flash
to alert the operator that a mes-
sage needs to be viewed on
one of the SYSTEM MES-
SAGES or SENSOR MES-
SAGES Pages.
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
F
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
K
L
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Depressing the MSG Key will display the message page. The
newest message will be indicated with a flashing asterisk to the left of
the message. If the message requires some action be taken by the
operator, the MSG annunciator will remain on steadily until the action
is completed. If no action is required, the MSG annunciator will extin-
guish when the message page is exited.
ON
BRT
AFIS
HOLD
MSG
D
ALPHA KEYS:
The alpha keys are used to
enter the 26 letters of the alpha-
bet, and #.
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
F
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
K
L
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
ON
AFIS
BRT
NUMERIC KEYS:
HOLD
MSG
D
The numeric keys are used to
enter numbers 0 to 9, ± and *.
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
F
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
K
L
FPL
PLAN
NXT
HOLD KEY:
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
If the cursor is positioned over a
waypoint identifier, and it is
appropriate to program a
Holding Pattern at that way-
point, depressing the HOLD
Key accesses the Holding
Pattern page.
BACK
Y
Z
*
ON
AFIS
BRT
HOLD
MSG
D
If the cursor is not displayed,
depressing the HOLD Key
accesses the POSITION FIX
Page and is used for position
updates and verification as well
as entering the primary naviga-
tion mode.
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
K
F
L
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
ON
BRT
AFIS
HOLD
MSG
D
BACK (BACK) KEY:
The BACK Key is used to erase
errors and page backward
when the cursor is not dis-
played. It can also be used to
change data in a field if the cur-
sor is present.
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
K
F
L
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
ON
AFIS
BRT
SPACE (SP) KEY:
HOLD
MSG
D
The SP Key is used to enter a
space when entering a mes-
sage on an AFIS Page. This
key is not functional if AFIS is
not installed in the system.
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
K
F
L
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
ENTER (ENT) KEY:
BACK
Y
Z
*
When the ENT Key is
depressed, data is entered into
the computer memory.
ON
AFIS
BRT
HOLD
MSG
D
DISPLAY SELECTOR KEYS:
NAV (Navigation), VNAV
(Vertical Navigation), AFIS
(Airborne Flight Information
System), FPL (Flight Plan),
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
K
F
L
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
PLAN
(Planning),
HDG
ON
AFIS
BRT
(Heading), TUNE (Radio
Tuning), and d (Direct) are
used to select the pages per-
taining to that particular section.
The first page of a section is dis-
played first when a Display
Selector Key is pressed. With
each subsequent press of the
Key, the next sequential page
will be displayed.
HOLD
MSG
D
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
K
F
L
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
ON
BRT
AFIS
HOLD
MSG
D
PREVIOUS (PRV) KEY:
The PRV Key is used to display
the previous page of a section
or subsection. This key also
allows the operator to remain in
a section or subsection by loop-
ing from the first to the last and
back to the first page of that
section or subsection.
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
K
F
L
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
ON
AFIS
BRT
HOLD
MSG
D
NEXT (NXT) KEY:
The NXT Key is used to display
the next page of a section or
subsection. This key also
allows the operator to remain in
a section or subsection by loop-
ing from the first to the last and
back to the first page of that
section or subsection.
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
K
F
L
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
ON
AFIS
BRT
HOLD
MSG
D
LINE SELECT KEYS:
These keys are used to place
the cursor in the field next to
that key. Each line select key
controls 2 lines of text. White
symbols (< or >) displayed on
either side of the display indi-
cate active Line Select Keys for
each individual page.
HDG
TUNE
3
NAV VNAV
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
K
F
L
1
4
7
±
2
5
8
0
FPL
PLAN
NXT
6
O
U
SP
P
V
#
Q
W
ENT
R
X
PRV
9
BACK
Y
Z
*
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
COLORS:
The CDU displays are color coded to assist the operator in recogniz-
ing information. The following is a list of these colors and their mean-
ings:
Magenta
Yellow
Lateral TO Waypoint and Vertical TO Waypoint,
FROM Waypoint
Caution Messages
Data entered, but not yet accepted by the computer.
Cyan
Date and Times
Tuned Frequencies or Codes
Altitudes
Green
Navigation and Fuel Data
General Page Data
White
Red
Page Titles and Prompts
Warnings
Blue
Waypoint Numbers
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
SECTION 2
PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS
The following section contains definitions pertaining to information
and format seen when a particular function key is depressed.
PAGE DISPLAYS AT POWER-UP
For a better understanding of the GNS-XL functions, this section
should be reviewed prior to operating the system.
SELF TEST PAGE
For the first 30 seconds after
the system if is turned on, the
computer performs extensive
internal tests that must be
successfully completed
before proceeding further. If
the system detects a problem
the SELF TEST display may
be replaced by a NO DATA
Figure 2-1
RECEIVED message. The
unit may have to be removed
for service.
INITIALIZATION PAGE
>
>
After the Self Test is success-
fully completed, the INITIAL-
IZATION Page will be dis-
played. Refer to Figure 2-2.
DATE:
>
The current Greenwich Date
is displayed as day, month
and year.
Figure 2-2
GMT:
Time of day is displayed in Greenwich Mean Time hours and minutes.
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
IDENT:
Displays the airport identifier for the airport closest to the system shut
down position. Dashes will be displayed when the cursor is placed
over the position (POS) field.
POS:
Displays the last system position at shut down. Dashes are dis-
played when the cursor is over the IDENT field.
PART NUMBER AND SOFTWARE MODIFICATION STATUS:
The bottom line of the display shows the unit part number and the
software level of the unit.
NOTE: This page cannot be recalled once DATE, GMT, and POS
have been entered. In order to display this again, the system must
be turned off and then turned back on.
FLIGHT PLAN SECTION (FPL KEY)
Upon pressing the FPL Key the FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 Page will be
displayed and the following can be observed.
NOTE: The FLIGHT PLAN LIST page will be automatically displayed
if the ENT key is depressed at least three times while on the initializa-
tion page.
FLIGHT PLAN PAGES
NOTE: If AFIS equipped the first page displayed after system initial-
ization will be the AFIS FPL LIST page in lieu of the FLIGHT PLAN
LIST page.
NOTE: If the data base contains company routes, the first page dis-
played after system initialization will be the COMPANY ROUTES
page in lieu of the FLIGHT PLAN LIST page. If both AFIS and
Company Routes are present, the COMPANY ROUTES page is dis-
played first.
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)
The FLIGHT PLAN LIST page will be displayed automatically after
system initialization. If the initialization airport matches a departure
airport on the FLIGHT PLAN LIST, the cursor will automatically be
positioned over the first matching Flight Plan.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1
There are seven pages pos-
sible with a maximum of 56
flight plans stored in non-
volatile memory. Each
stored flight plan's origin and
destination points are listed
in alphabetical order. (Figure
2-3)
KABQ
KDAL
KDAL
KHPN
KHPN
KLAX
KPRC
KSFO
KMSY
KHPN
KSFO
KORD
KORD
KSTL
KSNA
KHPN
1
6
8
2
9
4
3
7
>
>
>
>
A new FLIGHT PLAN LIST
Page is created when the
previous page has eight flight
Figure 2-3
plan origin-destination pairs on it. Using the PRV or NXT Key pages
through the Flight Plan List subsection. (Figure 2-3)
FLIGHT PLAN "X" 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)
"X" can be Flight Plan num-
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/1
<
bers 1 through 56. (Figure
2-4)
KDAL
BUJ
<
HOT
This stored flight plan page is
accessed through the
BWZ
<
ISLET
FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page
by pressing the Line Select
Key corresponding to the
desired flight plan number,
thus, placing the cursor over
that number, then pressing
ENT. (Figure 2-3)
< DEPART
XFILL
SELECT
ERASE
ARRIVE
<
<
APPROACH
Figure 2-4
Waypoint Identifiers:
Waypoint identifiers may consist of from one to six alphanumeric
characters. Up to 50 waypoint identifiers may be placed on each
stored Flight Plan. An identifier may be used more than once on the
same Flight Plan. (Figure 2-4) Other indications can be as follows:
• Indented Waypoints: Indicates a SID, STAR, or APPROACH pro-
cedure is part of the Flight Plan. (Figure 2-4)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
• HP (Holding Pattern):
Indicates a holding pattern is
programmed at a particular
waypoint. (Figure 2-5)
FLIGHT PLAN 6 2/2
<
<
<
RW34
+++++
HP CMK
#####
• PT (Procedure Turn):
Indicates a procedure turn is
programmed at a particular
waypoint.
< DEPART
XFILL
SELECT
ERASE
ARRIVE
<
<
APPROACH
• ++++++: A flight plan dis-
continuity "fence" separating
the missed approach way-
Figure 2-5
point from the rest of the approach (Figure 2-5). The system will fly
current track beyond the last waypoint prior to the fence but no Auto
Leg change will occur. No Altitude constraints will be displayed
beyond the fence. This type of fence will not cause waypoints of the
active flight plan to be deleted prior to the fence if a waypoint beyond
the fence is selected using the d function.
• IAF (Initial Approach Fix): Automatically loaded from the data base
when a non-precision approach is selected.
• ARC (DME Arc end waypoint): Automatically loaded from the data
base when a non-precision approach is selected.
• FAF (Final Approach Fix): Automatically loaded from the data base
when a non-precision approach is selected.
• MAP (Missed Approach Point): Automatically loaded from the data
base when a non-precision approach is selected.
• ------: "fence" indicating a discontinuity in the flight plan. No Auto
Leg changes will take place beyond the last waypoint prior to the
fence and no ALT, ETE, ETA, or DIS will be displayed. If a d is
performed to a waypoint beyond this type of fence all waypoints prior
to the fence will be deleted from the active flight plan.
• ****** : Follows the last waypoint on the Flight Plan and indicates
where the next waypoint entry will normally begin.
DEPART:
Used to access the DEPARTURE Page to enter a Standard
Instrument Departure (SID). (Figure 2-5)
ARRIVE:
Used to access the ARRIVAL Page to enter a Standard Terminal
Arrival (STAR) or Profile Descent. (Figure 2-5)
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
APPROACH:
Used to access the APPROACH Page to enter a non-precision
approach. (Figure 2-5)
XFILL: Used to transfer information between systems in a dual sys-
tem installation. In a single system installation, this prompt will not be
displayed.
SELECT or INVERT:
Used to transfer a Stored Flight Plan to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Page. Depressing the BACK Key when the cursor is over this field
brings up INVERT?, which is used to transfer the waypoint of a
Stored Flight Plan to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page in reverse
order. (Figure 2-5)
ERASE:
Used to clear an entire flight plan. (Figure 2-5)
DEPARTURE Page
Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to DEPART on
the FLIGHT PLAN Page. With the cursor over DEPART press ENT.
NOTE: Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that partic-
ular field or DEPARTURE airport field will flash if no Departure is
available. A NO SIDS AVAILABLE message will appear at the bot-
tom of the screen.
DEPARTURE:
Departure airport identifier. This field prefills if first waypoint on the
flight plan is an airport or runway, or it can be manually entered.
(Figure 2-6)
RUNWAY:
DEPARTURE
RUNWAY
SID
KLAX 1/1
------
<
<
Departing runway. This field
prefills if first waypoint on the
flight plan is a runway, or it
can be selected from a list
made available by pressing
the Line Select Key adjacent
to the RUNWAY field.
(Figure 2-6)
------
TRANSITION
RW06L
------
<
<
RW06R
RW07L
RW07R
erase
Figure 2-6
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
SID:
The Standard Instrument Departure (SID) can be selected from a list
made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the SID
field.
TRANSITION:
The Transition waypoint can be selected from a list made available by
pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSITION field.
WAYPOINTS OF SID:
DEPARTURE
RUNWAY
KLAX 1/1
RW06L
GMN1
<
<
The waypoints that constitute
the SID. (Figure 2-7)
SID
TRANSITION
AVE
WAYPOINTS OF SID:
GMN
SELECT?:
COREZ
AVE
Used to select the defined
SID. (Figure 2-7)
<
<
ERASE:
SELECT?
eraseERASE
Used to erase a SID. (Figure
2-7)
Figure 2-7
ARRIVAL Page
Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to ARRIVE on the
FLIGHT PLAN Page. With the cursor over ARRIVE press ENT.
NOTE: Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that particu-
lar field or ARRIVAL field will flash if no Arrival is available, and a NO
STARS AVAILABLE message will appear at the bottom of the screen.
ARRIVAL:
Arrival airport identifier. This field prefills if the last waypoint on the
flight plan is an airport or run-
way, or can be manually
entered. (Figure 2-8)
ARRIVAL KLAX
RUNWAY
1/1
<
------
------
------
TRANSITION
STAR
<
RUNWAY:
RWO6L
<
<
Arriving runway. This field
prefills if the last waypoint on
the flight plan is a runway, or
can be selected from a list
made available by pressing
the Line Select Key adjacent
to the RUNWAY field.
(Figure 2-8)
RW06R
RW07L
RW07R
Figure 2-8
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
TRANSITION:
The Transition waypoint may be prefilled or selected from a list made
available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSI-
TION field.
STAR:
The Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be selected from a list
made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the
STAR field.
WAYPOINTS OF STAR:
ARRIVAL KLAX
RUNWAY
1/1
<
<
The waypoints that constitute
the STAR. (Figure 2-9)
RW06L
CIVET
CIVET1
TRANSITION
STAR
WAYPOINTS OF STAR:
SELECT?:
CIVET
BREMR
ARNES
Used to select the defined
STAR. (Figure 2-9)
<
<
SELECT?
ERASE
ERASE:
Used to erase a STAR.
(Figure 2-9 )
Figure 2-9
APPROACH Page
Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to APPROACH
on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. With the cursor over APPROACH
press ENT.
NOTE: Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that partic-
ular field or Approach Airport field will flash if no Approach is avail-
able and a NO APPROACH AVAILABLE message will appear at
the bottom of the screen.
APCH:
APCH KLAX
RUNWAY
TYPE
1/2
<
<
<
<
<
------
------
------
Approach airport identifier.
This field prefills if last way-
point on the flight plan is an
airport or runway, or can be
manually entered. (Figure 2-
10)
<
TRANSITION
RW24R
RW24L
RW07R
RW07L
<
eraseERASE
Figure 2-10
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
RUNWAY:
APCH KLAX
RUNWAY
1/1
RW24R
NDB
LAHAB
<
<
<
Approach runway prefills if
only one runway is available,
last waypoint on Flight Plan
is a runway, or can be select-
ed from a list made available
by pressing the Line Select
Key adjacent to the RUN-
WAY field. (Figure 2-11)
TYPE
TRANSITION
WPTS OF APPROACH:
IAF LAHAB MAP RW24R
LAX16
DOWNE
+++++
HP RAFFS
FAF OSNB
SELECT?erase
<
<
ERASE
TYPE (Circle, VOR, NDB, or
RNAV):
Figure 2-11
Type may be prefilled or selected from a list made available by press-
ing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TYPE field.
NOTE: If the runway selected on the Approach Page differs from the
runway dictated by the STAR, "SEL RWY FROM STAR PG" is dis-
played at the bottom of the screen.
TRANSITION:
The Transition waypoint may be prefilled or selected from a list made
available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSI-
TION field. (Figure 2-10)
WAYPOINTS OF APPROACH:
The waypoints that constitute the APPROACH. (Figure 2-11)
• HP (Holding Pattern):
Indicates a holding pattern is programmed at a particular waypoint.
(Figure 2-11)
• PT (Procedure Turn):
Indicates a Procedure Turn is programmed at a particular waypoint.
• ARC (DME ARC):
Indicates a DME ARC is programmed at a particular waypoint.
• IAF:
Indicates the Initial Approach Fix.
• FAF:
Indicates the Final Approach Fix.
• MAP:
Indicates the Missed Approach Fix.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
• FCF :
Indicates Final Approach Course Alignment Fix.
• ++++++:
Separates the missed approach procedure waypoint from the rest of
the approach. When the approach is flown, the system will continue
to provide guidance along the final approach course and beyond the
MAP until the pilot manually sequences to the missed approach way-
point by using a DIRECT TO or HEADING mode procedure. (Figure
2-11) No Auto Leg changes will occur beyond the last waypoint prior
to the fence. This type of fence will not cause waypoints of the active
flight plan to be deleted prior to the fence if a waypoint beyond the
fence is selected using the d function.
SELECT?:
Used to select the defined APPROACH. (Figure 2-11)
ERASE:
Used to erase an APPROACH. (Figure 2-11)
AIRWAY Page
Enroute Airways may be manually entered on a Flight Plan Page by
preceding the route or airway ident with a pound sign (#), e.g., #J (Jet
Airway), #V (VOR Airway), #UG (Upper Green)or #R (Red Airway).
The preceding waypoint on the Flight Plan must be part of the Airway
being entered in order for the Airway to be accepted. This waypoint
will normally be the From waypoint on the AIRWAY Waypoint Page.
AIRWAY:
AIRWAY
FR MEM
J29
1/1
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
ROD
Airway identifier. (Figure 2-12)
TIGRS
TINGS
PXV
DJB
FR:
CXR14
DORET
JHW
Starting point on airway.
(Figure 2-12)
IMPEL
JUDDI
KURTZ
SYR
<
<
TUPER
LAGGS
TO:
<TO KURTZ?
SELECT ENDING WPT
Ending point on airway as
selected by the operator.
(Figure 2-12)
Figure 2-12
SELECT ENDING WPT:
Select the desired ending waypoint on the airway, by moving the cur-
sor up or down and depress ENT. (Figure 2-12)
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
ACTIVE FPL (Flight Plan)Page
FR:
ACTIVE FPL
FR MEM
TO BWG
1/2
Current FROM waypoint.
May also display DIRECT,
PSEUDO VORTAC, DME
ARC, or PROCEDURE
TURN. (Figure 2-13)
205 11
<
<
------
KDAL
DFW
KHART
-CMK
<DEPART
TO:
ARRIVE
DIS
<
<
APPROACH
ERASE
Current TO waypoint.
(Figure 2-13)
Figure 2-13
Waypoint Identifiers:Up to
100 waypoint identifiers may be placed on the Active Flight Plan
Pages. An identifier may be used more than once on the same Flight
Plan.
• Indented Waypoints: indicate a SID, STAR, or APPROACH
Procedure is part of the Flight Plan. (Figure 2-13, DFW)
• HP (Holding Pattern): indi-
ACTIVE FPL
RYMES
2/2
-10 3000
2000G
cates a holding pattern is
programmed at a particular
waypoint. (Figure 2-14)
ISLET
<
<
<
<
MAPRW34
++++++
HP CMK
******
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
435G
• PT (Procedure Turn): indi-
cates a procedure turn is
programmed at a particular
waypoint.
ALT
<
ERASE
------: A "fence" separating the
current FR/TO leg from the
originally selected Active Flight
Figure 2-14
Plan when the TO waypoint is not on the original Flight Plan. Also sepa-
rates non-continuous Flight Plan segments. (Figure 2-13) No Auto Leg
change will occur to waypoints that appear after the fence. This type of
fence will not cause waypoints of the active flight plan to be deleted
prior to the fence if a waypoint beyond the fence is selected using the
d function.
NOTE: When a "fence" (++++++) appears in an Approach it separates
the missed approach holding fix from the rest of the approach. (Figure 2-
14) No Auto Leg change will occur to waypoints beyond the fence.
******:
Same as stored Flight Plan Page.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
DEPART:
Same as stored Flight Plan Page.
ARRIVE:
Same as stored Flight Plan Page.
APPROACH:
Same as stored Flight Plan Page.
ETA: (ETE/DIS/ALT)
Estimated Time of Arrival at
each waypoint on the Active
Flight Plan based on current
groundspeed. (Figure 2-15)
ACTIVE FPL
1/2
DIRECT
TO KHART
19DFW
19:37
19:49
20:13
21:03
21:22
ELD
MEI
NOTE: When the cursor is
placed over the ETA field and
the BACK Key is pressed,
ETE, DIS, or ALT can be dis-
played. Press ENT to select
the desired option. No ETE,
ETA, ALT or DIS information
DELBE
<
<
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETA
<
ERASE
Figure 2-15
is displayed for waypoints beyond the missed approach "fence"
(++++++) or the flight plan discontinuity (------).
ETE:
Estimated Time Enroute between waypoints on the Active Flight Plan
based on current groundspeed.
DIS:
ACTIVE FPL
2/2
3000
RYMES
ISLET
-10
Distance between each way-
point on the Active Flight
Plan.
2000G
435G
<
<
MAPRW34
++++++
HP CMK
******
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ALT:
<
<
Constraint altitude and way-
point offset of programmed
VNAV waypoints for applica-
ble waypoints on the Active
Flight Plan (Figure 2-16).
ALT
<
ERASE
Figure 2-16
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
NOTE: No database altitude constraints will be displayed at the MAP
if the MAP is abeam or beyond the runway threshold . No altitude
constraints are displayed on an approach if a PT is part of the
approach procedure.
The following may appear in the waypoint altitude field:
• FL: Flight Level
• A: at or above
• B: at or below
• G: glide path (programmed Flight Path Angle)
NOTE: If an approach is programmed at the destination airport, and
the MAP is the end of the runway, the altitude value displayed next to
the MAP is approximately 50 feet above the runway threshold eleva-
tion. If the MAP is prior to the end of the runway and the approach is
straight-in, the altitude displayed at the MAP is computed based on a
line drawn from the FAF through the MAP to a point 50 feet above
the runway threshold. The altitude may not be the MDA (Figure 2-
16). If no approach is programmed, the altitude value will be the air-
port elevation regardless of runway selection. The MAP altitude is
shown in yellow.
The Waypoint VNAV offset is given in nautical miles where a nega-
tive (-)offset is prior to the waypoint (Figure 2-16, interpreted as
"cross ten miles before RYMES at 3000 feet") and a positive offset is
after the waypoint. If dashes appear in the altitude constraint field,
NO altitude is programmed at that waypoint.
ERASE:
Same as for Stored Flight Plans except the current FROM/TO leg
cannot be erased. The Active Flight Plan is automatically erased
upon system shut-down.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
NAVIGATION SECTION (NAV KEY)
Upon pressing the NAV Key the NAVIGATION 1/4 Page will be dis-
played and the following can be observed.
NAVIGATION PAGES
NOTE: If AFIS is installed in the system, the NAV section will consist
of five pages.
NAVIGATION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4)
FR:
The FROM waypoint identifier
is displayed on the left. If the
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
FR 19DFW
TO ELD
20:28
20:30
system has a valid ground
speed, the time of departure
or time overhead at that way-
point displayed on the right.
This line can also display
DIRECT, HOLD, PROCE-
DURE TURN, DME ARC or
PSEUDO VORTAC. (Figure
2-17)
<
>
>
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
1.6
00:00.6
074
156
WIND
284/ 7
>
-AUTO-
Figure 2-17
TO:
The TO waypoint identifier is displayed on the left. If the system has a
valid ground speed, the ETA at that waypoint is displayed on the right.
The TO field may also display AR, HP or PT if the waypoint indicates
a DME ARC, Holding Pattern or Procedure Turn. The ETA field can
be changed to display constraint altitude and waypoint offset distance
if an altitude constraint has been programmed at the current TO way-
point by placing the cursor over this field and dressing the BACK Key
(Figure 2-17) See Section 3 for the procedure.
NX:
This line is normally blank (Figure 2-18) except during Waypoint Alert
(30 seconds prior to crossing the TO waypoint). In this case the next
(NX) waypoint identifier on the Active Flight Plan and the ETA at that
waypoint is displayed (Figure 2-19). When a Procedure Turn, Holding
Pattern, Heading, or Heading Intercept mode is in use, appropriate
information pertaining to that mode will be displayed in this field.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
DIS:
NAVIGATION 1/4
FR 19DFW
<
<
20:28
20:30
21:49
1.6
The distance in nautical miles
and tenths from the aircraft
present position to the TO
waypoint. During Waypoint
Alert, the distance in whole
nautical miles to the NX way-
point on the Active Flight
Plan is displayed in parenthe-
ses. (Figure 2-18)
TO ELD
NX MEI
DIS
<
(42)
(90)
ETE
00:00.6
074
DTK
<
<
GS
156
WIND
284/ 7
-AUTO-
Figure 2-18
ETE:
The estimated time enroute in hours, minutes and tenths, from the air-
craft present position to the TO waypoint based on current ground-
speed. (Figure 2-18)
DTK:
The desired track is the Great Circle course in whole degrees
between the FROM and TO waypoints. When in the PSEUDO VOR-
TAC mode, the DTK is entered by the operator. During the Waypoint
Alert, desired track to the next (NX) waypoint on the Active Flight Plan
is displayed in parentheses. (Figure 2-18)
NOTE: The DTK field will be dashes if the FROM waypoint or pre-
sent position are north of N 70° or south of S 60° Latitude, unless a
manual MAG VAR is entered or a discrete MAG/True switch is moved
to the True position.
GS:
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
The current groundspeed.
(Figure 2-19)
FR KHART
TO 19DFW
20:02
-10 15000A
<
<
DIS
47.3
00:19.4
079
WIND:
ETE
The current wind direction
referenced to True North and
speed in knots. (Figure 2-
19)
DTK
<
<
GS
146
WIND
160/ 14
XFILL? -AUTO-
Figure 2-19
XFILL:
If the aircraft is configured for dual systems, the XFILL prompt will
appear on line 10 indicating the systems contain dissimilar data.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
NOTE: XFILL will not appear when DME ARC, ARC Intercept,
Procedure Turn or Holding Pattern are in progress on the system
performing the procedure.
AUTO:
The leg change mode. AUTO or MAN, may be selected if the cursor
is over this field using the BACK Key. (Figure 2-19) If AUTO is
selected the system will sequence to the next leg on the FPL. If MAN
is selected the system will not sequence to the next leg on the FPL
and fly the current track.
NAVIGATION 1/4 with a Holding Pattern, Procedure Turn, Heading,
or Heading Intercept Programmed.
HOLD:
NAVIGATION 1/4
Indicates that a Holding
<
HOLD RIGHT
AT MEI
MANUAL
20:41
Procedure has been initiated
and is displayed 30 seconds
prior to crossing the HP way-
point. (Figure 2-20)
<
<
HOLDING
DIS
3.3
00:08.3
101
ETE
INBOUND CRS
<
<
• RIGHT or LEFT:
GS
159
WIND
292/ 10
Indicates the programmed
turn direction around the
holding pattern as entered on
the HOLD Page. (Figure 2-
20)
Figure 2-20
• MANUAL or AUTO:
Indicates the programmed exit mode as entered on the Hold Page.
Selecting MANUAL initiates a continuous hold at the fix until some
action is taken by the pilot to exit the hold. Selecting AUTO will cause
the aircraft to EXIT HOLD the next time the aircraft passes over the
fix (Figure 2-21). If AUTO is programmed during the hold procedure,
the aircraft will sequence to the next waypoint on the Active Flight
Plan the next time the hold fix is crossed. This field can be edited
using the BACK Key when the cursor is over this field. (Figure 2-20)
AT:
The Holding Pattern procedure is in progress at the TO waypoint and
the ETA next time over the holding fix if ETA has been selected and
the system has a valid ground speed. This field can also display the
following: (Figure 2-20)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
• HP (Holding Pattern):
Indicates a holding pattern is programmed at the TO waypoint.
• PT (Procedure Turn):
Indicates a procedure turn is programmed from the database at the
TO waypoint. The airplane will fly the procedure turn. The next time
over the PT waypoint, the system will sequence to the following way-
point on the flight plan.
• AR (DME Arc)
Indicates a DME Arc is programmed at the TO waypoint.
HOLDING STATUS MESSAGE: (Line 4)
• DIRECT ENTRY:
Indicates the system will use a direct entry to the holding pattern.
(This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the holding pro-
cedure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix.) (Figure 2-
20)
• TEARDROP ENTRY:
Indicates the system will use a teardrop entry to the holding pattern.
(This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the hold proce-
dure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix the second
time.)
• PARALLEL ENTRY:
Indicates the system will use a parallel entry to the holding pattern.
(This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the hold proce-
dure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix the second
time.)
• HOLDING:
Normal status while holding.
• EXIT HOLD:
Indicates the system will exit the holding pattern the next time over
the holding fix. The ETE to the holding fix is also displayed.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
DIS:
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
<
HOLD RIGHT
AUTO
20:41
00:07.9
4.8
The direct distance in nauti-
cal miles and tenths from the
aircraft present position to
the holding fix. (Figure 2-21)
<AT MEI
EXIT HOLD
DIS
<
ETE
00:07.9
101
INBOUND CRS
GS
ETE:
154
WIND
286/ 12
The estimated time enroute
to the next time over holding
fix based on the path around
the Hold “racetrack”. (Figure
2-21)
Figure 2-21
INBOUND CRS (course):
The inbound holding course in whole degrees. (Figure 2-21)
GS:
The current groundspeed. (Figure 2-21)
WIND:
The current wind direction referenced to True North and speed in
knots. (Figure 2-21)
NOTE: The leg change mode (AUTO or MAN normally displayed on
the last line of NAVIGATION Page 1) is not displayed while holding.
NAVIGATION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4)
Pressing the NAV Key again will display the second NAVIGATION
Page and the following can be observed.
FR/DIRECT/HOLD/PROCEDURE TURN/DME ARC:
Same as discussed for NAVIGATION 1/4.
TO/AT/AR/HP/PT:
Same as discussed for NAVIGATION 1/4.
NX/Holding Status:
Same as discussed for NAVIGATION 1/4.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
WIND:
NAVIGATION 2/4
DIRECT
<
<
09:20
09:44
The first field displays head-
wind/tailwind in knots with an
up arrow (↑) for tailwind or a
down arrow (↓) for headwind.
The second field displays the
crosswind component in
knots with a right pointing
arrow (→) for a left cross-
wind or a left pointing arrow
(← ) for a right crosswind.
(Figure 2-22)
AT D259J
WIND % 11
ETA-RW11RC
FUEL-RW11RC
TKE
8&
09:54
1727
R 008
L 0.06
------
XTK
SXTK
TRMNL
Figure 2-22
ETA:
Estimated Time of Arrival at the last waypoint on the Active Flight
Plan prior to a “fence” (- - - - - or ++++++ ). A “fence” is a discontinu-
ity in the flight plan. No data is computed beyond the fence and there
is no Auto Leg change across the fence. (Figure 2-22)
FUEL:
Estimated fuel remaining at destination. (Figure 2-22)
TKE:
The Track Angle Error as defined as the difference between the
desired track and the actual track in degrees. R (right) and L (left)
are displayed to show the direction of error in relation to the desired
track.
XTK:
The crosstrack distance is the lateral displacement of the aircraft in
nautical miles and tenths left or right of the desired track (125 NM
maximum). TRMNL, APRCH or ENRTE is displayed to indicate the
current CDI sensitivity. A parenthesis around any of these indicates
the displayed sensitivity has been selected manually. See Section 3
for operating procedures (Figure 2-22). Scaling for the TRMNL,
APPR, and ENRTE CDI sensitivity is as follows:
Enroute:
5NM full scale deflection.
1NM full scale deflection.
0.3NM full scale deflection.
Terminal:
Approach:
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
SXTK:
The selected crosstrack distance entered by the pilot to provide
steering to an offset course parallel to the desired track (99.9 NM
maximum). (Figure 2-22)
NAVIGATION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4)
Pressing the NAV Key again will display the third NAVIGATION
Page and the following can be observed.
FR/DIRECT/HOLD/PROCEDURE TURN/DME ARC:
Same as NAVIGATION 1/4.
TO/AT/AR/HP/PT:
Same as NAVIGATION 1/4.
NX/Holding Status:
Same as NAVIGATION 1/4.
DRIFT:
NAVIGATION 3/4
<
FR VUZ
19:36
20:04
The drift angle, in whole
degrees, left or right of air-
craft heading compared to
current track. (Figure 2-23)
<TO VXV
<
DRIFT
VAR
TAS
HDG
BRG
TK
R 001
(MAN)
E
2
420
044
045
045
<
<
VAR:
The magnetic variation value
in whole degrees computed
automatically between N70
00.0 and S 60 00.0 latitude.
Manual variation can be
Figure 2-23
entered and overrides the automatic computation. Manual entry of
variation is required north of N70:00.0 and south of S60:00.0 latitude.
(MAN) will be displayed in the VAR field after a manual entry is
made. See Section 3 for procedures. (Figure 2-23)
TAS:
The aircraft true airspeed in knots received from the Air Data
Computer. If TAS is manually inserted, MAN will be displayed.
(Figure 2-23)
NOTE: The maximum enterable manual TAS is 850 knots. The TAS
field is enterable only if airdata is invalid.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
HDG:
The heading input received from an IRS or the aircraft compass sys-
tem. If HDG can be manually inserted, MAN will be displayed.
(Figure 2-23)
BRG:
The bearing in whole degrees from the aircraft present position to
the TO waypoint. (Figure 2-23)
TK:
The track angle in whole degrees. (Figure 2-23)
NAVIGATION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4)
Pressing the NAV Key again will display the fourth NAVIGATION
Page and the following can be observed.
IDENT:
A waypoint identifier of a fix to
NAVIGATION 4/4
be overflown can be entered
here to update the system
IDENT ------
>
position. (Figure 2-24)
POS N 34 42.56
>
W112 37.31
POS:
IRS
0.1
VPU
0.0
0.0
>
>
<
The current composite posi-
tion (latitude and longitude)
computed in degrees, min-
utes, and hundredths of min-
utes. (Figure 2-24)
GPS
Figure 2-24
VLF, IRS/INS, VPU, and GPS:
A listing of all interfaced sensors. The radial difference between the
individual sensor position and the composite position is displayed in
nautical miles and tenths. Sensors not being used in the composite
position solution will display the radial difference in yellow. Sensors
being used will display the radial difference in green. The GPS sen-
sor will normally be the sole contributing sensor to the composite
position as long as RAIM is available. (Figure 2-24)
NOTE: IRS radial error is always green because velocity values are
used to aid GPS position.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
VLF SUBSECTION PAGES
NOTE: The sensor SUBSECTION Pages may be accessed by plac-
ing the cursor over the individual position sensor and pressing the
ENT Key. Use the NAV, PRV or NXT Key to page through the sen-
sor SUBSECTION pages.
Accessed through the NAVIGATION 4/4 Page (if AFIS is installed in
the system, access is through the NAVIGATION 4/5 Page) by press-
ing the Line Select Key corresponding to the VLF sensor, then press-
ing ENT.
VLF SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4)
POS:
Same as on NAVIGATION 4/4.
VLF:
VLF
SUBSECTION
1/4
The actual position computed
by the sensor, when in the
NAV mode. (Figure 2-25)
POS N 38 49.90
W094 53.40
VLF N 38 49.90
W094 53.40
DIF:
The difference between the
composite position and the
sensor computed position in
degrees, minutes and hun-
dredths. (Figure 2-25)
DIF N
0.00
0.00
E
Figure 2-25
VLF SUBSECTION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4)
Pressing the NXT Key will display the second VLF SUBSECTION
Page and the following can be observed.
QUALITY:
Quality Factor is a numerical display that indicates the reliability of
position data and determines the weight of the VLF/Omega Sensor
input to the composite position. The number will range from 2 to 7
(with 2 being optimum) in the primary navigation mode, and from 8 to
99 in the dead reckoning mode (DR). NO STD will be displayed if the
rubidium frequency standard in the RPU is unstable. (Figure 2-26)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
DR#:
VLF
SUBSECTION
2/4
The number of times the
VLF/Omega Sensor has
been in DR since first enter-
ing the VLF (primary) naviga-
tion mode. This information
is not displayed if the system
has never been in DR.
(Figure 2-26)
QUALITY
DR#
2
1
3
8
6
8
2
DR TIME:
VLF
RCVD
USED
RCVD
USED
OMEGA
DR TIME:
Figure 2-26
The total number of minutes
the VLF/Omega Sensor has been in DR since the operator last man-
ually verified position. This information is not displayed if the system
has never been in DR. (Figure 2-26)
VLF RCVD:
The number of U.S. Naval Communication stations being received by
the VLF/Omega Sensor. (Figure 2-26)
USED:
The number of communication stations being used for navigation.
(Figure 2-26)
OMEGA RCVD:
The number of Omega stations being received by the VLF/Omega
Sensor. (Figure 2-26)
USED:
The number of Omega stations being used for navigation. (Figure 2-
26)
NOTE: A maximum of eight stations in any combination can be used
for navigation.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
VLF SUBSECTION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4)
Pressing the NXT Key again will display the third VLF SUBSECTION
Page and the following can be observed.
Column 1: (Figure 2-27) VLF COMM Stations
• WSH: Jim Creek, Washington
• AUS: Northwest Cape, Australia
• ANT: Anthorne, England
VLF
SUBSECTION
3/4
• MNE: Cutler, Maine
WSH
AUS
ANT
MNE
HAW
JPN
GBR
ANN
99
00
99
99
99
99
99
99
+
• HAW: Lualualei, Hawaii
• JPN: Yosami, Japan
• GBR: Rugby, England or
<
<
TOO FAR
+
+
+
<
<
SPARE
• ANN: A n n a p o l i s ,
Maryland
+
+
Figure 2-27
Column 2:
The station amplitude ranging from 01 (minimum acceptable) to 99
(maximum strength). Dashes (-) indicate the station amplitude is less
than the minimum acceptable. (Figure 2-27)
Column 3: Status Messages. (Figure 2-27)
+: The station is being used for navigation.
-: The station is weak or unacquired.
TOO FAR:
The station is not used because of its distance from the aircraft posi-
tion.
SPARE:
The station is acquired and acceptable but is not needed for naviga-
tion.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
DESELECT:
The station has been manually deselected.
CUTOUT:
The station has been eliminated from use because its position deter-
mining information is unacceptable.
UNSTABLE:
The station has sufficient amplitude for use but has not passed the
stability test.
FAILED:
The computer has detected a failure in the receiver assigned to that
station. A message indicating a VLF/OMEGA receiver has failed will
be displayed on the sensor messages page as RCVR FAIL
VLF SUBSECTION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4)
Pressing the NXT Key again will display the fourth VLF SUBSEC-
TION Page and the following can be observed.
Column 1: (Figure 2-28) OMEGA Stations
• NOR: Aldra, Norway
• LIB: Liberia, Africa
VLF
SUBSECTION
4/4
• HAW: Haiku, Hawaii
NOR
LIB
HAW
DAK
REN
99
99
99
99
00
99
99
99
SPARE
<
<
SPARE
+
• DAK: LeMoure, N.
Dakota
+
TOO FAR
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
<ARG
• REN: Reunion Island,
Indian Ocean
AUS
<
JPN
• ARG: Gulfo Nuevo,
Argentina
Figure 2-28
• AUS: Darriman,
Australia
• JPN: Tsushima, Japan
Columns 2 and 3:
Same as VLF SUBSECTION 3/4.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
IRS/INS SUBSECTION PAGES
IRS (or INS) SUBSECTION 1/2 (Page 1 of 2)
POS:
IRS
SUBSECTION
1/2
The position in this field is
the same as POS on NAVI-
GATION 4/4. (Figure 2-29)
POS N 49 50.20
W111 41.60
IRS N 38 50.10
W094 55.20
IRS/INS:
The actual position comput-
ed by the specified sensor
when in NAV mode. (Figure
2-29)
DIF N 11 00.10
W 16 46.30
Figure 2-29
DIF:
The difference between the composite position and the sensor com-
puted position in degrees, minutes, and hundredths. (Figure 2-29)
IRS SUBSECTION 2/2 (Page 2 of 2)
TIME TO NAV:
IRS
SUBSECTION
IRS STATUS
2/2
The time remaining until
alignment is complete.
(Figure 2-30)
TIME TO NAV
----
CURRENT MODE:
CURRENT MODE:
This field annunciates the cur-
rent mode of the IRS. The
messages that can appear
are ATTITUDE, ALIGN, or
NAV. (Figure 2-30)
NAV
Figure 2-30
NOTE: Page 2 is only displayed with an IRS.
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Oct/96
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
VPU SUBSECTION PAGES
Accessed through the NAVIGATION 4/4 Page (if AFIS is installed in
the system, access is through the NAVIGATION 4/5 Page) by press-
ing the Line Select Key corresponding to the VPU sensor, then
pressing ENT.
VPU SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4)
POS:
VPU
SUBSECTION
1/4
The position in this field is
the same as POS on NAVI-
GATION 4/4. (Figure 2-31)
POS N 38 49.90
W094 53.40
VPU N 38 49.90
W094 53.40
VPU:
The actual position computed
by the sensor, when in the
NAV mode. (Figure 2-31)
DIF N
0.00
0.00
E
DIF:
Figure 2-31
The difference between the composite position and the sensor com-
puted position in degrees, minutes and hundredths. (Figure 2-31)
VPU SUBSECTION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4)
Pressing the NXT Key again will display the second VPU SUBSEC-
TION Page and the following can be observed.
QUALITY:
The numerical display in this field indicates the reliability of the posi-
tion data from the VPU. The number will range from 2 to 99 (with 2
being optimum and 99 as dead reckoning). (Figure 2-32)
ADVISE IF>:
VPU
SUBSECTION
2/4
This field is an enterable field
in which the operator may
input a quality factor value
from 2 to 98. If the VPU
QUALITY exceeds this value
a message is displayed on
QUALITY
ADVISE IF >
99
--
>
CURRENT MODE:
NO MEASURMENTS
SENSOR
MESSAGES
Page. (Figure 2-32)
Figure 2-32
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
NOTE: Entering 99 in this field will eliminate any previously entered
value and no CHECK QUALITY message will appear.
CURRENT MODE: Indicates the current mode of VPU navigation.
The messages that can appear under it: (Figure 2-32)
• NO MEASUREMENTS indicates that VPU is not receiving valid
data for navigation.
• VOR/DME indicates that distance and bearing (rho/theta) informa-
tion is used to generate VPU position.
• DME/DME indicates distance (rho/rho) data is received and used
to generate VPU position.
• BAD GEOMETRY indicates that station geometry is inadequate for
navigation.
NAV 1 - CONFLICT or NAV 2 - CONFLICT:
The VPU is not using a manually or keyboard tuned station because
of a possible station frequency conflict within the aircraft’s current
line-of-sight. (Figure 2-32)
VPU SUBSECTION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4)
Pressing the NXT Key again will display the third VPU SUBSECTION
Page and the following can be observed.
VPU Sensor With Single Channel DME Inputs (Figure 2-33)
NAV 1 and NAV 2:
VPU
SUBSECTION
3/4
The station identifier and fre-
quency being used for navi-
gation.
VPU STATIONS
NAV 1
PRX
113.60
51.2
RNG
BRG
NAV 2
RNG
BRG
RNG:
304
UIM
114.00
34.7
The range in nautical miles
and tenths from aircraft pre-
sent position to the DME sta-
tion.
252
Figure 2-33
BRG:
Bearing in whole degrees from aircraft present position to the VOR.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
VPU with Multiple Channel DME Inputs (Figure 2-34)
NAV 1:
VPU
SUBSECTION
3/4
The stations received by the
NAV 1 VOR/DME receivers.
The station identifier is
shown adjacent to the field
with the ACTIVE frequency.
VPU STATIONS
NAV 1
TCL
117.00
83.4
RNG
BRG
CH 2
RNG
CH 3
RNG
315
MXF
TGE
113.70
10.6
RNG:
117.30
42.5
Same as above.
BRG:
Figure 2-34
Same as above.
CH 2:
The station identifier and frequency for an additional station that the
multiple channel DME is receiving. This frequency may or may not
be displayed on the control head.
RNG:
The range in nautical miles and tenths from the aircraft’s present
position to the Channel 2 DME station.
CH 3:
The station identifier and frequency for the third station that is being
received. This frequency is not displayed on the control head, and is
automatically tuned by the system.
RNG:
Same as for CH 2.
NOTE: When the DM441B DME, dedicated DM441B, or dedicated
DME42 is configured, the VPU SUBSECTION 3/4 page is different.
The bearing information is suppressed and DME is annunciated
instead of NAV.
VPU SUBSECTION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4)
Pressing the NXT Key again will display the fourth VPU SUBSEC-
TION Page and the following can be observed. If the VPU has multi-
ple channel DME inputs VPU SUBSECTION 4/4 appears and dis-
plays NAV 2 data. The page appears the same as VPU SUBSEC-
TION 3/4.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
GPS SUBSECTION PAGES
Accessed through the NAVIGATION 4/4 Page (if AFIS is installed in
the system, access is through the NAVIGATION 4/5 Page) by press-
ing the Line Select Key corresponding to the GPS sensor, then
pressing ENT.
GPS SUBSECTION 1/3
GPS
SUBSECTION
1/3
(Page 1 of 3)
See Figure 2-35.
POS:
POS N 34 38.83
W112 25.08
GPS N 34 38.82
W112 25.10
The current composite posi-
tion (latitude and longitude)
computed in degrees, min-
utes, and hundredths of min-
utes.
DIF N
0.01
0.02
E
Figure 2-35
GPS:
The current GPS position. This information is only displayed when
GPS is in the NAV mode.
DIF:
The difference between the composite position and sensor computed
position in degrees, minutes and hundredths.
GPS SUBSECTION 2/3 (Page 2 of 3)
Pressing the NEXT Key will display the second GPS SUBSECTION
Page and the following can be observed. See Figure 2-36.
HPE:
Horizontal Position Error dis-
played in nautical miles as a
measure of GPS accuracy.
GPS
HPE
SUBSECTION
2/3
03.65NM
07.30NM
POS UNCERT
GPS TIME
STATE
23:43:55
NAVIGATION
POS UNCERT:
MODE
OCEANIC/REMOTE
Estimated
Position
ALT AIDED?
RAIM/FDE
YES
YES/YES
8
Uncertainty, in nautical miles,
when GPS is in navigation
mode.
SATS TRACKED
Figure 2-36
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
GPS TIME:
GPS time in hours, minutes and seconds. The advisory time is dis-
played when at least one satellite is being tracked, other-wise the
time field displays dashes.
NOTE: GPS TIME may vary several seconds from GMT due to leap
second input of UTC.
STATE:
The GPS receiver state can be one of the following:
Idle or no mode data.
Dashes:
INITIALIZE:
The receiver is updated with initial position and time
information.
SKY SEARCH: No almanac is available. The system searches for
any satellite in the visible table based on the internal
or external time, data, and position and then assigns
channels in order received.
ACQUISITION: Constellation selection and channel assignments are
being done. Carrier and code lock are in progress.
TRANSITION: The receiver is transitioning from one state, such as
ACQUISITION, to another state, such as NAVIGA-
TION.
NAVIGATION: The GPS receiver is in navigation mode and has at
least a two dimensional position fix.
DR:
The system is in dead reckon mode. When the posi-
tion is valid and sufficient satellite measurements are
unavailable, the receiver will continue to output valid
position for a maximum of 30 seconds while using
the last known velocity and track information. The
position is invalid after 30 seconds.
MODE:
Possible receiver modes are ENROUTE, OCEANIC/REMOTE, TER-
MINAL, and APPROACH. These modes are used to determine what
accuracy parameters should be used for a particular phase of flight.
ALT AIDED?:
Indicates the GPS receiver is using an externally supplied altitude
input for position calculation.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
RAIM/FDE?:
Indicates RAIM and/or FDE is AVAILable or UNAVAILable.
SATS TRACKED:
Indicates the number satellites presently being tracked.
GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 (Page 3 of 3)
Pressing the NXT Key again
will display the third GPS
SUBSECTION Page and the
GPS
SUBSECTION
3/3
SAT AZ EL SNR HLTH T
-- --- -- --- ----
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
-
following can be observed.
14 304 71
15 214 23
22 124 47
44 GOOD
40 GOOD
44 GOOD
43 GOOD
40 GOOD
36 GOOD
-- ----
This page displays the GPS
receiver status. The GPS
receiver is an 8 channel
receiver, therefore, up to 8
lines of satellite information
is displayed. The information
displayed is as follows:
(Figure 2-37)
25
46 35
29 304 40
18 288 10
-- --- --
Figure 2-37
GPS SAT:
This is the satellite (PRN) number.
AZ:
This is the satellite azimuth position displayed in degrees.
EL:
Satellite elevation displayed in degrees above the horizon.
SNR:
This the received signal-to-noise ratio for each satellite.
HLTH:
Satellite health is displayed as BAD or GOOD.
T:
YES or NO displayed as to whether this satellite is presently being
tracked.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
VERTICAL NAVIGATION SECTION (VNAV KEY)
Upon pressing the VNAV Key the VNAV 1/3 Page will be displayed
and the following can be observed.
VNAV PAGES
NOTE: AFIS flight plans do not support any altitudes, including air-
port elevation. As a result no altitude constraints will be provided for
SIDS, STARS or Approaches. If the airport, SIDs, STARS or
Approaches are obtained from the database altitudes will be provid-
ed.
In some programmed approaches, the altitude associated with the
MAP waypoint is computed from the FAF through the MAP waypoint
to a point 50 feet above the runway threshold. MDA may be reached
prior to the MAP waypoint. The MDA must be observed if the run-
way is not in sight.
VNAV 1/3 (Page 1 of 3)
VNAV MODE:
Mode required to fly to the vertical TO waypoint and Baro Altitude in
feet. Can display one of the following:
• INVALID: Indicates VNAV function is invalid. In order to be set
valid the following must be met:
1. Air Data valid (baro altitude and altitude rate)
2. Valid lateral TO Waypoint
3. Valid vertical TO waypoint
4. NO SXTK programmed
5. Crosstrack (XTK) < 12.5NM
• INACTIVE: VNAV system is not activated because non-volatile
memory was erased during software update or it was manually set
inactive before shutdown. Pressing the BACK Key with the cursor
over the inactive field can display one of the following:
NOTE: When VNAV Mode is inactive, all external VNAV outputs are
disabled, including VERT DEV, EFIS altitude constraints at waypoints
and VNAV WPT ALERT annunciation.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
• CLIMB: Indicates climb
required to cruise altitude or to
next altitude restriction.
(Figure 2-38)
VNAV 1/3
<
<
<
CLIMB
5566
TO #TOC
RANGE
ETE
FL350
300.4
<
<
(NM)
01:13.5
• CRUISE: Indicates holding
altitude while enroute to Top
of Descent (#TOD) point.
(Figure 2-39)
ACTUAL
FPM UP
400
CLIMB GRAD
97 /NM
<
DATA
• PATH DESCENT: Indicates
descent via programmed
Flight Path Angle. Vertical
Deviation will be enabled on
the Vertical Deviation needle
and the VERT DEV field is
active. The VERT DEV field
will not be displayed if there is
no vertical path programmed.
(Figure 2-40)
Figure 2-38
VNAV 1/3
(NM)
<
<
<
<
CRUISE
TO #TOD
RANGE
ETE
FL350
FL350
1214.4
08:06.8
800
@ #TOD FPM DN
ACTUAL FPM UP
0
<
• DESCENT: Indicates non-
path or Air Mass descent to
altitude restriction.
VERT DEV
DATA
-----
<
Figure 2-39
• LEVEL: Indicates aircraft
should fly level to next con-
straint.
VNAV 1/3
<
<
<
<
PATH DESCENT
FL345
FL250G
FL250
TO Waypoint:
TO ELD
EST CROSSING
-5
Vertical TO waypoint with con-
straint altitude and applicable
waypoint offset. Letters pre-
ceding or following the altitude
constraint have the following
meaning: FL=Flight Level, A=
At or Above, B=At or Below,
G=Glide Path, and a blank
space=At constraint.
REQUIRED FPM DN
ACTUAL FPM DN
600
600
VERT DEV HIGH
87
<
DATA?
Figure 2-40
One of the following system generated VNAV profile points may also
appear as the TO waypoint:
• #TOC: Indicates the Top of Climb target altitude. This point becomes
the Vertical TO Waypoint once the aircraft has passed the final climb
constraint waypoint and is climbing. (Figure 2-40)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
• #TOD: Indicates the Top of Descent target altitude where the aircraft
should begin its descent in order to arrive at the Descent Reference
Waypoint at the required altitude. (Figure 2-39)
NOTE: If no Descent Reference Waypoint with crossing altitude is pro-
grammed, the system will use the arrival airport elevation to fix the #TOD
as long as an airport is the last waypoint on the Active FPL.
EST CROSSING:
Altitude trajectory computed by the system to the Vertical TO waypoint
based on current groundspeed and vertical speed (Figure 2-40). This
field will display RANGE (NM) in miles and tenths when the Vertical TO
Waypoint is a #TOD or #TOC profile point. (Figure 2-39)
ETE:
The estimated time enroute in hours, minutes and tenths, from the aircraft
present position to the Vertical TO Waypoint, #TOC or #TOD. (Figure 2-
39)
REQUIRED FPM:
Required vertical speed in feet per minute to make the altitude constraint
based on current ground speed. UP indicates a positive vertical speed
and DN indicates a negative vertical speed (Figure 2-40). This field will
display @#TOD FPM DN when the Vertical TO Waypoint is the Top of
Descent and indicate the descent target vertical speed. (Figure 2-39)
ACTUAL FPM:
Actual vertical speed in feet per minute. UP indicates a positive vertical
speed and DN indicates a negative vertical speed. (Figures 2-39 and 2-
40)
VERT DEV:
Vertical deviation of aircraft from this descent path in feet. HIGH indicates
aircraft is above the path (Figure 2-40); LOW indicates aircraft is below
path. CLIMB GRAD xxx/NM is displayed during CLIMB mode to indicate
current aircraft climb performance in feet per nautical mile. (Figure 2-38)
NOTE: VERT DEV data field is dashes if the ETE to descent path inter-
cept is greater than one minute. This line will be blank if no FPA is pro-
grammed at descent reference waypoint. In this case #TOD will be deter-
mined using the default FPA from the VNAV DATA Page. However the
FPA must still be entered for the system to provide a path.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
DATA:
A prompt to access the VNAV DATA Page, by placing the cursor over the
DATA field and pressing the ENT Key. (Figure 2-40)
Figures 2-41 and 2-42 further illustrate the meanings of the fields on
VNAV Page 1.
VNAV 1/3
(NM)
VNAV 1/3
(NM)
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
CLIMB
TO #TOC
RANGE
ETE
15276
FL250
33.4
CRUISE
TO #TOD
RANGE
ETE
FL230
FL230
150.5
01:05.2
595
00:13.2
@ #TOD FPM DN
ACTUAL FPM UP
ACTUAL FPM
UP
595
0
<
<
CLIMB GRAD
DATA
233 /NM
VERT DEV
DATA
-----
<
<
#TOC
#TOD
HEMET -5
15000A
XYZ
10000G
VNAV 1/3
PATH DESCENT
TO XYZ
VNAV 1/3
<
<
<
<
<
<
12030
CLIMB
1862
15000A
15329
10000G
10500
TO HEMET
EST CROSSING
-5
<
<
EST CROSSING
REQUIRED FPM DN
1000
950
REQUIRED FPM UP
ACTUAL FPM UP
575
575
ACTUAL
FPM DN
VERT DEV HIGH
446
CLIMB GRAD
233 /NM
<
<
DATA
DATA
Progression of Vertical Waypoints from Climb to
Path Decent on VNAV 1/1
Figure 2-41
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
VNAV 1/3
<
<
<
CLIMB
15276
FL250
33.5
TO #TOC
<
RANGE
ETE
(NM)
00:13.2
ACTUAL FPM UP
595
CLIMB
CLIMB GRAD
DATA
233 /NM
<
Cruise Altitude =FL250
#TOC
Vertical
Speed
Last Departure altitude
constraint waypoint
Groundspeed
#TOC Range
1nm
NOTE: Top of Climb appears as a Vertical Waypoint on the
VNAV FPL Page when the aircraft is within 1 NM of
the last departure waypoint that has an altitude
constraint programmed
VNAV 1/3
<
<
PATH DESCENT
TO XYZ
12030
10000G
10500
<
<
EST CROSSING
REQUIRED FPM DN
1000
950
ACTUAL
FPM DN
DESCENT
VERT DEV HIGH
446
<
DATA
Vert Dev
Actual Vert Spd
Required Vert Spd
Est Crossing Alt
Programmed Descent Path
Direct
FPA
Programmed FPA
XYZ
10000G
Descent Reference
Wpt (at altitude constraint)
Definition of Climb and Decent on VNAV 1/1
Figure 2-42
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
VNAV 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) - FLIGHT PLAN WayPoint
Pressing the VNAV Key will display the second VNAV Page and the
following can be observed.
VNAV MODE: Mode required to fly to the vertical TO waypoint and
Baro Altitude in feet. Can display one of the following:
• INVALID: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• INACTIVE: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• CLIMB: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• CRUISE: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• PATH DESCENT: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• DESCENT: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• LEVEL: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
VNAV 2/3
<
<
<
<
<
<
WAYPOINTS:
PATH DESCENT
FL338
FL250G
FL250
-----
ELD
-5
Lateral and Vertical way-
points listed in order of
occurrence with respect to
the vertical profile, with con-
straint altitude and applicable
waypoint offset, where
FL=Flight Level, A= At or
Above, B=At or Below,
G=Glide Path, and a blank
space=At constraint. (Figure
2-43)
#PRESL
MEI
DELBE
VUZ
-----
FL180
-----
<
<
<
<
VXV
BOSEY
-----
ERASE
Figure 2-43
VNAV 3/3
<
<
<
<
<
<
One of the following system
generated VNAV profile
points may also appear:
PATH DESCENT
FL338
FL250
-----
-----
2000G
435G
#T0D
BDR
ALIXX
ISLET
RW34
• #TOC: Indicates the Top of
Climb target altitude.
<
<
<
<
+++++++
CMK
-----
2000A
ERASE
• #TOD: Indicates the Top
of Descent target altitude.
(Figure 2-44)
Figure 2-44
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
• #PRESL: Indicates the estimated position where the aircraft will
arrive at the altitude shown on the Altitude Pre-Selector. Field does
not appear unless the system is configured for an altitude preselector
and the aircraft is flying toward this altitude. (Figure 2-44)
++++++ :
A discontinuity in the flight plan that separates the missed approach
waypoint from the rest of the approach. (Figure 2-43) No Auto Leg
change will occur beyond this point.
WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS:
VNAV 1/X
May consist of from one to
DEN
-----
5883
six alphanumeric characters.
If more identifiers are present
than can be listed on this
page, subsequent pages will
list the remaining waypoints.
(Figure 2-45)
KAPA
<
<
<
DATA
ERASE
NOTE: Waypoints cannot
be added to the active flight
plan from the VNAV section.
Enter new waypoints on
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
Figure 2-45
ERASE:
Used to erase all altitude constraints, except the altitude constraint at
the current lateral TO Waypoint.
VNAV DATA 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)
NOTE: This page is accessed by using the Line Select Key to place
the cursor over the DATA prompt on VNAV Page 1/X and pressing
ENT Key.
CRUISE ALT:
Manually entered cruise altitude in feet or Flight Level (FL). Any alti-
tude entered greater than the transition level is converted and dis-
played as flight level (rounded off to the nearest hundred feet). An
altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding zero.
(Figure 2-46)
NOTE: In a climb, when the aircraft is within 200ft of the Preselect
Altitude, the CRUISE ALT changes to the same value as the PRE-
SEL ALT.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
The field also goes to dashes during a descent (digital systems only)
when the aircraft is 200ft lower than the CRUISE ALT and the
Preselect is set to a lower value. If the PRESEL is analog the altitude
value will remain in the CRUISE ALT field. When the aircraft is within
200ft of the PRESEL ALT the CRUISE ALT changes again to the
same value as the PRESEL ALT.
TRANS LEVEL:
Transition Level used to
VNAV DATA 1/1
determine the altitude at
which the system converts
altitudes to Flight Levels.
This field defaults to FL180 if
the pilot does not enter a
value. (Figure 2-46)
<
<
<
<
CRUISE ALT
TRANS LEVEL
DEFAULT FPA
FL250
FL180
3.0
PRESEL ALT
FL250
33.7
<
RANGE
ETE
(NM)
DEFAULT FPA:
00:13.6
<
The FPA defaults to the 3.0
unless it is manually entered.
The default descent Flight
Path Angle can be manually
Figure 2-46
entered in degrees and tenths (0.1 to 6.0 range) (Figure 2-46).
DEFAULT FPA is used to calculate #TOD to the first altitude con-
straint on the Active Flight Plan. However an FPA must be entered
on the VNAV waypoint page to establish a PATH DESCENT and for
Vert Dev or vertical deviations to be valid.
NOTE: Pilot enters numbers only, as the decimal point (.) prefills as
a default.
PRESEL ALT:
If configured, Preselected Altitude input from system, in feet or Flight
Level. (Figure 2-46)
NOTE: An analog type preselector only displays PRESEL ALT
when the aircraft is within 1000ft of actual altitude.
RANGE (NM):
If configured, Range to Pre-selected Altitude in nautical miles and
tenths (0.0 to 999.9 range). (Figure 2-46)
ETE:
If configured, the estimated time enroute to the Pre-selected Altitude
in hours, minutes and tenths. (Figure 2-46)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)
Accessed by placing the cursor over a lateral WPT and pressing the
VNAV Key or by placing the cursor over a WPT in the VNAV section
and pressing ENTER key.
WAYPOINT:
VNAV waypoint will consist of from one to six alphanumeric charac-
ters.
ALT:
Constraint altitude prefills from database or can be manually entered.
Any altitude entered greater than the transition level (from the VNAV
DATA Page) is converted and displayed as flight level rounded off to
the nearest hundred feet. An altitude less than 1000 feet must be
entered with a preceding zero. Altitudes below sea level are limited
to -1000 feet. The following may appear in the altitude field:
• FL: Flight Level (Preceding the Altitude Value)
• A: At or Above (Following the Altitude Value)
• B: At or Below (Following the Altitude Value)
• Blank space: At (Following the Altitude Value)
NOTE: If the destination airport or runway is manually entered, or if
the airport/runway is loaded from the database, the airport elevation
will be displayed in the altitude field. If the flight plan is loaded
through AFIS, the airport elevation will not be available.
EST CROSSING:
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT ISTET
Altitude trajectory computed
ALT
2000
FL250
---
by the system to the Vertical
TO Waypoint based on cur-
rent groundspeed and
Vertical speed. (Figure 2-47)
This field is displayed for the
active vertical waypoint.
<
<
<
EST CROSSING
OFFSET
REQ FPM
DN
825
FPA
(AUTO) DN
3.0
DIRECT FPA DN
2.8
Figure 2-47
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
PLAN CROSSING:
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT VUZ
System determined crossing
based on programmed con-
straints and flight path angles
for descent. (Figure 2-48)
This field is displayed for
other than the Active Vertical
Waypoint and will be dis-
played in place of EST
CROSSING.
ALT
FL180
<
EST CROSSING
OFFSET
FL180
---
<
<
REQ FPM
DN
825
3.0
FPA
(AUTO) DN
DIRECT FPA DN
0.4
Figure 2-48
OFFSET:
Pilot entered value in nautical miles (-99 to +99 range) where a posi-
tive entry (+) indicates an offset beyond the waypoint and a negative
(-) entry is prior to the waypoint.
NOTE: Pilot must enter the leading (+) sign for the offset to be
beyond the fix, but a (-) prefills as a default to cross prior to the fix.
REQ FPM (Required Feet Per Minute):
Required vertical speed in feet per minute the aircraft must maintain to
reach the Vertical waypoint. UP indicates a positive vertical speed
and DN indicates a negative vertical speed is required.
NOTE: If PLAN CROSSING is displayed, then the REQ FPM is the
planned vertical speed for the waypoint. REQ FPM will be dashes if
ground speed or air data is not valid.
FPA (Flight Path Angle):
Flight Path Angle for path descent to waypoint in degrees and tenths
with valid range 0.1 to 6.0. The following may appear in parentheses:
• DB: Indicates FPA from
database.
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT ELD
• MAN: Indicates manually
entered FPA.
ALT
FL250
FL254
-5
<
<
<
EST CROSSING
OFFSET
• DIR: Indicates direct FPA
programmed. (Figure 2-49)
REQ FPM
DN
625
FPA
(DIR) DN
2.3
DIRECT FPA DN
2.3
• AUTO: Indicates system
computed FPA.
Figure 2-49
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
• DEF: Indicates FPA default from VNAV DATA Page.
NOTE: DIR, AUTO, and DEF can be accessed using the BACK Key.
DIRECT FPA:
Direct Flight Path Angle from the current aircraft altitude to the Vertical
waypoint in degrees and tenths (valid range 0.0 to 90.0), where DN
indicates negative FPA and UP indicates positive FPA.
AFIS SECTION (AFIS KEY)
Refer to Section 7 for description and operation of AFIS.
PLANNING SECTION (PLAN KEY)
Upon pressing the PLAN Key the PLAN 1/8 Page will be displayed
and the following can be observed.
PLAN PAGES
PLAN 1/8 (Page 1 of 8) FUEL STATUS
FUEL STATUS LB:
PLAN 1/8
Indicates that fuel is being
computed in pounds. This
unit can be manually changed
to KG if desired, using the
BACK Key when the cursor
is over the LB field. (Figure
2-50)
FUEL STATUS
REMAINING
LB
2990
1000
1200
>
>
RESERVE
FLOW
HOURS
RANGE
NM/LB
01+39
229
0.115
NOTE: the cursor must first
be placed over the remaining
field so the LB field can be
activated.
Figure 2-50
REMAINING:
The total fuel on board in pounds or kilograms. This quantity must be
initially entered or verified by the pilot and may require periodic verifica-
tion or update. (Figure 2-50)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
RESERVE:
The desired reserve, as entered or verified by the operator, displayed
in pounds or kilograms. This may require periodic verification or
update. (Figure 2-50)
FLOW:
The current fuel flow in pounds or kilograms input automatically from
fuel flow indicators. (MAN) indicates a pilot manual entry and the entry
must be manually verified and periodically updated. (Figure 2-51)
NOTE: The above three quantities will flash after 15 minutes and will
require verification by using the Line Select and ENT Keys if MAN
fuel flow was selected.
VERIFY INPUTS:
PLAN 1/8
FUEL STATUS
REMAINING
RESERVE
FLOW
LB
Each of the flashing values
must be verified or entered
by pressing the ENT Key
when the cursor is over each
field. This field is only dis-
played after the system is
turned on and will be dis-
played in place of the LAST
INPUT field on line 6. (Figure
2-51)
2990
1000
1200
00:15
>
>
(MAN)
LAST INPUT:
HOURS
RANGE
NM/LB
01+39
229
0.115
Figure 2-51
LAST INPUT:
The time in hours and minutes since the above three quantities were
verified. This field only appears if fuel flow is input manually. (Figure
2-51)
NOTE: This field displays VERIFY INPUTS at system turn-on since
REMAINING and RESERVE are stored in non-volatile memory dur-
ing system shut-down.
HOURS:
The hours and minutes of fuel remaining until the reserve fuel quanti-
ty is reached. (Figure 2-50) Fuel flow and ground speed must be
valid.
RANGE:
The nautical mile range available until the reserve fuel quantity is
reached. (Figure 2-50) Fuel flow and ground speed must be valid.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
NM/LB:
The number of nautical miles for each pound (or kilogram) of fuel
consumed. (Figure 2-50)Fuel flow and ground speed must be valid.
PLAN 2/8 (Page 2 of 8) TRIP PLAN
Pressing the PLAN Key again will display the PLAN 2/8 Page.
This page may be used to monitor the Active Flight Plan progress or a
stored flight plan may be loaded on this page for planning purposes.
TRIP PLAN:
PLAN 2/8
<
The flight plan selected will
TRIP PLAN
DIRECT
A
KDAL
RW34
be designated by an "A" for
the Active Flight Plan, a
number (1 to 56) for a stored
flight plan, or - - - dashes if
no active Flight Plan is
loaded. (Figure 2-52)
<
TO ELD
GS
(MAN)
254
<
DIS/DTK
ETE
21.0/T073
00:16.5
FPL
1346/05+18
16:18
ETA @ LIT
RAIM @ LIT
<
AVAIL
FR:
The FROM waypoint identifi-
er is followed on the same
Figure 2-52
line by the first waypoint (origin) on the selected flight plan (KDAL).
The FROM waypoint is usually replaced by DIRECT. (Figure 2-52)
TO:
The TO waypoint identifier is followed on the same line by the last
waypoint (destination) on the selected flight plan (RW34). (Figure 2-
52)
GS:
The groundspeed in knots is input automatically when the ground-
speed is valid or can be inserted manually which is indicated by
(MAN). The GS value, (MAN) and ETA value will change to yellow.
(CALC) will replace (MAN) field if a manual ETA is entered on line 9.
(Figure 2-52)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
DIS/DTK:
The distance in nautical miles and tenths between either the FROM
and TO waypoints or between the aircraft's present position and the
TO waypoint. The desired track is the Great Circle course between
the FROM and TO waypoints. The DTK will have a T adjacent to it if
a true heading input is received or if the FROM waypoint is north N
70° or south S 60° latitude. (Figure 2-52)
ETE:
The estimated time enroute in hours, minutes and tenths of minutes
between the aircraft's present position and the TO waypoint or the
FROM and TO waypoints based on the GS value. (Figure 2-52)
FPL:
The total active or stored flight plan distance and time remaining via the
Flight Planned route from the FROM waypoint, (or the aircraft's present
position when a Direct To leg is displayed), to the last waypoint on the
selected flight plan that precedes a "fence". Distance is displayed in
whole miles and time is in hours and minutes. (Figure 2-52)
ETA @:
Estimated time of arrival at the destination, or last waypoint on the
Active Flight Plan that precedes a "fence", appears when a DIRECT
TO leg is displayed. (Figure 2-52)
NOTE: The ETA value field will turn yellow if a ground speed is
entered manually, indicating that the ETA is calculated based on the
manual ground speed value. The GS field will turn yellow and
(CALC) will be displayed if a manual ETA value is entered.
RAIM @:
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring at the last flight plan way-
point will display AVAIL (available) or NOT AVAIL (not available) at
the ETA. If a manual ground speed or ETA has been entered,
STANDBY will be displayed momentarily while the system calculates
RAIM availability. If GPS is not functioning, NO NAV will be dis-
played.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
PLAN 3/8 (Page 3 of 8) FUEL PLAN
Pressing the FPL Key again will display the PLAN 3/8 Page.
FUEL PLAN:
PLAN 3/8
<
FUEL PLAN
DIRECT
A
KDAL
RW34
The "A" indicates that Active
Flight Plan information is
being displayed. A numeric
entry in the field provides fuel
planning for stored flight
plans. (Figure 2-53) Dashes
are displayed if there is no
active Flight Plan.
<
TO ELD
GS
(MAN)
(MAN)
250
400
<
FLOW
LEG FUEL
FPL FUEL
105
2148
REM @ RW34
675
Figure 2-53
FR:
The FROM waypoint identifier is followed on the same line by the first
waypoint (origin) on the selected flight plan. The FROM waypoint is
usually replaced by DIRECT. (Figure 2-53)
TO:
The TO waypoint identifier is followed on the same line by the last
waypoint (destination) on the selected flight plan. (Figure 2-53)
GS:
The ground speed in knots is input automatically when the ground-
speed is valid or can be input manually, which is indicated by (MAN).
GS value and (MAN) will be yellow. (Figure 2-53)
FLOW:
The fuel flow in pounds or kilograms is input automatically from fuel
flow indicators/transmitters or can be inserted manually, which is indi-
cated by (MAN). (Figure 2-53)
LEG FUEL:
The amount of fuel in pounds (or kilograms) used on the current
FROM/TO leg or from the aircraft's present position to the current TO
waypoint, based on groundspeed, fuel flow and distance. (Figure 2-
53)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
FPL FUEL:
The total amount of fuel anticipated to be consumed to the last way-
point on the flight plan that precedes a "fence". This calculated value
is based on the current fuel flow, groundspeed values and distance.
(Figure 2-53)
REM @:
Appears only if a DIRECT TO leg is displayed. It indicates the
amount of fuel remaining overhead at destination, or the last way-
point on the Flight Plan that precedes a "fence", under current condi-
tions. This value is based on the REMAINING fuel quantity from the
FUEL STATUS page minus the total FPL fuel (Figure 2-53). The
entire REM @ field will turn yellow if the REM @ value is less than
the programmed reserve on PLAN 1/8 Page.
PLAN 4/8 (Page 4 of 8) FUEL FLOW
Pressing the FPL Key again
will display the PLAN 4/8
Page.
PLAN 4/8
FUEL FLOW
ENGINE 1
ENGINE 2
ENGINE 3
ENGINE 4
300
298
295
307
ENGINE:
The fuel flow, in pounds or
kilograms per hour, for each
engine as taken from the fuel
flow indication system. the
number of engines shown
will depend on system con-
figuration. (Figure 2-54).
TOTAL
1200
Figure 2-54
TOTAL:
The total fuel flow, in pounds or kilograms per hour, from all engines.
(Figure 2-54)
NOTE: This page will appear only if the system is configured for
automatic fuel flow and the individual engine fuel flow is available.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
PLAN 5/8 (Page 5 of 8) DATE/GMT
Pressing the PLAN Key again will display the PLAN 5/8 Page.
DATE:
Same as the Initialization Page.
GMT:
Same as the Initialization Page.
NOTE: If necessary, both DATE and GMT can be corrected on this
page but the takeoff and time values will be affected.
TAKEOFF:
PLAN 5/8
The GMT at weight-off-
wheels plus 10 seconds.
(Figure 2-55)
DATE
GMT
18 FEB 95
14:13
<
TAKEOFF
LAND
20:43
22:45
LAND:
The GMT at weight-on-
wheels. This field is not dis-
played until weight-on-wheels
plus 10 seconds occurs.
(Figure 2-55)
FLIGHT TIME
02+02
Figure 2-55
NOTE: TAKEOFF and LAND times may be based on groundspeed
and/or TAS valids depending upon system configuration.
FLIGHT TIME:
The elapsed flight time is displayed in hours and minutes. (Figure 2-55)
PLAN 6/8 (Page 6 of 8) AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
Pressing the PLAN Key
again will display the PLAN
PLAN 6/8
6/8 Page.
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
BASIC OP WT:
BASIC OP WT
PAYLOAD
7400
400
<
<
<
The combined weight in
pounds or kilograms of the
empty aircraft, crew mem-
bers, and crew baggage.
(Figure 2-56)
FUEL ON BOARD
VERIFY FUEL
FUEL USED
GROSS WT
2937
101
10737
Figure 2-56
PAYLOAD:
Weight in pounds or kilograms of passengers, cargo, and baggage
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
(excluding crew). (Figure 2-56)
FUEL ON BOARD:
Weight in pounds or kilograms of fuel on board. (Figure 2-56)
VERIFY INPUTS:
Each of the flashing values must be verified or entered by pressing the
ENT Key when the cursor is over each field. This field is displayed
only after system turn on.
VERIFY FUEL:
This is displayed in the same field as VERIFY INPUTS if a manual fuel
flow has been entered and has not been verified for 15 minutes or
more.
FUEL USED:
If configured for Automatic Fuel Flow, the weight in pounds or kilo-
grams of fuel consumed. (Figure 2-56)
NOTE: This field appears as dashes at power up and increments as
auto fuel flow data is available.
GROSS WT:
The total weight in pounds or kilograms of basic operating weight,
payload and fuel on board displayed after all values have been
entered. (Figure 2-56)
PLAN 7/8 (Page 7 of 8) FDE Prediction
Pressing the PLAN Key
again will display the PLAN
7/8 Page. This page is used
if GPS will be the sole navi-
PLAN 7/8
FDE
DEPART DT
DEPART GMT
20 DEC 95
--:--
--
<
<
<
<
gation
source
in
ROUTE SPACING
EXPECTED GS
START FDE WPT
END FDE WPT
EXCLUDE SATS
Oceanic/Remote operation.
The following information is
entered to make the neces-
sary FDE prediction to deter-
mine sufficient satellite avail-
ability, integrity, and accura-
cy. All entries made on this
page will remain until
---
-----
-----
(QTY 0)
PREDICTION UNAVAIL
Figure 2-57
changed or the system is powered down. See Figure 2-57.
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Oct/96
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
DEPART DT:
Date for which FDE prediction is to be calculated.
DEPART GMT:
Time for which FDE prediction is to be calculated.
ROUTE SPACING:
Centerline to centerline route spacing of segment for which FDE is
being calculated. 1 to 99 nautical miles may be entered. 60NM is a
normal entry.
EXPECTED GS:
Estimated ground speed for the route segment. A value of 100 to 999
may be entered.
START FDE WPT:
First waypoint on the Oceanic/Remote route segment. Placing the
cursor over this field allows waypoint entry. Pressing the BACK Key
will cycle through the waypoints on the active flight plan. Dashes are
displayed prior to the last waypoint on the flight plan. Pressing ENT
while the dashes are displayed will clear the start and end waypoints,
resulting in an undefined Oceanic/Remote segment.
END FDE WPT:
Last waypoint in the Oceanic/Remote route segment. The BACK and
dashes operate the same here as in the START FDE WPT field.
EXCLUDE SATS (QTY x):
PLAN 7/8
Displays the number of satel-
FDE
lites currently being excluded
DEPART DT
25 DEC 95
13:00
35
<
<
<
<
DEPART GMT
from the FDE prediction. Up
to seven satellites may be
excluded at a given time.
When the cursor is placed
over this field and ENT is
pressed, the FDE EXCLUDE
SATS 1/1 Page will be dis-
played. See Figure 2-58
ROUTE SPACING
EXPECTED GS
START FDE WPT
END FDE WPT
EXCLUDE SATS
300
JFK
EBBR
(QTY 0)
START CALC? ENTER
Figure 2-58
ENTRY REQUIRED:
This is displayed If the aircraft is on the ground and not all the data
has been entered. The following is a list of the other possible mes-
sages displayed in this field:
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
• START CALC? ENT: This
is displayed when the aircraft
is on the ground and all data
has been entered. Pressing
ENT will start the FDE calcu-
lation and display PLAN 7/8
FDE COMPUTATION. See
Figure 2-59
FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1
EXCLUDED SATS LIST
<
<
SAT #--
• NEED ACTIVE FPL: This
will be displayed if there are
less than two waypoints on
the active flight plan.
OK? ENTER
Figure 2-59
• BACK FOR NEXT WPT: Displayed when the cursor is over the
start or end waypoint field.
• PRED IN PROGRESS: This is displayed when an FDE prediction is
in progress. All other fields are disabled at this point.
• PREDICTION UNAVAIL: This will be displayed if the GPS is not in
the idle state or the aircraft is not on the ground.
FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)
This page is accessed by
placing the cursor over the
FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1
EXCLUDE SATS (QTY x)
EXCLUDED SATS LIST
field on PLAN 7/8 Page and
12 14 02 16 19 22 07
pressing ENT.
<
SAT #02
EXCLUDE SATS LIST:
CLEAR ALL
<
The designated satellite num-
ber being excluded from the
OK? ENTER
FDE prediction is listed here.
Figure 2-60
SAT #:
The desired satellite being excluded from FDE prediction is entered by
pressing the Line Select Key by this field and entering the number of
the satellite. Press ENT to add the satellite to the list. Entering a
number already listed and pressing ENT will remove the number from
the list. Pressing the Line Select Key next to CLEAR ALL and press-
ing ENT will remove all satellites from the exclusion list.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
PLAN 8/8 (Page 8 of 8) FDE COMPUTATION
COMPUTING - STANDBY:
This display will flash while
FDE prediction is being cal-
culated. See Figures 2-61
PLAN 8/8
FDE COMPUTATION
xx% COMPLETE:
COMPUTING - STANDBY
51" COMPLETE
The number displayed is the
percentage of calculation
completed.
CANCEL COMPUTE
<
When the FDE prediction is
complete, the system will dis-
play either FDE and NAV are
available or unavailable.
Normal calculation time is
from ten to twenty minutes.
See Figures 2-62 and 2-63.
Figure 2-61
PLAN 8/8
FDE COMPUTATION
FDE AVAILABLE
NAV AVAILABLE
GPS PRIMARY MEANS
NAV OK
Figure 2-62
PLAN 8/8
FDE COMPUTATION
FDE UNAVAILABLE
NAV UNAVAILABLE
GPS PRIMARY MEANS
NAV NOT ALLOWED
Figure 2-63
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
HEADING SECTION (HDG KEY)
Upon pressing the HDG Key the HEADING VECTOR 1/1 Page will
be displayed and the following can be observed.
HEADING PAGE
HEADING VECTOR 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)
HDG:
Commanded heading in
whole degrees. This field
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
may also prefill with current
aircraft heading if heading is
<HDG 348
valid. Pilot may manually
CANCEL
enter heading preceded by a
TO DFW
DTK
270
turn direction R or L. A T
indicates the system is oper-
ating in the true heading
mode. After a heading entry
is made and the ENT Key is
pressed, the cursor will move
to the Heading Mode field
and HDG SELECT? will be displayed.
<
ENTER HDG
Figure 2-64
HEADING MODE:
Use BACK Key to select one of the following:
• INTERCEPT: indicates Heading Mode is ON and will intercept next
leg of the flight plan if the remaining fields are verified or entered.
(Figure 2-65)
• CANCEL: indicates Heading Mode is OFF.
• HDG SELECT: indicates Heading Mode is ON, but no intercept.
NOTE: If any of the mode words are followed by a ? the mode is not
active. The ENT key must be pressed to activate the mode.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
TO WAYPOINT:
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
HDG 348
Prefills with current TO
Waypoint or is enterable
(from one to six alphanumer-
ic characters). (Figure 2-65)
<
<
<
INTERCEPT
TO DFW
DTK
270
>
NOTE: With the cursor over
the TO Waypoint field, using
the BACK Key will step
through to the end of the
Active Flight Plan waypoints.
NO COURSE INTERCEPT
OK? ENTER
Figure 2-65
The system will identify an IAF, ARC, PT, HP, FCF, FAF or MAP
waypoint above the TO Waypoint field.
DTK:
Desired track is the Great Circle course in whole degrees between
the FROM and TO waypoints from Navigation Page 1. (Figure 2-65)
If the system is displaying Direct TO a waypoint, the DTK will be from
present position to the current TO waypoint.
NOTE: If the default desired track is changed, a Pseudo Vortac
(selected course) leg will be programmed on the NAVIGATION 1/4
Page.
INTERCEPT Messages:
If the Intercept Mode is programmed one of the following messages
may appear. (Figure 2-65)
• INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX indicates the commanded heading will
cause the aircraft to intercept the programmed course on the FROM
side of the fix.
• NO COURSE INTERCEPT indicates the commanded heading will
cause the aircraft to diverge from the programmed course (crosstrack
deviation will increase).
• No Message indicates an intercept is not programmed, or the com-
manded heading will intercept the programmed course prior to the fix.
(The TO side of the fix)
• NO ARC INTERCEPT indicates commanded heading will not inter-
cept the arc programmed on the approach procedure.
OK? ENT:
The procedure for accepting the entered heading, TO waypoint or
DTK is to depress the ENT Key. (Figure 2-65)
Rev.1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
TUNING SECTION (TUNE KEY)
Upon pressing the TUNE Key the TUNE 1/4 Page will be displayed
and the following can be observed.
TUNING PAGES
TUNE 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) COMM
NOTE: If the system is configured for two or less communications
radios, the tune section will display only three pages.
COMM 1 or COMM 2:
The information for each
TUNE 1/4
Comm radio. (Figure 2-66)
COMM 1
ACTIVE:
ACTIVE
PRESET
(MAN) 121.50
135.20
>
>
NOTE: If the frequency cur-
rently tuned and displayed
on the respective control
head, appears briefly but
turns to dashes, the system
interface does not provide a
return frequency input.
TRANSFER?
COMM 2
ACTIVE
PRESET
(MAN) 132.55
127.77
Figure 2-66
(MAN) in this field indicates the frequency was manually entered via
the control head (Figure 2-66). If the (MAN) field is blank, the system
was tuned via the CDU keyboard.
PRESET:
The pilot can enter and store a frequency in this field through the key-
board. (Figure 2-66)
TRANSFER?:
The displayed PRESET frequency can be transferred to ACTIVE
when the ENT key is depressed. The control head will reflect this
change. (Figure 2-66)
TUNE 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) COMM
The same information from the first page is displayed here for addi-
tional COMM radios.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
TUNE 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) NAV
Pressing the TUNE Key again will display this page and the following
information may be observed.
NAV 1 or NAV 2:
The station identifier to which the respective NAV receiver is tuned.
(KEY) will be displayed when the frequency or identifier of the station
has been entered using the CDU keyboard.
FREQ:
The frequency currently tuned and displayed on the respective con-
trol head. (MAN) in this field
indicates the frequency was
manually entered via the
TUNE 3/4
control head. The field may
NAV 1
FREQ
RANGE
BRG
NAV 2
SGF
(MAN) 116.90
105.0
<
also show (KEY) if the ident
is unknown and the frequen-
cy was tuned via the CDU
keyboard. (KEY) will appear
in the NAV 1 or NAV 2 field if
the IDENT is known. No
annunciation in this field indi-
cates the VPU is automati-
cally tuning the NAV radio.
(Figure 2-67)
350
ARG
<
FREQ
RANGE
BRG
(MAN) 114.50
109.2
071
Figure 2-67
RANGE:
The range in nautical miles and tenths from aircraft present position
to the DME. (Figure 2-67) The station identifier can also appear in the
field between the range and range value field if the control head is
placed in the DME HOLD mode. NO ID is displayed in this field if the
identifier of the held station is unknown.
BRG:
The bearing in whole degrees from aircraft present position to the
VOR. (Figure 2-67)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
When
the
dedicated
TUNE 3/4
DM441B or the dedicated
DME42 is configured, the
TUNE 3/4 page is different
(Figure 2-67a). The Bearing
information is suppressed
and DME is annunciated
instead of NAV.
DME 1
FREQ
DRK
<
114.1
4.3
RANGE
DME 2
FREQ
ARG
<
118.2
RANGE
54.6
When the non-dedicated
DM441B is configured, the
TUNE 3/4 page is different
(Figure 2-67b). The Bearing
information is suppressed
and the radios cannot be
manually tuned.
Figure 2-67a
TUNE 3/4
DME 1
FREQ
DRK
114.1
4.3
<
RANGE
TUNE 4/4 (Page 4 of 4)
XPDR/ADF
DME 2
FREQ
ARG
118.2
54.6
<
Pressing the TUNE Key
again will display this page
and the following information
may be observed.
RANGE
Figure 2-67b
XPDR:
TUNE 4/4
NOTE: If the transponder
reply code appears briefly
after tuning but turns to
dashes, the system interface
does not provide a return fre-
quency input. (MAN) indi-
cates the entry was made
through the control head.
(Figure 2-68)
XPDR 1
XPDR 2
(MAN)
(MAN)
1200
2400
>
>
>
ADF 1
ADF 2
(MAN)
(MAN)
610
930
Figure 2-68
ADF:
NOTE: If the frequency that the ADF is tuned to appears briefly but
turns to dashes because the system interface does not provide a
return frequency input. It may also be annunciated with (MAN).
(Figure 2-68)
NOTE: If either the XPDR or ADF frequencies are tuned via the CDU
keyboard the (MAN) field will be blank.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
HOLDING PATTERN SECTION (HOLD KEY)
HOLDING PATTERN PAGE
This page is accessed by depressing the HOLD Key when the cursor
is positioned over a Waypoint Identifier.
HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)
AT:
The Holding Fix and country
name or airport ident.
(Figure 2-69)
HOLDING PATTERN
AT DILLY
1/1
DIRECT ENTRY
INBOUND CRS
MAX HOLDING TAS
TURN DIR
<
305
261
•
HOLDING PATTERN
<
<
<
RIGHT
1.5
ENTRY AND STATUS
MESSAGE:
LEG TIME
LEG DIS
(4.4)
EXIT MODE
MANUAL
If the entry course to the
holding fix can be deter-
mined, the entry procedure
will be annunciated after all
the holding pattern parame-
ters are entered.
Figure 2-69
• DIRECT ENTRY: indicates the system will use a direct entry to the
holding pattern. See Figure 2-70 for Direct Entry pattern.
• TEARDROP ENTRY: indicates the system will use a teardrop entry
to the holding pattern. See Figure 2-71 for Teardrop Entry pattern.
• PARALLEL ENTRY: indicates the system will use a parallel entry to
the holding pattern. See Figure 2-72 for Parallel Entry pattern.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
Entry Course
Outbound
End Turn
Point
70°
Holding Course
Outbound
End Turn
Point
70°
Holding Course
Entry Course
Direct Entry Pattern
Figure 2-70
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
Turn Anticipation
Holding Course
Entry Course
Direct to
Holding Fix
70°
Holding Course
Entry Course
70°
Teardrop Entry Pattern
Figure 2-71
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
Entry Course
Go Direct to
Holding Fix
110°
Holding Course
Leg Length
Out Bound End Turn Point
Note Path of 1st
lap of holding
pattern after
entry procedure
110°
Holding Course
Parallel Entry Pattern
Figure 2-72
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
• HOLDING: indicates the system has entered the Holding Pattern.
(Figure 2-73)
• EXIT HOLD: indicates the system will exit the holding pattern the
next time over the holding fix.
INBOUND CRS (course):
HOLDING PATTERN
AT DILLY
1/1
The inbound holding course
in whole degrees. This field
can be True or Magnetic
according to the display
mode selected by the
TRUE/MAG switch input. A
T appears if in the True
mode (Figure 2-73). The T
field will be blank if the sys-
tem is Magnetic mode.
HOLDING
<
INBOUND CRS
MAX HOLDING TAS
TURN DIR
T305
261
<
<
<
RIGHT
1.5
LEG TIME
LEG DIS
(5.8)
EXIT MODE
MANUAL
CANCEL?
Figure 2-73
MAX HOLDING TAS:
This field is computed based on configuration module max holding
indicated airspeed and worst case winds. It represents the maximum
true airspeed in the holding pattern that will assure that the aircraft
remains in protected airspace. (Figure 2-73)
TURN DIR (direction):
RIGHT indicates the standard default holding pattern turn direction.
The non-standard LEFT turn can be accessed using the BACK Key
when the cursor is over this field. (Figure 2-73)
LEG TIME:
Holding Pattern inbound leg time in minutes and tenths (1.0 to 9.9).
(Figure 2-73)
NOTE: The LEG TIME may be in parentheses indicating that the
time has been calculated using LEG DIS.
LEG DIST (distance):
Holding Pattern inbound leg distance in nautical miles (1.0 nm to
50.0 nm). (Figure 2-73)
NOTE: The LEG DIS may be in parentheses indicating that the dis-
tance has been calculated using LEG TIME.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
EXIT MODE:
The MANUAL default indicates the system will stay in the holding
pattern indefinitely. Using the BACK Key with the cursor over this
field AUTO can be selected if the ENT key is pressed. The system
will then execute a holding pattern entry and exit the next time cross-
ing the fix waypoint. (Figure 2-73)
NOTE: If a holding pattern is selected an HP is annunciated next to
the waypoint on Flight Plan, Navigation and Direct To Pages.
OK? ENT:
Depressing ENT Key when this prompt appears at the bottom of the
Holding Pattern Page programs a Holding Pattern for a particular
waypoint.
NOTE: The cursor will not appear in this field.
CANCEL:
Used to cancel a holding pattern. (Figure 2-73)
POSITION FIX PAGE
This page is accessed by depressing the HOLD Key anytime the cur-
sor is not displayed over a waypoint.
POS:
The composite (system) position coordinates at the moment the
HOLD Key was depressed in degrees, minutes, and hundredths of
minutes. (Figure 2-74)
IDENT:
The alphanumeric designator
POSITION FIX
of the reference waypoint
used to check or update
POS N 3337.50
position. (Figure 2-74)
W11609.50
<
FIX :
IDENT
-----
----------
----------
----------
----------
FIX
DIF
<
<
The actual coordinates of the
reference point in degrees,
minutes, and hundredths of
minutes. (Figure 2-74)
Figure 2-74
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
DIF:
The difference between the composite position and the FIX (or other
sensor) position in degrees, minutes and hundredths of minutes.
(Figure 2-74)
NOTE: Position coordinates of individual sensors and the difference
between those sensor positions and the composite (system) position
may be displayed by moving the cursor over the FIX field and
depressing the BACK Key. The composite position may be updated
to the most accurate sensor by pressing the BACK Key until the
desired sensor appears, then pressing the ENT Key twice.
DIRECT TO SECTION ( Æ KEY)
DIRECT TO PAGES
DIRECT 1/2 (Page 1 of 2)
This display is accessed through the Æ key and presents a listing of
all Active Flight Plan waypoints on as many pages as is appropriate
to display all of the waypoints. The cursor may be positioned over
any desired identifier (ahead of or behind the aircraft) to proceed
DIRECT (Figure 2-75). A new waypoint may be added to the flight
plan to proceed direct.
TO:
DIRECT
KDAL
1/2
<
<
<
<
<
<
When this page is accessed,
the cursor is displayed over
the current TO waypoint.
(Figure 2-75)
BOSEY
BULEY
HNN
DFW
TO HART
19DFW
HP ELD
MEI
SUMET
AIR
The following may also be
displayed with a waypoint: HP
(Holding Pattern), PT
(Procedure Turn), MAP
(Missed Approach Point),
FAF (Final Approach Fix),
and IAF (Initial Approach Fix).
CYN
<
<
<
<
DELBE
VUZ
BUONO
DPK
VZV
GWENY
Figure 2-75
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
DIR CLOSEST ARP 2/2 (Page 2 of 2)
DIRECT TO CLOSEST AIR-
PORT: The Closest Airport
DIR CLOSET ARP 1/2
<
<
>
TO 312
344/ 10
045/ 14
301/ 29
344/ 29
141/ 31
230/ 34
254/ 35
281/ 39
040/ 45
page is the last page in the
DIRECT TO section. Up to
nine airports are displayed,
in order of their proximity to
the aircraft, with the closest
airport listed first. (Figure 2-
76)
I18
<
>
<
I43
KUNI
KCRW
KHTS
I28
<
>
<
<
<
<
>
>
<
KPMH
KPKB
NOTE: Airports listed from
the database on this page
have runways 3000 ft long or
greater and are hard surfaced.
Figure 2-76
WAYPOINT SECTION
WAYPOINT PAGES
Waypoints fall into four categories:
• Database generated
• Pilot entered (personalized/ offset)
• Special
• Obsolete
Waypoint Pages can be accessed from any FLIGHT PLAN, NAV, Æ
, HOLD, INITIALIZATION, HEADING, or TRIP PLAN/FUEL PLAN
Pages.
DATABASE WPT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) Database Generated
Waypoints
This page is accessed by typing in a waypoint identifier or by placing
the cursor over a waypoint identifier and pressing ENT.
Database Generated Waypoints are automatically updated when
accessed and cannot be modified by the operator. The four basic
types of waypoints residing in the data base are navaids, airports,
intersections and special waypoints.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
VHF Navaids
WAYPOINT:
DATABASE WPT
WAYPOINT
1/4
TRM
USA
POS N 3337.70
W11609.60
116.20
Alphanumeric designator for
the Navaid. (Figure 2-77)
FREQ
NOTE: If the waypoint has a
duplicate identifier in the
database, for another loca-
tion, the closest waypoint to
the aircraft position will be
shown and the country code
will be displayed beneath the
waypoint identifier. (Figure
2-78)
VAR
E 13
-110
ELEV
NDB-ENTER
Figure 2-77
DATABASE WPT
WAYPOINT
2/4
Press the NXT Key to
sequence to the next way-
point page with a different
country code. The PRV Key
can be used to sequence
backward through the way-
point pages. Additional
country codes and corre-
sponding POS coordinates
will be sequentially dis-
played.
TRM
PORTU
POS N 3845.60
W02705.60
FREQ
116.20
W 14
172
VAR
ELEV
NDB-ENTER
Figure 2-78
POS:
The coordinates of the waypoint as stored in the database memory.
(Figure 2-77)
FREQ:
The VHF frequency for the station. (Figure 2-77)
VAR:
The magnetic variation of the station. (Figure 2-77)
ELEV:
The elevation in feet of the station (DME equipped VHF Navaids
only). A (-) indicates elevation is below sea level. (Figure 2-77)
NDB -ENT:
The procedure for accepting the waypoint from the Navigation Data
Base is to depress the ENT Key. (Figure 2-78)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
Non-Directional Beacons (NDBs)
NDBs stored in the internal
database are listed in
Jeppesen publications with a
2 or 3 letter identifier. To dis-
tinguish these NDBs from
VHF NAVAIDS, you must
add an "NB" suffix to the
database identifier. Example:
To access the Prince Rupert
(PR) NDB, you must enter
PRNB. (Figure 2-79)
DATABASE WPT
1/14
WAYPOINT
PRND
CAN
POS N 54 15.80
W130 25.40
NDB-ENTER
Figure 2-79
Airports
International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) identifiers are used to
access data in the database.
ICAO identifiers differ in some cases from those familiar to many
pilots.
The following are guidelines to access information from the database:
Except for a few hundred 3 or 4 letter/number airport identifiers in
Alaska, Canada and the Continental USA, all airport identifiers stored
in the database have 4 letters.
In most cases, these identi-
fiers begin with a letter that
DATABASE WPT
1/1
corresponds to the geo-
graphic area in which the air-
port is located. The ICAO
code letter prefix for
Continental USA airports is
"K". Hawaii and Alaska
identifiers begin with "P".
WAYPOINT
KSNA
ARP
POS N 33 40.50
W117 52.10
RW19R
OM19R
<
<
RW01L
<RW01R
RW19L
To access a 4 character
identifier, use the IDENTIFI-
ER found in the Jeppesen
charts. For example, enter
Figure 2-80
KSNA for Santa Ana. (Figure 2-80)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
• If the airport shows a 3 let-
ter IDENTIFIER, add the cor-
rect ICAO prefix letter.
DATABASE WPT
5/8
WAYPOINT
KNEW
ARP
POS N 30 02.60
W090 01.70
RW36L
RW36R
Example:
NEW
(New
Orleans Lake Front) add a
"K" prefix and enter KNEW
(Figure 2-81).
RW09
<
<
RW18L
<RW18R
RW27
• If the airport shows a 3
character (letters and num-
bers) IDENTIFIER, enter the
identifier
as
printed.
Figure 2-81
Example: 31J (Lake City,
Florida) enter 31J. (Figure 2-
82)
DATABASE WPT
6/8
WAYPOINT
31J
ARP
Airport Reference Points,
Outer Markers, Runway
Thresholds
POS N 30 10.90
W082 34.60
RW10
<
Airport Reference Point
RW26
(ARP) coordinates are
always
displayed
in
response to the airport identi-
fier.
Figure 2-82
Outer markers and runway
thresholds for which data is
stored in the database are
also displayed on the airport
waypoint page (also known
as airport continuation
records page) and can be
accessed by pressing the
PRV or NXT Key or Line
Select Keys. (Figure 2-83)
DATABASE WPT
7/8
WAYPOINT
OM19R
KSNA
POS N 33 46.70
W117 48.30
RW19R
OM19R
<
<
RW01L
<RW01R
RW19L
The selected outer marker or
runway threshold will then be
displayed in place of the air-
Figure 2-83
port identifier in the waypoint field. The airport identifier Shifts to and
replaces the ARP field below. (Figure 2-83)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
Intersections/Enroute
Waypoints
DATABASE WPT
1/2
Most intersection waypoint
identifiers consist of 5 letters.
However, 3, 4, and 5 letter
and number combinations
exist. To access these way-
points, simply enter the iden-
tifier from the Jeppesen
chart. Example: WHALE
intersection. (Figure 2-84)
WAYPOINT
WHALE
USA
POS N 42 11.87
W066 59.96
NDB-ENTER
Figure 2-84
SPECIAL DATABASE WAYPOINTS
PILOT ENTERED WPT (Personalized) Waypoint
The operator is responsible for generating the waypoint data and
maintaining its accuracy.
WAYPOINT:
The alphanumeric designator selected by the pilot. Identifiers can
consist of up to six characters, and can be composed of any of the
characters on the keyboard. (Figure 2-85) However, the asterisk (*)
and pound sign (#) have special functions.
POS:
PILOT ENTERED WPT
Blank fields for entering the
WAYPOINT
GLOBAL
USA
POS ---------
---------
latitude and longitude of the
waypoint. When initially
accessed (waypoint not yet
in memory) the coordinate
fields are both dashed and
covered by a double cursor.
(Figure 2-85)
944 WPTS AVAIL
Figure 2-85
WPTS AVAILABLE:
The number of waypoints available in memory after this waypoint is
defined. Maximum waypoint storage in non-volatile memory is 999.
(Figure 2-85)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
WAYPOINT:
PILOT ENTERED WPT
(Figure 2-86). Same as pre-
vious.
WAYPOINT
POS
GLOBAL
USA
POS:
N 33 39.70
W117 51.00
If the waypoint has been pre-
viously defined, the coordi-
nates of the waypoint will be
displayed as stored in mem-
ory. These coordinates may
be changed at any time.
(Figure 2-86)
944 WPTS AVAIL
Figure 2-86
OK? ENT:
The procedure for accepting the waypoint if the coordinates are cor-
rect is to depress the ENT Key. (Figure 2-86)
OFFSET WAYPOINT
An offset waypoint is a set of
coordinates determined by a
OFFSET WPT 1/1
selected radial and distance
WAYPOINT
TRM*
USA
from a previously defined or
database (parent) waypoint.
An * following the parent
waypoint denotes an offset
waypoint. (Figure 2-87)
RAD
DIS
090.0
>
10.0
POSN 33 46.70
W117 48.30
<
OK? ENTER
More than one offset way-
point is allowed from one
parent, using [*], [*1], [*A1],
etc. as identifying notation.
Figure 2-87
NOTE: The offset waypoint uses station declination, if available, or it
uses the calculated magnetic variation of the parent waypoint. All
waypoints defined by a VHF Navaid in the National/International
Airspace System are based on the VHF Navaid station declination.
Since the magnetic variation and station declination may not be the
same at a given Navaid, the FMS calculated position and the defined
position may differ.
WAYPOINT:
The parent waypoint identifier followed by an *. When an offset way-
point identifier is entered and the waypoint has not been previously
defined, the RAD, DIS, and POS fields are all dashed.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
When the waypoint has been previously defined the coordinates will
be displayed and the radial and distance values will be computed
based on the location of the parent waypoint. (Figure 2-87)
If the parent waypoint is a waypoint from an airport continuation
record (runway or outer marker associated with a specific airport), the
airport identifier will be displayed immediately below the offset way-
point identifier.
If a parent waypoint has a duplicate identifier in the database, the
country code will be displayed immediately below the offset waypoint
identifier. (Figure 2-87)
RAD:
The radial from the parent waypoint in degrees and tenths of degrees,
along which the offset is established. This entry will be annunciated
with a T if a true heading input is received or if the parent waypoint is
north of N 70° or south of S 60° latitude. (Figure 2-87)
NOTE: The radial can be entered in whole numbers without a trailing
0. i.e. enter 070 or 70 and 070.0 will be displayed. To enter a tenth of
a radial all 4 digits must be entered. i.e. 0701 will be displayed as
070.1. The DIS entry requires a trailing 0 be entered for any DIS
value greater than .9. i.e. enter 100 to display 10.0.
DIS:
The distance from the parent waypoint to the offset waypoint (1999.9
maximum enterable). (Figure 2-87)
POS:
The computed offset waypoint coordinates based on the pilot entered
radial and distance from the parent waypoint. (Figure 2-87)
OK? ENT:
The procedure for accepting the waypoint if the coordinates are cor-
rect is to depress the ENT Key. (Figure 2-87)
SPECIAL WAYPOINTS
#0,#1 and #OFF are special waypoints defined automatically by the
system based on the airplane position.
d
#0 After pressing the
key and ENT key the position after the turn
where the airplane intercepts the course to the direct to waypoint. The
#0 waypoint is defined as the point from which a DIRECT TO way-
point leg has begun. Should the DIRECT TO procedure require a turn,
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
#0 will be defined as the point at which the aircraft completes the turn
and intercepts the direct course to the fix. #0 will momentarily be dis-
played on an EFIS map. #0 can only be defined by the system.
#1 The position at the point where the POSITION FIX Page was last
accessed via the HOLD Key. #1 can only be defined by the system.
Power Off Waypoint
The Power Off Waypoint is a set of coordinates retrieved as the last
known position when power is lost enroute. This page should be
accessed by inserting #OFF in the IDENT field on the POSITION FIX
Page after power has been restored and Initialization Enroute has
been performed.
SPECIAL WPT
WAYPOINT #OFF:
The Power Off Waypoint des-
ignator. (Figure 2-88)
WAYPOINT
POS
*OFF
N 42 08.00
W074 49.90
POS:
GMT OFF
00:13
01.1
281
The last present position
coordinates at loss of power.
Coordinates are stored in
non-volatile memory. (Figure
2-88)
MINUTES OFF
LAST TK
LAST GS
251
Figure 2-88
GMT OFF:
The actual time (Greenwich Mean Time) of power loss. (Figure 2-88)
MINUTES OFF:
The total time elapsed during power off. (Figure 2-88)
LAST TK:
Aircraft track at time of power off. (Figure 2-88)
LAST GS:
Last groundspeed in knots at time of power off. (Figure 2-88)
OCEANIC REPORTING WAYPOINTS
These waypoints are in the database and are used for oceanic posi-
tion reporting. These waypoints can be added to the FPL by typing
special numbers. See Section 3, ADDING A WAYPOINT.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
OBSOLETE WAYPOINT
Obsolete Waypoints are typically created when a multiply defined
database waypoint used on a stored flight plan is no longer found in
the database. This may happen when a new data-base is loaded. An
obsolete waypoint can be accessed only by verifying it as an existing
waypoint on a flight plan. It will be lost once it is erased from a stored
flight plan.
MESSAGES (MSG KEY)
System and Sensor mes-
sages are displayed on sepa-
SYSTEM MESSAGES
1/1
rate pages in the Message
Section. They are accessed
by depressing the MSG Key.
The Message Section will
consist of as many pages as
are required to display cur-
rent messages. The MSG
Key is used to sequence
through the System and
Sensor Message Pages and
to return to the page that was
displayed before accessing
the Message Section.
*ENTRY REQUIRED
NAV RDY
*-HOLD/ENTER
NO NAV
NDB-WW EXP 27DEC
Figure 2-89
SENSOR MESSAGES
1/1
NXT, BACK, and PRV keys
can be used to page forward
and backward through the
message pages.
VLF
IRS
GPS
VPU
- NO NAV
- LINK FAIL
- NAV RDY
- DR
System Messages describe
the system's operation with
all related aircraft systems
(Figure 2-89).
Sensor
Messages describe the oper-
ational status of each naviga-
tion sensor (Figure 2-90).
Figure 2-90
In most instances when new messages are added, the Message light
will flash and a flashing yellow asterisk will appear adjacent to the new
message.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
SYSTEM MESSAGES
ACTION REQUIRED:
The following are the action required messages that may appear on
the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. All will cause the message annun-
ciator to flash.
System Message
Explanation
ENTRY REQUIRED
Information required on the Initialization
Page must be verified/entered. (Date, GMT
and Position).
HOLD/ENT
Manual procedure for putting the VPU (non-
IRS equipped) into the Primary Navigation
Mode when groundspeed is less than 50
knots.
MAN HDG REQD
MAN TAS REQD
There is no heading input to the system and
an H-field antenna is installed with the RPU.
A manual heading entry must be made on
NAV Page 3.
There is no TAS input to the system and the
RPU is using fewer than three Comm sta-
tions for navigation. A manual TAS entry
must be made on NAV Page 3.
VERIFY POSITION
VAR WARNING
Aircraft composite (blended) position is in
question and must be manually verified.
Magnetic variation cannot be automatically
computed, and MAN VAR REQD. A manual
variation entry must be made on NAV Page
3 (i. e. aircraft position is north of 70° N lati-
tude or south of 60° S latitude).
Rev. 2
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Apr/00
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
ADVISORY:
The following are the advisory messages that may appear on the
SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. All will cause the message annuncia-
tor to flash unless otherwise noted with an asterisk *.
System Message
ALTITUDE FAIL
*APRCH ARMED
Explanation
The altitude input to the system has failed.
Approach is ready to be executed. Pressing
ENTER TO CANCEL? ENT will cancel the sequence. Displayed
within 30NM radius of the airport. CDI sensi-
tivity changes to 1NM full scale deflection.
VNAV Deviation changes to 500 ft. full scale
deflection. The message annunciator will
not illuminate.
*APRCH NEXT
Aircraft is within 3NM of the FAF. CDI sen-
ENTER TO CANCEL? sitivity changes from 1NM to .3NM full scale
deflection. The message annunciator will
not illuminate.
*APRCH ACTIVE
Approach sequence is being executed.
ENTER TO CANCEL? Pressing ENT will cancel the approach.
The message annunciator will not illuminate.
APRCH CANCELED System is in an Approach Mode and the
approach is changed or deleted from the
Active Flight Plan.
APRCH WARN
The aircraft is within 2 NM from the FAF and
GPS is in Dead Reckoning (DR) or there is
no RAIM available. HSI is flagged.
CNFG DATA LOST
CDU non-volatile memory has lost its config-
uration information and the configuration
module has failed.
CNFG MODULE FAIL Configuration module has failed. CDU non-
volatile memory configuration information
will be used.
COMPASS FAIL
The aircraft's compass heading input to the
system is invalid.
DATA BASE INVALID The data base is invalid because the last
UPDATE ABORTED
attempt to update the data base was aborted.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
ADVISORY: (continued)
System Message
Explanation
DR HDG/TAS
DR TK/TAS
DR TK/GS
The system is in the Dead Reckoning (DR)
Mode and is using one of these four combi-
nations of inputs to compute position.
DR HDG/GS
EXT WPT REJECT
CDU has rejected an external waypoint input
from a radar or EFIS. (Maximum 99 external
waypoints received or 999 waypoints
stored).
HIGH HOLDING SPD During Holding or when system is about to
enter a Holding pattern, TAS is high enough
to cause the aircraft to stray outside the
boundaries of protected airspace.
IRS ONLY>30 MIN
System has been operating enroute in IRS
Only Mode for more than 30 minutes. The
message annunciator will not illuminate if the
aircraft is Weight On Gear.
IRS ONLY>10 MIN
System has been operating in the terminal
area in IRS Only Mode for more than 10
minutes. The message annunciator will not
illuminate if the aircraft is Weight On Gear.
MEM FAIL
*NAV RDY
Non-volatile memory has failed at least par-
tially.
The system is ready to be placed in the
Primary Navigation Mode. Message annun-
ciator will not illuminate. This message is
displayed only when GPS is unavailable and
another senbeor is being used.
NDB FAIL
Database has failed.
NDB OUTDATED
Expiration date of the database has been
reached. Database should be updated.
NDB-WW EXP 27OCT Worldwide (WW) or North American/
European (NA) database and expiration
date.
NO AUTO LEG CHG An automatic leg change will not occur upon
reaching the TO waypoint. Message annun-
ciator will not illuminate most of the time.
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
ADVISORY: (continued)
System Message
NO NAV
Explanation
The system is not navigating. Message
annunciator will not illuminate.
POS WARN>1.7 NM
POS WARN>2.8 NM
POS WARN>3.8 NM
Based on the signal strength or geometry,
the VPU sensor quality may be such that the
composite position may have more than 1.7
nm error and may not be suitable for naviga-
tion in the terminal areas.
Based on the signal strength or geometry,
the VPU or VLF sensor quality may be such
that the composite position may have more
than 2.8 nm error and may not be suitable
for enroute navigation on J/V routes.
Based on the signal strength or geometry,
the VPU or VLF sensor quality may be such
that the composite position may have more
than 3.8 nm error and may not be suitable
for enroute navigation on J/V or Random
routes.
POWER OFF POS
The system has lost power in flight for more
than 7 seconds and the #OFF waypoint is
available. Reviewing the #OFF waypoint
page removes this message.
SENSOR MISCOMPARE The difference between the CDU composite
(blended) position and a sensor position
exceeds a predetermined amount.
*STRG INVALID
The system has stopped computing a roll
command steering output due to invalid
heading, auto-TAS, navigation leg, ground-
speed or crosstrack distance. Message
annunciator will not illuminate.
TAS FAIL
The True Airspeed input to the system from
the Air Data Computer is invalid.
USING MAN HDG
An H-field antenna is installed with the RPU
and a manual heading input is being used.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
ADVISORY: (continued)
*WPT ALERT
The aircraft is within 30 seconds ETE of the
next leg lateral change. Message annuncia-
tor will not illuminate.
WPT MEM FULL
All 999 waypoint locations have been used
in flight plans or as FROM or TO waypoints.
VNAV WPT ALERT
Aircraft is within 1 minute ETE of #TOD or
path intercept point. Message annunciator
will not illuminate. However the discrete
WPT annunciator will flash for 10 seconds
then go steady
VSPD FAIL
The system vertical speed input has failed.
SENSOR MESSAGES
The following are sensor messages that may appear on the SEN-
SOR MESSAGES Page. All messages will cause the MSG annunci-
ator to flash unless other wise noted with an asterisk*.
Sensor Message
Explanation
ACCURACY WARN
The integrity monitoring system that moni-
tors the satellite constellation (RAIM) has
detected a GPS horizontal position error that
is outside the alarm threshold for the phase
of flight in progress. (.3NM Approach; 1NM
Terminal; 2NM Enroute)
ALIGN
The IRS is in the alignment mode and is not
yet NAV RDY.
ATTITUDE
The IRS is in the Attitude mode.
BATTERY WARN
The sensor is operating on its own internal
battery.
CHECK QUAL
*DESELECTED
The VPU quality factor has exceeded the
pilot entered advisory quality factor.
The sensor has been manually deselected
and will no longer contribute to the computa-
tion of composite (blended) position.
Message annunciator will not illuminate.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
SENSOR MESSAGES: (continued)
Sensor Message
DR
Explanation
Either the VLF (RPU), GPS or VPU sensor
is in the Dead Reckoning (DR) mode of nav-
igation. The message annunciator will not
illuminate for VPU.
ENTR SET HDG
LINK FAIL
The IRS is in the attitude mode and a head-
ing value must be entered.
Data exchange between the sensor and
CDU has failed.
*NAV RDY
The sensor is capable of navigation, but has
not been placed in the navigation mode.
Message annunciator will not illuminate.
Only displayed when GPS sensor is not
available.
*NO NAV
The sensor has not navigated since system
power up. Message annunciator will not illu-
minate.
NO RAIM
RAIM is not available at this time.
NO RAIM @ DEST
RAIM is available at the present time, but
will not be available at the destination arrival
time.
NO SYNC
RCVR FAIL
STD FAIL
Omega synchronization has not been com-
pleted.
At least one Communication or Omega
receiver has failed.
The rubidium frequency standard in the RPU
has failed.
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Display Definitions
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
2-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
SECTION 3
SYSTEM OPERATION
PRE-DEPARTURE
POWER ON/OFF AND PARALLAX ADJUSTMENT
1. ON Key - DEPRESS
(momentarily).
SELF TEST
The
Page
(Figure 3-1) will be dis-
played for approximately
30 seconds. During the
time the SELF TEST
message is displayed,
the system is performing
internal self tests. If the
system was turned OFF
last by the removal of air-
craft power, the system
Figure 3-1
will turn ON automatically when aircraft power is applied.
2. BRT Key - Adjust as required. The display will initially come on
at 75% of full bright. DEPRESS and hold the BRT Key to dim
the display. Release the BRT Key. DEPRESS and hold again to
brighten the display. To attain 100% brightness depress and hold
BRT Key again until the display no longer gets brighter.
NOTE: The display may be changed instantaneously to 75% of full
bright from any brightness level by momentarily depressing the ON
Key.
3. Parallax Adjustment - If the Line Select Keys do not align with the
line select prompts on the screen, DEPRESS the BRT Key (If the
screen begins to dim, release the BRT Key then depress again
and hold while momentarily pressing the d Key, then the P Key.
Using the U (Up) or D (Down) Key, adjust the display to the
desired alignment. DEPRESS any key when alignment is com-
plete.
4. To turn the system off, depress the ON Key and hold for three
seconds.
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
INITIALIZATION PAGE
INITIALIZATION
01 JUN 00
It is important that the initial-
ization position and the first
waypoint of the Active Flight
Plan are the same so that
the TO/FROM Leg Distance
displays the correct informa-
tion. The DIRECT TO func-
tion to the first waypoint on
the flight plan may also be
used to insure distance
accuracy.
DATE
GMT
>
>
18:42
IDENT KDAL
POS ----------
----------
>
18355-0101
SM06
Figure 3-2
The Initialization Page gives the pilot access to the required initializa-
tion data (Date, GMT and Position). Following confirmation or entry
of this data, the page disappears and cannot be retrieved unless the
system power is removed and then restored. GMT and Date are
available for display in the PLAN section and Position is available in
the NAV section.
DATE and GMT
The DATE and GMT are continuously updated while the system is
off. If non volatile memory is erased the date and time field will be
dashes. When the system is turned on, the DATE and GMT will
appear on the Initialization Page. If the DATE is incorrect, move the
cursor to the DATE field to update manually.
1. DATE - INSERT, if required (day/month/year - digits only). For
example: March 1, 1995 would be entered as 01 03 95. Enter a
leading 0 for months with a numerical value of less than 10.
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS to verify display.
3. GMT - INSERT, if required (hours and minutes). If the GMT is
incorrect, update manually.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to verify display.
5. MSG Key - DEPRESS to verify Database Expiration Date and
review other System Messages. Continue depressing MSG Key
to review SENSOR MESSAGES and to return to INITIALIZA-
TION Page.
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
INITIALIZATION POSITION
The Initialization Position for non-IRS equipped systems should be
the departure runway threshold. For IRS equipped systems, the
ramp or alignment LAT/LONG position should be inserted as
Initialization Position.
NOTE: Once the INITIALIZATION Page appears, and after a brief
delay, the IDENT field normally prefills with the ICAO ident of the air-
port closest to the aircraft position at shut-down, provided the air-
craft’s real position and system position were the same at system
shutdown.
The Departure Position may be entered using either:
Option 1: Using the IDENT field for non-IRS equipped systems
Option 2: Using the POS field
Option 1: Using the IDENT field for non-IRS equipped systems
(Entering Alpha and Numeric Identifiers on the Initialization Page)
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the IDENT
field (if required).
Enter letters of the departure airport’s ICAO identifier. Enter let-
ters and numbers of the departure airport if it is a non-ICAO iden-
tifier.
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
3. Airport Reference Point
INITIALIZATION
(ARP) coordinates will be
displayed with continua-
tion records listed below.
DATE
GMT
01 JUN 00
>
>
18:42
To access the airport
continuation records,
position the cursor over a
departure runway identi-
fier. This will automati-
cally result in the display
IDENT KDAL
POS ----------
----------
>
18355-0101
SM06
Figure 3-3
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
of the departure runway
threshold in the waypoint
field, the departure air-
port identifier will replace
the ARP field, and POS
coordinates will reflect
selected runway thresh-
old. (Figure 3-4)
DATABASE WPT
WAYPOINT
4/8
RW19R
KSNA
POS
OM19R
N 33 40.89
W117 51.90
RW19R
<
<
>
RW01L
RW01R
RW19L
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
5. POS Coordinates - VER-
IFY coordinates high-
lighted by the cursor on
the Initialization Page.
(Figure 3-5)
Figure 3-4
INITIALIZATION
01 JUN 00
DATE
GMT
>
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
21:19
>
If AFIS is not installed, the
display will automatically
advance to the FLIGHT
PLAN LIST Page. The cur-
sor will be positioned over
the first Flight Plan Number
that originates with the same
airport or runway identifier as
entered on the INITIALIZA-
TION Page (Figure 3-6).
Stored Flight Plans are refer-
IDENT RW19R
POS N 33 40.89
W117 51.90
>
18355-0101
SM06
Figure 3-5
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1
KABQ
KMSY
KHPN
KSFO
KORD
KORD
KSTL
KSNA
KHPN
1
6
8
2
9
4
3
7
>
enced
according
to
KDAL
KDAL
KHPN
KHPN
KLAX
KPRC
KSNA
Departure and Destination
pairs and are automatically
sequenced in alphabetical
order on the FLIGHT PLAN
LIST Page. The cursor may
be placed over the desired
FPL number. To review the
FPL press ENT.
>
>
Figure 3-6
If AFIS/ACARS is installed, the display will advance to the AFIS FPL
Page or the ACARS Initialization Page after the system is initialized.
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Option 2: Using the POS field
For IRS equipped systems, the ramp or alignment LAT/LONG posi-
tion should be inserted as the Initialization Position using POS
Coordinates.
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS (cursor over POS field).
2. POS Coordinates - VERIFY. Coordinates displayed are the
computed position when the system was shutdown. If correct,
these coordinates may be used as the Departure Position.
If Incorrect:
a. Latitude - INSERT N or S first, then 6 numbers (degrees,
minutes, and hundredths).
b. ENT Key - DEPRESS. (See Note)
c. Longitude - INSERT E or W first, then 7 numbers (degrees,
minutes, and hundredths).
NOTE: If coordinate field flashes after entry, verify coordinates and
depress ENT again. Coordinate field will flash if the entered value
varies more than 10 arc minutes from the displayed value.
If only one coordinate is in error, it may be updated individually by
depressing N, S, E, or W Key to access the desired field.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
If AFIS is not installed in the system, The FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page
will now be displayed. A Flight Plan may be selected by bringing the
cursor on to the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page over the desired flight
plan number and pressing ENT.
NOTE: If necessary, use the PRV or NXT Key to cycle through all
available FLIGHT PLAN LIST Pages.
If the desired flight plan does not appear, a new flight plan may be
created. (See Building Flight Plans)
If AFIS is installed in the system, the display will automatically
advance to the AFIS Flight Plan Page. Here a flight plan may be
selected from the disc that has been inserted in the AFIS DTU prior
to turning on the system. (Refer to Section 7)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
BUILDING FLIGHT PLANS (FPL)
CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to display (Stored) FLIGHT PLAN LIST
Page (if required).
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor on blank line and
display the NEXT FPL
number. (Figure 3-7)
KABQ
KMSY
KHPN
KSFO
KORD
1
3
2
4
5
>
>
KDAL
KDAL
KHPN
NEXT FPL
If several Flight Plans
are displayed, position
cursor anywhere on the
page then depress the
BACK Key to show
NEXT FPL number
available.
Figure 3-7
FLIGHT PLAN 5 1/1
<
NOTE: If all 56 Flight Plans
are used, NO FPL AVAIL
will appear in the field. Any
of the stored flight plans may
be erased to allow additional
entries. The procedure is
described under Modifying A
Flight Plan.
******
<
<
<
<
>
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
XFILL
SELECT>
ERASE
3. ENT Key - DE-PRESS
to display FLIGHT
PLAN Page. (Figure 3-
Figure 3-8
8) NOTE: The XFILL prompt will only be displayed if the air-
plane is configured for dual systems.
4. Type the appropriate departure airport or waypoint identifier in
the cursor field.
NOTE: Identifier may contain from 1 to 6 characters in any combina-
tion of letters and numbers. If an entry error is made, press the
BACK Key to erase a character, then enter the correction.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
6. Waypoint Coordinates and Data - VERIFY. If a specific runway
is desired, depress the appropriate Line Select Key to place the
cursor over the desired runway.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS to add waypoint to the FPL.
8. Repeat Steps 4 through 7 for the remaining waypoints. The des-
tination airport identifier should be the last waypoint on the flight
plan.
NOTE: Waypoints are generally obtained from the Navigation Data
Base (NDB). Pilot entered offsets and waypoints may also be
entered. See CREATING/CHANGING PILOT ENTED WAYPOINTS
for a more in depth discussion.
NOTE: SID’s, STARS, Enroute Airways, and non-precision
approach procedures may also be entered on either the stored or
active flight plan. See SIDs, STARs, APPROACHES AND
ENROUTE AIRWAYS for more details.
A maximum of 50 waypoint identifiers can be entered on Stored
Flight Plans and 100 on the Active Flight Plan.
Attempting to enter more than the maximum allowed will cause FPL
FULL to be displayed with the identifier flashing in the cursor.
If adding a SID, STAR or Approach to A Flight Plan will exceed the
Flight Plan capacity. A NO ROOM ON FPL message will appear on
the procedure page being displayed.
Attempting to enter more than 999 pilot entered waypoints in memo-
ry causes MEM FULL to be displayed on the FLIGHT PLAN Page.
The MSG light will flash and WPT MEM FULL will be displayed on
SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.
To Delete a Waypoint
9. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the way-
point to be deleted.
10. BACK Key - DEPRESS. A DELETE? prompt will appear adja-
cent to the waypoint to be deleted.
11. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The waypoint will be deleted.
MODIFYING A FLIGHT PLAN
To Access The Desired Flight Plan:
This procedure may be used to modify the Active Flight Plan or any
Stored Flight Plan. Access the Active Plan or Stored Flight Plan by
depressing the FPL Key. Access a Stored Flight Plan from the
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
>
System Operation
alphabetized FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page. Use the PRV or NXT Keys
to cycle through the available pages.
NOTE: A change made to the Active Flight Plan does not affect the
Stored Flight Plan. Any change made to a Stored Flight Plan
remains in memory.
Deleting A Waypoint:
1. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position the
cursor over the waypoint
identifier.
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
<
<
<
KDAL
LIT
BWG
HNN
JST
MXE
- KHPN
DELETE?
2. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
DELETE? appears in the
waypoint field to inform
the pilot of the pending
change. (Figure 3-9)
<
<
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
SELECT>
ERASE
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The waypoint is deleted
and the cursor is dis-
played over the next way-
point. (Figure 3-10)
Figure 3-9
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
<
<
<
<
KDAL
LIT
- KHPN
NOTE: Deleting a waypoint
from either a SID, STAR, or
Approach Procedure will
invalidate that procedure as
indicated by the waypoints of
the procedure no longer
being indented.
HNN
JST
MXE
KHPN
>
DEPART
<ARRIVE
APPROACH
SELECT>
ERASE
To remove a waypoint from
non-volatile memory it must
be deleted from all Stored
Figure 3-10
Flight Plans. This does not include database waypoints.
ADDING A WAYPOINT
A waypoint may be added anywhere in a Flight Plan sequence,
except prior to the current TO waypoint if the ACTIVE FPL Page is
displayed.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
1. Line Select Key - DE-
PRESS to position the cur-
sor over the waypoint iden-
tifier that will follow the new
entry. (Figure 3-11)
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
<
<
<
KDAL
LIT
- KHPN
HNN
JST
MXE
2. Type Waypoint Identifier -
INSERT. (Figure 3-12)
KHPN
<
<
>
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
SELECT>
ERASE
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
4. Waypoint Coordinates -
VERIFY or INSERT.
Figure 3-11
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The new waypoint is
added to the Flight Plan
sequence and the cursor
is over the waypoint fol-
lowing the new entry.
(Figure 3-13)
<
KDAL
LIT
- KHPN
<
<
<
BWG
JST
MXE
KHPN
>
DEPART
<ARRIVE
APPROACH
SELECT>
ERASE
NOTE: Adding a waypoint to
a SID, STAR, or Approach
Procedure will invalidate that
procedure as indicated by the
waypoints no longer being
indented.
Figure 3-12
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
<
<
<
KDAL
LIT
BWG
HNN
JST
MXE
- KHPN
Adding Oceanic
Waypoints
Oceanic waypoints are
entered in the same manner
as other waypoints with one
exception. Instead of enter-
ing a waypoint identifier, a
five-character coordinate
<
<
>
>
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
SELECT
ERASE
Figure 3-13
identifier, such as 3050N, is entered. The following rules are to be
applied:
1. Positions in the Northern Hemisphere use letters “N” and “E”.
Positions in the Southern Hemisphere use the letters “S” and
“W”. Both will use numerics for latitude and longitude values as
follows:
a. Latitude - Latitude will always precede longitude.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
b. Longitude - Use only the last two digits of the first, three-digit
longitude value.
c. Letter Placement - The letter designator will be the last
character in the five-character string if the longitude is less
than 100 degrees and will be the third character in the five-
character string if the longitude is 100 degrees or greater.
d. The letter “N” is used for north latitude and west longitude.
The letter “E” is used for north latitude and east longitude.
The letter ”S” is used for south latitude and east longitude.
The letter “W” is used for south latitude and west longitude.
2. Examples:
North latitude/West longitude
North latitude/East longitude
N50 00/W040 00 = 5040N
N07 00/W008 00 = 0708N
N75 00/W170 00 = 75N70
N07 00/W120 00 = 07N20
N50 00/E040 00 = 5040E
N07 00/E008 00 = 0708E
N75 00/E170 00 = 75E70
N07 00/E120 00 = 07E20
South latitude/East longitude
South latitude/West longitude
S50 00/E040 00 = 5040S
S07 00/E008 00 = 0708S
S75 00/E170 00 = 75S70
S07 00/E110 00 = 07S10
S50 00/W040 00 = 5040W
S07 00/W008 00 = 0708W
S75 00/W170 00 = 75W70
S07 00/W120 00 = 07W20
USING DUPLICATE WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS
1. Duplicate Waypoint
Identifiers: There are
several waypoints
DATABASE WPT
2/4
around the world with
same identifier. If the
identifier selected has
more than one waypoint
associated with it, addi-
tional pages will be indi-
cated on line 1. i.e.1/2,
1/4, etc. The waypoint
nearest the aircraft posi-
tion will be displayed
first. (Figure 3-14)
WAYPOINT
TRM
USA
POS
FREQ
N 33 37.70
W116 09.60
116.20
VAR
E 13
ELEV
-110
NDB-ENTER
Figure 3-14
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
To select an alternate waypoint location:
2. PRV or NXT Key -
DATABASE WPT
3/4
TRM
DEPRESS until desired
country name is dis-
played. (Figure 3-15)
WAYPOINT
POS
PORTU
N 38 45.60
W027 05.60
116.20
3. ENT Key- DEPRESS to
add the waypoint to the
flight plan.
FREQ
VAR
W 14
ELEV
172
NDB-ENTER
Figure 3-15
REVIEWING WAYPOINT DATA/COORDINATES (FLIGHT PLAN
PAGES ONLY)
If the stored flight plan is currently displayed, proceed to Step 4.
To access the desired flight plan:
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to locate the desired Flight Plan on the
FLIGHT PLAN LIST Pages.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired
Flight Plan Number.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over identifier to be
reviewed.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
6. Waypoint Coordinates or data- VERIFY.
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The Flight Plan is displayed with the cur-
sor over the next waypoint.
8. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for remaining waypoints.
NOTE: This procedure may also be used for reviewing waypoint
information on the Active Flight Plan Page.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
ERASING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to display desired FLIGHT PLAN LIST
Page.
2. Line Select Key- DE-PRESS to position the cursor over the num-
ber of the FPL to be erased.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over ERASE?
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS. All waypoints of the stored FPL will be
erased.
NOTE: If the Active Flight Plan is erased, all waypoints except the
FR and TO are deleted. A fence (- - - - - -) is displayed indicating no
auto leg change beyond the TO waypoint.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-12a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-12b
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
FLIGHT PLAN (FPL) SELECTION
This procedure is used to transfer a stored FPL to active FPL status.
It is recommended that the initialization position and the first waypoint
of the Active Flight Plan are the same so that the TO/FROM Leg
Distance displays the correct information. The DIRECT TO function to
the first waypoint on the flight plan may also be used to insure dis-
tance accuracy.
If a stored flight plan is currently displayed, proceed to Step 5.
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS (if required) until the desired FLIGHT
PLAN LIST Page appears.
NOTE: If the desired Flight Plan is not listed refer to the procedure for
Creating a Flight Plan. Page 3-7
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
desired Flight Plan Number.
NOTE: If desired Flight Plan number is known, position the cursor on
the page, enter the number and depress ENT Key. The desired Flight
Plan will be displayed.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
4. FLIGHT PLAN Page - VERIFY Flight Plan. Review routing by
depressing PRV or NXT Key to page through multiple Flight Plan
pages.
NOTE: DEPRESS FPL or NXT Key to sequence to an alternate Flight
Plan with the same departure destination pair and higher Flight Plan
number.
DEPRESS PRV or BACK Key to sequence to a lower Flight Plan num-
ber with the same departure-destination pair.
5. Line Select Key- DE-
FLIGHT PLAN 5 3/3
<
PRESS to position cursor
over SELECT? (Figure 3-
16):
BDF
<
GSH
KDTW
<
a. to transfer the Stored
******
Flight Plan to Active
Flight Plan status con-
tinue with Step 6.
<
<
>
DEPART
ARRIVE
SELECT?>
ERASE
APPROACH
b. to INVERT and transfer
the Stored Flight Plan
with waypoint sequence
Figure 3-16
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
reversed to Active Flight
FLIGHT PLAN 5 3/3
Plan status, press the
BACK Key to display
INVERT?. (Figure 3-17)
<
BDF
<
<
GSH
KDTW
******
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
7. ACTIVE FPL - CON-
FIRM. Observe that the
Stored Flight Plan trans-
ferred to the ACTIVE FPL
Page as SELECTED or
INVERTED. (Figure 3-18)
<
<
>
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
INVERT?>
ERASE
Figure 3-17
ACTIVE FPL
1/3
INITIAL LEG SELECTION
<
KSNA
MUSEL
HEMET
TRM
- KDTW
An initial From/To Leg or
Direct To Leg must be estab-
lished in order for the system
to provide guidance along
the Flight Plan. From the
ACTIVE FPL Page , the fol-
lowing procedure is used.
<
<
<
EED*
TBC
>
DEPART
<ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETE>
ERASE
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS.
Figure 3-18
2. FR Waypoint - VERIFY. The first waypoint on the Active Flight
Plan will appear in the FR field. To change the FR waypoint,
insert the desired identifier.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The next waypoint in the Active Flight
Plan sequence will appear in the TO field.
4. TO Waypoint - VERIFY. To change the TO waypoint, insert the
desired identifier.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
NAVIGATION
FR KSNA
1/4
>
<
<
-----
-----
6. DIS, DTK - CHECK for
reasonableness. (Figure
3-19)
TO MUSEL
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
13.1
------
186
If this leg selection is part of
an active flight plan involving
Oceanic/Remote operation
using GPS as the sole navi-
gation source, an FDE pre-
diction to determine sufficient
GPS availability must be per-
>
>
-----
WIND
---/---
-AUTO-
Figure 3-19
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
formed prior to departure. Refer to the Special Procedures section
for instructions on performing the FDE prediction procedure.
BEFORE TAXI (IRS EQUIPPED)
The Inertial Reference System (IRS) should be aligned and placed in
the Navigation Mode using the IRS manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions.
1. MSG Key - DEPRESS for IRS Sensor Messages.
SENSOR MESSAGES Page will show IRS-ALIGN during align-
ment sequence. When the IRS is in normal Navigation Mode no
IRS messages will be displayed.
2. IRS Status - VERIFY NAV. Observe that no IRS messages
appear on the SENSOR MESSAGES Page.
RUNWAY LINE-UP (IRS EQUIPPED)
Provided an accurate alignment position was entered and the IRS was
placed in the Navigation Mode prior to taxi, no further action is
required.
IRS, VLF (RPU), GPS AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED
On the ground the system will navigate deriving composite position
and groundspeed from the GPS or IRS, provided the IRS was
aligned and placed into the Navigation Mode prior to taxi. All other
sensors (VLF and VPU) will enter the Primary Navigation Mode auto-
matically at 50 kts (IRS) groundspeed or weight-off-wheels, provided
they have sufficient stations to begin navigation. Momentarily
depressing HOLD Key, then ENT, and ENT again will also put the
sensors in the primary NAV mode if sufficient stations are available.
VLF (RPU) AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED ONLY
This procedure is used to manually place the system into the Primary
Navigation Mode at the designated departure position i.e. the end of
the departure runway. The VLF is a position keeping sensor that can
navigate with as few as two suitable stations. The VPU is a position
finding sensor that can navigate once airborne or within line of sight
of suitable navaids.
1. MSG Key - DEPRESS.
2. NAV RDY - HOLD/ENT Message - VERIFY. This message indi-
cates that the system is ready to enter the Primary Navigation
Mode.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
3. MSG Key - DEPRESS to verify status of all sensors. Observe
NAV RDY/NO NAV messages for appropriate sensor and refer
to the Flight Manual Supplement for limitations.
4. HOLD Key - DEPRESS to verify departure coordinates.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS twice to enter Primary Navigation Mode.
NOTE: If the [HOLD/ENT/ENT] procedure had not been initiated
prior to takeoff, the system and the various sensors will enter the
Primary Navigation Mode automatically at weight-off-wheels, or at a
true airspeed of between 50 and 150knots, depending on configura-
tion.
SIDs, STARs, APPROACHES AND ENROUTE AIRWAYS
The GNS-XL SID (Standard Instrument Departure), STAR (Standard
Terminal Arrival), Approach and Airway retrieval feature is designed
to relieve flight crew workload. SIDs and STARs require such proce-
dures as flying headings and altitudes, as well as intercepting VOR
radials and DME arcs, etc. Approaches can be flown autopilot/fight
director coupled until the Missed Approach Point. Missed Approach
Procedures must then be flown manually. The GNS-XL is ONLY
designed to provide meaningful input to the HSI when on a track
between two waypoints or when Pseudo Vortac (selected course)
procedures are used. THE SYSTEM IS NOT DESIGNED TO FLY
FULL SID, STAR OR MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURES.
NOTE: The flight crew must review the published procedure and
compare it to the procedure contained in the database. The pub-
lished charts are the governing authority and the chart procedures
must be followed. Any differences between the chart and the data-
base must be resolved by the flight crew prior to commencing the
procedure.
When flying those portions of a SID or STAR that are not tracks
between fixes, the aircraft should be flown manually or in HEADING
mode. In some cases, Pseudo Vortac procedures can be used to
establish an intercept to a published track. When using the Pseudo
Vortac mode, or upon intercepting a published track between two
waypoints (fixes), the aircraft may be flown in reference to the cross
track deviation provided by the GNS-XLS or by coupling the GNS-XLS
roll command to the auto pilot.
The first leg of the SID that the FMS can fly is not the first leg of the
procedure. To properly fly SIDs, the flight crew must manually fly the
procedure to a point where the FMS can fly the procedure properly.
The first leg of the SID that the FMS can fly is usually the first way-
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
point after the airport identifier or departure runway. After loading the
SID on to the Active FPL, access NAV Pg 1. Enter the first waypoint
after the runway or airport identifier in the FR field. Press ENTER.
The TO field will display the next waypoint in sequence from the FPL.
Press ENTER again to complete the initialization of the first leg of the
flight plan. The flight crew must manually fly the airplane until reach-
ing the first leg of the SID that can be flown by the FMS.
The following procedures contain leg types that the FMS cannot
automatically fly, and require manual intervention by the pilot. The fol-
lowing operational procedures are recommended.
NOTE: Some SIDs and STARs require intercept procedures upon
reaching a specified altitude. In these cases, execute the Pseudo
Vortac, Direct To or Heading Intercept procedure upon reaching the
specified altitude.
DEPARTURE KSEA
1/1
>
The CDU display, Figure 3-
21, shows the waypoints that
would be added to the flight
plan through reference to the
ELMAA5 SID, HQM transi-
tion from RW16L.
RUNWAY
SID
RW16L
ELMAA5
HQM
>
TRANSITION
WAYPOINTS OF SID:
ELMAA
HQM
>
<
SELECT?
ERASE
Figure 3-21
Heading to Intercept Procedures
The shaded area on the SID chart, Figure 3-20, is an example of the
portion of the procedure that must be flown manually or in the F/D
heading mode. No reference to the GNS-XL should be made at this
time.
For procedures like the example in Figure 3-20, the following opera-
tional procedures are recommended.
1. Prior to departure, tune the Seattle VOR, select the VOR as the
NAV source and set the HSI course pointer to 158°.
2. After departure, intercept the SEA 158° radial. After crossing the
SEA 5 DME fix at or above 3000’, turn right to 250°.
3. Select the FMS Heading and enter 250, then Intercept mode on
the FMS. Select ELMAA as the TO waypoint and enter 227 in
the DTK field and press ENTER.
Rev. 4
Nov/04
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
4. Select the FMS as the NAV source.
5. The FMS will fly the remainder of the SID to HQM.
NOTE: This is known as the FMS HEADING/INTERCEPT proce-
dure.
ELMAA 5 DEPARTURE
SEATTLE
D
(H)
This SID requires a mnimum climb gradiant of:
Rwys 16 L/R: 550' per nm to 3000'.
116.8 SEA
NAA7 26.1 W122 18.5
TAKE OFF
Rwys 16L/R: intercept and proceed via Seattle
R-158, cross Seattle 5 DME fix at or above 3000'
then turn RIGHT to 250 heading to intercept
and proceed via Seattle R-277 to Elmaa Int,
then via (transition) or (assigned route).
TRANSITION
SEATTLE-TACOMA
INTL 429
158°
D5
Hoquiam (ELMAA5.HQM): From Elmaa Int to
Hoquiam VORTAC(33nm): Via Hoquiam R-046.
227°
250° hdg
226°
At or above
HOQUIAM
(ELMAA5.HQM)
3000'
D
RD46°
18000
33
ELMAA
N47 08.9 W123 24.5
THIS CHART: FOR ILLUSTRATION PUPOSES ONLY
HOQUIAM
Heading mode or Manual required
D
(H)
117.7 HQM
Figure 3-20
N46 56.8 W124 08.9
Overfly then Intercept Procedures
For procedures that require over-flying a waypoint (Figure 3-21a),
then a turn to intercept a course to the next waypoint, follow these
operational requirements for the example following:
1. Prior to departure, when the first waypoint is designated fly-over,
select MAN leg change mode on NAV Page 1 and press
ENTER.
2. Select the FMS as the NAV source.
3. Accurately fly the runway course or heading.
4. Immediately after passing ZH582, do a Direct To ZH554, enter
255 in the DTK field on NAV Page 1 and press ENTER.
NOTE: This is known as the FMS Pseudo Vortac procedure.
Rev. 4
Nov/04
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-17a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
ZH582
N47 27.7
E008 29.7
(LSZH LASUN 3Y)
Procedure Requirement
2
Fly straight ahead, over fly ZH582, left turn
intercept 255° course inbound to ZH554.
8
LASUN
3Y
ZH554
N47 24.8
E008 18.5
ZH569
N47 24.0
E008 13.9
Figure 3-21a
Overfly then DIRECT TO Procedures
For procedures that require over-flying a waypoint (Figure 3-21b),
then a Direct To the next waypoint, follow these operational require-
ments for the example following:
1. Prior to departure, select MAN leg change mode on NAV Page 1
and press ENTER.
2. Select the FMS as the NAV source.
3. Accurately fly the runway course or heading.
4. Immediately after passing WW166, press the d key, cursor
over BRKNB and press ENTER.
NOTE: This is known as the FMS Direct TO procedure.
(LOWW MIKOV 2B)
Procedure Requirement
WW272
Fly straight ahead, over fly WW166, left turn
direct to BRK.
N48 11.6
E016 47.3
BRUCK
408 BRK
N48 03.8 E016 43.0
2B
MIKOV
WW166
N48 01.3
E016 37.2
Figure 3-21b
Rev. 4
Nov/04
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-17b
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
The following procedures allow the pilot to automatically add way-
points stored in the database, as part of a SID, STAR, APPROACH,
or Enroute Airway, to either a Stored or Active Flight Plan. These
procedures provide an abbreviated method of waypoint entry, elimi-
nating the need to enter individual waypoint identifiers for SIDs,
STARs, APPROACHes and Airways.
NOTE: When a SID, STAR, APPROACH or Enroute Airway is
added to an existing flight plan, duplicate waypoints may occur. To
avoid an inconsistent flight plan and resulting map display, it may be
necessary to delete any duplicate waypoints. Also, the routings and
coordinates must be verified by the operator. These procedures
must not be used in lieu of charts.
Due to the way the GNS-XL database is structured, waypoints must
have unique identifiers. However, some duplicate identifiers exist for
more than one waypoint location. These waypoints are primarily
located on APPROACHES, SIDS and STARS. In these cases the
waypoint identifiers are renamed in the database as a 6 character
identifier. Two naming conventions are used, one for four character
identifiers and one for five character identifiers.
Four character waypoints have the first four characters but add the
last two characters of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the fol-
lowing example:
MA11 at KPRC becomes MA11RC in the database.
Five character waypoints have the first five characters but add the
last character of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following
example:
MA27L at KOAK becomes MA27LK in the database.
ENTERING A SID ON THE ACTIVE FPL
NOTE: These procedures
may also be used with a
stored flight plan.
ACTIVE FPL
FR KSEA
1/1
- KLAX
<
<TO KLAX
*****
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to
display Active FPL Page.
<
2. Line Select Key - DE-
PRESS to position cursor
over the DEPART? field
(Figure 3-22).
DEPART ?
ARRIVE
ETE
>
<
APPROACH
ERASE
Figure 3-22
Rev. 4
Nov/04
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to display DEPARTURE Page.
4. DEPARTURE Airport Identifier - VERIFY or INSERT valid ident.
NOTE: If the first waypoint on the Flight Plan is an airport, the
Departure ident prefills and the cursor is positioned over the first SID
identifier on the list.
If the first waypoint on the Flight Plan is a runway, the RUNWAY field
also prefills and the cursor is over the first SID identifier on the list.
If there are no SIDs associated with the Departure Airport, the mes-
sage “NO SIDS AVAILABLE” appears and the ident field flashes.
Depress the FPL Key to return to the Active Flight Plan.
5. Line Select Key - DE-
DEPARTURE KSEA
1/1
>
>
PRESS to position the
cursor over the desired
SID, if required. (Figure
3-23)
RUNWAY
SID
------
------
------
TRANSITION
<BANGR1
BLUTI1
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select SID.
ELMAA5?
SUMMA5
NOTE: Cursor moves to the
first TRANSITION identifier
on the list. The TRANSITION
field is highlighted in yellow.
Figure 3-23
7. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the desired
TRANSITION, if required.
(Figure 3-24)
DEPARTURE KSEA
RUNWAY
1/1
------
ELMAA5
------
>
>
SID
TRANSITION
CVO
<
HQM ?
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select TRANSITION.
UBG
<
NOTE: If the SID and TRAN-
SITION are runway depen-
dent, and a runway has not
prefilled, the cursor moves to
Figure 3-24
Rev. 4
Nov/04
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
the first runway on the RUN-
WAY identifier list and RUN-
WAY field is highlighted in
yellow. See Figure 3-25. If
runway is not required, pro-
ceed to Step 11.
DEPARTURE KSEA
RUNWAY
1/1
-----
ELMAA3
HQM
>
>
SID
TRANSITION
9. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the desired
runway.
Figure 3-25
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select RUNWAY.
DEPARTURE KSEA
RUNWAY
1/1
>
RW16L
ELMAA3
HQM
11. Departure SID Waypoints
- REVIEW (Figure 3-26),
then DEPRESS the ENT
Key to select the SID and
insert it into Active Flight
Plan. The display will
automatically return to the
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Page.
SID
>
TRANSITION
WAYPOINTS OF SID:
ELMAA
HQM
>
SELECT?
ERASE
Figure 3-26
NOTE: If SID is added to a stored flight plan this display will return to
the stored flight plan page after SID is selected.
NOTE: SID waypoints appear indented from other waypoints in a
Flight Plan that are not part of a procedure. ( SID, STAR,
APPROACH)
REVIEWING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE
FPL PAGE
1. Line Select Key
-
DEPARTURE KSEA
1/1
>
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the DEPART
field on the FLIGHT
PLAN Page.
RUNWAY
SID
RW16L
ELMAA5
HQM
>
TRANSITION
WAYPOINTS OF SID:
ELMAA
HQM
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
review SID (Figure 3-27).
>
ERASE
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS
to return to Flight Plan
Page.
Figure 3-27
Rev. 4
Nov/04
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: SELECT will not appear as an option since a SID already
exists in the Flight Plan.
EDITING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL
PAGE
1. Line Select Key
-
DEPARTURE KSEA
1/1
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the DEPART
field on the FLIGHT
PLAN Page.
>
>
RUNWAY
SID
RW16L
------
HQM
TRANSITION
ELMAA5?
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
3. Line Select Key adjacent
to SID field - DEPRESS
to position cursor over
the first SID identifier on
the list.
Figure 3-28
NOTE: A list will only appear
if the TRANSITION/ RUN-
WAY are compatible with
other SIDs. (Figure 3-28)
DEPARTURE KSEA
1/1
>
>
RUNWAY
SID
RW16L
------
------
TRANSITION
TOU
4. Line Select Key adjacent
to the TRANSITION field
- DEPRESS to position
cursor over the current
TRANSITION waypoint
on the list. (Figure 3-29)
BLUIT
CVO
HQM ?
UBG
BKE
5. Line Select Key
-
Figure 3-29
DEPRESS to position the
cursor over the desired
TRANSITION. (Figure 3-
30)
DEPARTURE KSEA
1/1
>
>
RUNWAY
SID
RW16L
------
------
TRANSITION
TOU
LKV ?
BLUIT
CVO
HQM
UBG
BKE
Figure 3-30
Rev. 4
Nov/04
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select desired TRANSI-
TION. The system will
automatically load the
compatible SID associat-
ed with the selected
TRANSITION. (Figure 3-
31)
DEPARTURE KSEA
RUNWAY
1/1
RW16L
SUMMA5
LKV
>
>
SID
TRANSITION
WAYPOINTS OF SID:
SUMMA
LKV
>
SELECT?
ERASE
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select a new SID and
insert the new SID into
the flight plan.
Figure 3-31
NOTE: The RUNWAY can also be edited without changing the origi-
nal SID if the SID/TRANSITION are compatible. This is done by
pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field. Press
the Line Select Key to position the cursor over the desired RUNWAY.
Press ENT to load the desired RUNWAY on the SID.
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS to select the edited SID as displayed and
insert it into the flight plan.
NOTE: Look carefully at the flight plan to see if any waypoints are
out of sequence. Delete waypoints as necessary.
ERASING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL
PAGE
1. Line Select Key
-
DEPARTURE KSEA
RUNWAY
1/1
RW16L
ELMAA3
HQM
DEPRESS to position
cursor over DEPART
field on the Flight Plan
Page.
>
>
SID
TRANSITION
WAYPOINTS OF SID:
ELMAA
HQM
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
<
<
3. Line Select Key
-
>
DEPRESS to position
cursor over ERASE?
(Figure 3-32).
ERASE?
Figure 3-32
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
erase SID and return to Flight Plan page.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
ADDING OR DELETING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A SID
NOTE: When a SID is modified by adding or deleting waypoints, the
sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a SID.
To Add a Waypoint
1. Line Select Key
-
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
<
<
<
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the SID way-
point identifier that will
follow the new entry on
the Flight Plan page.
See Figure 3-33.
RW16L
ELMAA
LKV
KLAX
<
<
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETE>
ERASE
2. Waypoint Ident - INSERT.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS
twice.
Figure 3-33
NOTE: The previously in-
dented SID waypoints move
over one space to the left on
the screen and are treated as
normal waypoints in the
Flight Plan. (Figure 3-34)
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
<
<
<
RW16L
ELMAA
HQM
- KLAX
LKV
KLAX
<
<
To Delete a Waypoint
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETE>
ERASE
4. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the way-
point to be deleted on
the Flight Plan page.
Figure 3-34
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS. A DELETE? prompt will appear adja-
cent to the waypoint to be deleted.
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The waypoint will be deleted and the way-
points of the SID will be treated as non-procedure waypoints in
the flight plan.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
ENTERING AN AIRWAY FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE
ACTIVE FPL PAGE
Enroute Airways include high altitude jet routes and low altitude and
colored airways.
1. Line Select Key - DE-
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
<
<
<
PRESS to position cursor
directly below the starting
waypoint of the desired
airway on the Flight Plan
page. (Figure 3-35)
KSEA
- KLAX
ELMAA
HQM
KLAX
******
<
<
2. Airway ident - INSERT.
Use:
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETA>
ERASE
Option 1 if the destination
waypoint is unknown.
Figure 3-35
Option 2 to enter the
known destination way-
point.
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
<
<
<
KSEA
- KLAX
ELMAA
HQM
Option 1
#J501
******
a. # Key - DEPRESS,
then enter the airway
identifier. (Figure 3-36)
<
<
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETA
>
b. ENT Key - DE-PRESS.
ERASE
(Figure 3-37)
Figure 3-36
NOTE: If the waypoint above
the cursor is not a waypoint
on the selected airway, the
airway identifier will blink. The
appropriate airway or way-
point identifier must be
entered.
AIRWAY J501
1/2
>
<
<
<
RZS
TO HQM ?
HQM31
TOU
ZONAL
BSR
>
>
PESCA
PYE
FINGS
ZESNB
CAFTA
YZP
The Flight Plan should always
be checked for duplicate way-
points and the appropriate
waypoints deleted.
NIECE
COPPO
OED
>
>
<
<
MOCA1
SELECT ENDING WPT
Figure 3-37
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
c. Line Select Key -
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the desired
destination waypoint.
(Figure 3-38). If applic-
able, use PRV and
NXT Keys to access all
AIRWAY J501
1/2
<
<
<
>
TO RZS ?
FR HQM
ZONAL
HQM31
>
>
BSR
TOU
PESCA
FINGS
ZESNB
CAFTA
YZP
PYE
NIECE
<
<
>
>
COPPO
airway
pages.
waypoints
OED
MOCA1
SELECT ENDING WPT
NOTE: As the cursor is
moved up or down, “TO” will
appear next to the cursor
Figure 3-38
and a question mark will follow the ident. The waypoints between the
TO/FROM waypoints will be displayed in yellow.
d. After selecting the ending waypoint (TO) on the Airway,
depress the ENT Key to merge the Airway waypoints into the
flight plan and return to the FPL Page.
NOTE: If inserting the airway
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
<
<
<
segment into the Flight Plan
results in more than 50 way-
points in the stored Flight
Plan or 100 waypoints on the
Active Flight Plan, the mes-
sage “FPL FULL” will appear.
KSEA
- KLAX
ELMAA
HQM
#J501+RZS
******
<
<
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETA
>
NOTE: Look carefully at the
flight plan to see if any way-
points are out of sequence.
Delete waypoints as neces-
sary.
ERASE
Figure 3-39
AIRWAY J501
FR HQM
OED
COPPO
3/3
Option 2
<
>
TO RZS ?
a. # Key - DEPRESS
then enter the airway
identifier.
<
NIECE
PYE
<
<
PESCA
BSR
b. ± Key - DEPRESS
and type destination
waypoint. (Figure 3-
39)
ZONAL
SELECT ENDING WPT
c. ENT Key
-
DE-
Figure 3-40
PRESS. (Figure 3-40)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: If the waypoint above the cursor is not a waypoint on the
selected airway, the airway identifier will blink and the appropriate air-
way or waypoint identifier must be entered. If the destination way-
point is not on the airway, the system reverts to Option 1.
d. To change ending waypoint, use the Line Select Key to posi-
tion cursor over a different destination waypoint. If applica-
ble, use PRV and NXT Keys to access all airway waypoint
pages.
NOTE: As the cursor is moved up or down, “TO” will appear next to
the cursor and a question mark will follow the ident. Waypoints
between the TO/FR waypoints will be displayed in yellow.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
ACTIVE FPL
2/3
merge the airway way-
points into the Flight
Plan and return to the
Flight Plan Page.
(Figure 3-41)
<
<
<
RYE
PESCA
BSR
ZONAL
RZS
KLAX
<
<
NOTE: If inserting the air-
way segment into the Flight
Plan results in more than 50
waypoints in the stored
Flight Plan or 100 waypoints
on the Active Flight Plan, the
message “FPL FULL” will appear.
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETA>
ERASE
Figure 3-41
4. If applicable, enter additional airway identifiers to chain several
airways together.
EDITING AN AIRWAY
Once an airway is merged into the flight plan, waypoints can be
added to or deleted from the flight plan on the Flight Plan Page using
normal edit procedures.
To add or delete waypoints from a selected segment of the airway,
perform the following:
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over an airway
waypoint on the Flight Plan page.
2. # Key - DEPRESS then enter the appropriate airway identifier.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
AIRWAY J501
FR HQM
OED
NIECE
3/3
(Figure 3-42)
<
<
<
<
>
4. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to move the
cursor to shorten or
lengthen the previously
selected segment of the
airway. If applicable,
use PRV and NXT Keys
to access all airway way-
point pages.
PYE
BSR
ZONAL
TO RZS ?
Figure 3-42
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS to merge the edited airway segment into
the Flight Plan and return to the Flight Plan Page.
ENTERING A STAR OR PROFILE DESCENT ON ANY STORED FPL
OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE
1. Line Select Key
-
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
DEPRESS to position
cursor over ARRIVE?
field on the Flight Plan
page (Figure 3-43).
<
<
KSEA
- KLAX
KLAX
******
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display ARRIVAL Page
(Figure 3-44).
<
<
DEPART
ARRIVE?
APPROACH
ETA>
ERASE
3. ARRIVAL
Airport
Identifier - VERIFY or
INSERT valid identifier.
Figure 3-43
NOTE: If the last waypoint
on the Flight Plan is an air-
port and an Approach is pro-
grammed, the ARRIVAL air-
port identifier prefills and the
cursor is over the first
TRANSITION waypoint on
the list.
ARRIVAL KLAX
1/1
<
>
>
>
>
RUNWAY
TRANSITION
STAR
-----
-----
-----
EHF
<
<
CIVET?
HEL
LHS
PGS
PMD
<
<
TNP
PTV
FIM
FICKY>
GOATZ
JLI
If the last waypoint on the
Flight Plan is a runway, the
RUNWAY field also prefills
and the cursor is over the
Figure 3-44
first TRANSITION waypoint on the list.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
If there are no STARs associated with the Arrival Airport, the mes-
sage “NO STARS AVAILABLE” appears and the arrival airport ident
field flashes. Depress FPL Key to return to ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN.
4. NXT Key - DEPRESS to view waypoints on subsequent pages if
desired.
ARRIVAL KLAX
2/2
>
>
>
5. Line Select Key
-
RUNWAY
TRANSITION
STAR
-----
-----
-----
ELKEY
RZS
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the desired
TRANSITION. (Figure
3-45)
MALIT
<
ROSIN
AVE ?
VTU
<
<
>
>
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select TRANSITION.
DERBB
DINTY
MUDDE
NOTE: The STAR field
turns yellow and the cursor is
over the first identifier on the
STAR list.
Figure 3-45
7. Line Select Key
-
ARRIVAL KLAX
1/1
>
>
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the desired
STAR. See Figure 3-46.
RUNWAY
-----
AVE
TRANSITION
STAR
-----
MOOR3 ?
SADDE4
8. ENT Key - DE-PRESS
to select STAR.
NOTE: If the STAR and
TRANSITION are runway
dependent, and a runway
has not prefilled, the cursor
moves to the first RUNWAY
Figure 3-46
identifier on the runway list and the runway field is displayed in yel-
low. If a runway is not required, proceed to Step 11.
9. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired
RUNWAY on the runway list.
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS to select RUNWAY.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
11. Arrival STAR Waypoints
- REVIEW (Figure 3-47),
then DEPRESS ENT
Key to insert STAR into
Active Flight Plan and
return to the ACTIVE
FLIGHT PLAN Page.
ARRIVAL KLAX
1/1
>
>
RUNWAY
-----
AVE
TRANSITION
STAR
MOOR3
WAYPOINTS OF STAR:
AVE
FIM
DERBB
REYES
PIRUE
PAULA
ILEAN
WAKER
NOTE: Look carefully at the
flight plan to see if any way-
points are out of sequence.
Delete waypoints as neces-
sary.
>
SELECT?
ERASE
Figure 3-47
STAR waypoints appear indented from the other waypoints on a
Flight Plan that are not part of a procedure. (SID, STAR, or
APPROACH)
REVIEWING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE
FPL PAGE
1. Line Select Key
-
ARRIVAL KLAX
1/1
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the ARRIVE
field on the FLIGHT
PLAN Page.
>
>
RUNWAY
-----
AVE
TRANSITION
STAR
MOOR3
WAYPOINTS OF STAR:
AVE
FIM
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
review STAR. (Figure 3-
48)
DERBB
REYES
PIRUE
PAULA
ILEAN
WAKER
>
ERASE
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS
to return to FLIGHT
PLAN Page.
Figure 3-48
NOTE: SELECT will not appear as an option since a STAR already
exists in the Flight Plan.
EDITING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the ARRIVE
field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page.
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
3. Line Select Key - DEPRESS twice to position the cursor over the
STAR field. This will erase the current TRANSITION.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: A list will appear with other available STARs.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired
STAR.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS to select desired STAR.
NOTE: Cursor moves to the first waypoint of the TRANSITION list
and the TRANSITION field is displayed in yellow.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
desired transition waypoint.
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS to select the TRANSITION. If the STAR is
not runway dependent proceed to Step 10.
8. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
desired runway on the RUNWAY list.
NOTE: The RUNWAY can also be edited without changing the origi-
nal SID if the SID/TRANSITION are compatible. This is done by
pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field. Position
the cursor over the desired RUNWAY. Press ENT to load the desired
RUNWAY on the SID.
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS to select the RUNWAY.
10. Arrival STAR Waypoints - REVIEW, then DEPRESS ENT Key to
insert STAR into Active Flight Plan and return to the ACTIVE
FLIGHT PLAN Page.
ERASING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE
1. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor over ARRIVE field
on the FLIGHT PLAN
Page.
ARRIVAL KLAX
1/1
>
>
RUNWAY
-----
AVE
TRANSITION
STAR
MOOR3
WAYPOINTS OF STAR:
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
AVE
FIM
DERBB
REYES
PIRUE
PAULA
ILEAN
WAKER
3. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor over ERASE?
(Figure 3-49)
>
ERASE?
Figure 3-49
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
erase STAR and return
to FLIGHT PLAN Page.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
ADDING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A STAR
NOTE: When a STAR is modified by adding or deleting waypoints, the
sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a STAR.
The following may be accomplished from any stored flight plan or the
ACTIVE FPL Page.
1. Line Select Key
-
ACTIVE FPL
2/3
<
<
<
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the STAR
waypoint identifier that
will follow the new entry
on the Flight Plan page.
(Figure 3-50)
REYES
PIRUE
FIM
PAULA
ILEAN
WAKER
<
<
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETA>
ERASE
2. Waypoint Ident - INSERT.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS
twice.
Figure 3-50
NOTE: The previously
indented STAR waypoints
move over one space to the
left on the screen and are
treated as normal waypoints
in the Flight Plan. (Figure 3-
51)
ACTIVE FPL
2/3
<
REYES
PIRUE
FIM
<
<
<
EHF
PAULA
ILEAN
DEPART
ARRIVE
ETA>
ERASE
<
DELETING WAYPOINTS
OF A STAR
APPROACH
1. Line Select Key
-
Figure 3-51
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the STAR waypoint identifier to be deleted on the
Flight Plan page.
2. BACK Key - DEPRESS. A DELETE? prompt will appear adja-
cent to the waypoint to be deleted.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The waypoint will be erased and the
waypoints of the STAR will move left one space. These way-
points will be treated as non-procedure waypoints in the flight
plan.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
ENTERING AN APPROACH ON A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE
FPL PAGE
1. Line Select Key
-
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
<
<
<
<
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over APPROACH?
field on the ACTIVE FPL
page. (Figure 3-52)
KORD
PNT
- KEWK
CAP
KEWK
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display APPROACH
Page. (Figure 3-53)
DEPART
ARRIVE
ETA>
ERASE
<
APPROACH?
3. APPROACH Airport
identifier - VERIFY or
INSERT valid ident.
Figure 3-52
NOTE: If there are no
APPROACHes associated
with the Approach Airport,
APCH KEWK
1/1
>
>
RUNWAY
TYPE
------
------
------
the
message
“NO
AVAIL”
TRANSITION
RW17 ?
RW35
APPROACH
appears and the airport ident
field flashes. Depress FPL
Key to return to Active Flight
Plan.
RW06
RW24
4. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the desired
RUNWAY on the run-
way list. (Figure 3-54)
Figure 3-53
APCH KEWK
1/1
>
NOTE: If a CIRCLING Type
Approach is desired, use line
select to display type. Go to
step 6.
RUNWAY
TYPE
------
------
------
>
TRANSITION
RW17
<
RW35 ?
RW06
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select RUNWAY. If a
valid runway has been
selected, the cursor
moves to the first
approach TYPE.
RW24
Figure 3-54
6. Line Select Key- DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired
Approach TYPE if required.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select Approach TYPE.
(Figure 3-55)
APPROACH KEWK
1/1
RW35
>
>
RUNWAY
TYPE
------
------
TRANSITION
NDB ?
NOTE: If there is only one
type of approach available
the system automatically
loads the approach TYPE
and the cursor moves over
the WPT in the transition list.
Go to Step 8.
<
RNAV
Figure 3-55
NOTE: If the runway select-
ed on the Approach Page
differs from the runway dic-
tated by the STAR, “SEL
RWY FROM STAR PG” is
displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
APPROACH KEWK
RUNWAY
1/1
RW35
NDB
>
TYPE
>
TRANSITION
COBUS ?
PNE
------
8. Line Select Key
-
<
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the desired
TRANSITION if required.
(Figure 3-56) If there is
only one transition for
the desired approach the
system automatically
loads the transition and
Figure 3-56
the WPTs of the approach are displayed. Go to step 10.
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS to select TRANSITION.
The system will identify the following waypoints of an approach:
IAF - Indicates the initial approach fix.
ARC - DME Arc end point.
PT - A Procedure Turn will commence at that waypoint.
HP - A Holding Pattern is programmed at that waypoint.
FCF - Final Approach Course Alignment Fix
FAF - The Final Approach Fix.
MAP - The Missed Approach Point.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
10. Approach Waypoints -
REVIEW (Figure 3-57),
then DEPRESS ENT Key
to insert APPROACH into
Active Flight Plan and
return to the ACTIVE
FLIGHT PLAN Page.
APCH KEWK
1/1
RW35
NDB
WAIVE
>
>
RUNWAY
TYPE
TRANSITION
WPTS OF APPROACH:
<
IAF WAIVE MAP RW17
CANB
PT CANB HP
CANB
++++++
CANB
REVIEWING AN
SELECT?
ERASE
APPROACH FROM A
STORED FPL OR THE
ACTIVE FPL PAGE
Figure 3-57
1. Line Select Key
-
APCH KEWK
1/1
RW35
NDB
COBUS
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over the APPROACH
field on the FLIGHT PLAN
Page.
>
>
RUNWAY
TYPE
TRANSITION
WPTS OF APPROACH:
<
IAF WAIVE MAP RW17
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
CANB
PT CANB HP
CANB
++++++
CANB
review
APPROACH
(Figure 3-58)
SELECT?
ERASE
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS to
return to FLIGHT PLAN
Page.
Figure 3-58
NOTE: SELECT will not appear as an option since an APPROACH
already exists in the Flight Plan.
EDITING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE
FPL PAGE
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the APPROACH
field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page.
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS to display APPROACH Page.
The RUNWAY, TYPE, or TRANSITION may be edited by pressing the
Line Select Key next to the field to be edited. That field will turn from
green to yellow and the previous information will turn to dashes. Alternate
options may be available depending on the information in the remaining
two fields.
The most efficient way to edit an approach procedure is to change the
RUNWAY, TYPE, and TRANSITION fields to dashes (------).
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
1. Line Select Key (adjacent to RUNWAY field) - DEPRESS to
change the field to dashes.
2. Line Select Key (adjacent to TYPE and TRANSITION fields) -
DEPRESS to change the field to dashes.
Using the same Line Select Keys, obtain a complete list of RUN-
WAYS, TYPES, and TRANSITIONS. Use the appropriate Line
Select Keys to select the desired data from each list.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to enter the selected data from each list.
When all the fields have been filled.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to select the new approach data, insert it
into the flight plan, and return to the Flight Plan Page.
NOTE: Look carefully at the flight plan to determine if any waypoints
are out of sequence and delete waypoints as necessary.
When an APPROACH is modified by adding or deleting waypoints
the sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as an APPROACH
and the system will not enter the Approach Mode. An APPROACH
CANCELED message will be displayed anytime a waypoint is delet-
ed, added to an approach procedure on the Active Flight Plan, or
when a Direct To the MAP is initiated..
ERASING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE
ACTIVE FPL
NOTE: Erasing an Approach also erases the current destination air-
port identifier. This procedure should be used when an approach at
a different airport is desired.
APCH KEWK
1/1
RW35
NDB
COBUS
1. Line Select Key - DE-
PRESS to position cur-
sor over APPROACH
field on the FLIGHT
PLAN Page.
>
RUNWAY
TYPE
>
TRANSITION
WPTS OF APPROACH:
<
IAF WAIVE MAP RW17
CANB
PT CANB HP
CANB
++++++
CANB
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display APPROACH
Page.
SELECT?
ERASE
3. Line Select Key - DE-
PRESS to position cursor
over ERASE? (Figure 3-59)
Figure 3-59
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to erase APPROACH and return to the
FLIGHT PLAN Page.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
DELETING AN APPROACH WAYPOINT
1. Display the appropriate FPL Page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the
APPROACH waypoint identifier to be deleted.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS. A DELETE? prompt will appear adja-
cent to the waypoint.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
NOTE: When an APPROACH is modified by adding or deleting way-
points (including waypoints between the “fence” and the Missed
Approach Procedure waypoint), the sequence of waypoints is no
longer identified as an (APPROACH) and the system will not enter
the Approach Mode. An (APPROACH CANCELED) message will
be displayed anytime a waypoint is deleted or added to an
APPROACH procedure on the Active Flight Plan.
NOTE: Anytime a Direct To the MAP is performed and an approach
is either armed or active, an APPROACH CANCELED message will
appear. The approach functions will be disabled and the CDI scaling
will return to the TERMINAL sensitivity of 1NM full scale deflection.
USING A STAR AND AN APPROACH IN THE SAME FLIGHT PLAN
Since both the Arrival (STAR) and Approach procedures allow for
entry of AIRPORT and RUNWAY, the following rules apply.
• Changing the AIRPORT on the ARRIVAL Page, and selecting an
associated STAR, automatically erases the APPROACH procedure.
• Changing the AIRPORT on the APPROACH Page, and selecting an
associated Approach, automatically erases the STAR procedure.
• Changing the RUNWAY on the ARRIVAL Page, and selecting it,
automatically erases the APPROACH procedure.
• Changing the RUNWAY on the APPROACH Page, and selecting it,
has no effect on the STAR procedure unless the STAR is runway
dependent.
If the STAR is runway dependent, the message “SEL RWY FROM
STAR PG” (Select RUNWAY from STAR Page) appears on the
APPROACH Page. The pilot must return to the ARRIVAL Page to
change the RUNWAY for the STAR, before changing the RUNWAY
on the APPROACH Page.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
SELECTING A COMPANY ROUTE AND ADDING IT TO THE
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
1. Display the COMPANY ROUTES Page (automatically after ini-
tialization, or by paging the FPL pages).
NOTE: If the data base contains company routes, the first page dis-
played after system initialization will be the COMPANY ROUTES
page in lieu of the FLIGHT PLAN LIST page. If both AFIS and
Company Routes are present, the COMPANY ROUTES page is dis-
played first.
NOTE: Typically, the COM-
COMPANY ROUTES
1/1
PANY ROUTES page will
display the location entered
on the initialization page (if
available) in the Origin field,
with the cursor over both the
Origin and Destination field,
ready for entry of the
Destination.
ORIGIN
KCOF
>
>
DESTINATION
VIA
------
------
R#------
<
<
<
2. Line Select Key LSR2 - If
you desire to change the
Origin entry, DEPRESS to
position cursor over only
ORIGIN field on the COM-
PANY ROUTES page,
and type in desired identi-
fier. (Figure 3-59a) If the
cursor is over both fields,
and the Origin is correct,
proceed to the next step.
(Figure 3-59b)
Figure 3-59a
COMPANY ROUTES
1/1
ORIGIN
KCOF
------
------
>
>
DESTINATION
VIA
R#------
Figure 3-59b
3. DESTINATION identifier
- VERIFY or INSERT
valid ident. (Figure 3-
59b)
COMPANY ROUTES
1/1
ORIGIN
KCOF
KEFD
>
>
DESTINATION
VIA
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
(Figure 3-59c) If the pair is
valid and has only one
VIA, the ACTIVE FLIGHT
PLAN page is now dis-
played with the waypoints
of the pair added.
------
R#------
Figure 3-59c
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-36.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: If the pair is not
valid, the COMPANY
ROUTES page will remain,
and a ROUTE NOT FOUND
message will be displayed.
(Figure 3-59d) If the route is
valid, but the Active FPL is
full, an ACTIVE FPL FULL
message is displayed.
(Figure 3-59e) A WPT MEM
FULL MESSAGE will be dis-
played if the waypoint mem-
ory is full.
COMPANY ROUTES
ORIGIN
1/1
KCOF
KSMX
>
>
DESTINATION
VIA
------
R#------
<
ROUTE NOT FOUND
Figure 3-59d
COMPANY ROUTES
1/1
NOTE: The
Company
ORIGIN
KCOF
KEFD
LAL
>
>
DESTINATION
VIA
Route can be selected either
by the preceding method
using an Origin/Destination
city pair, or by selecting LSK
L4 and entering the route
number.
R#017
<
ACTIVE FPL FULL
5. If the selected city pair
has more than one VIA,
the first one will be dis-
played. (Figure 3-59f)
Figure 3-59e
COMPANY ROUTES
1/1
ORIGIN
KCOF
KSMY
>
>
6. Use the PRV, NXT, or
BACK keys to scroll
through the list of VIAs
(Figure 3-59g)
DESTINATION
VIA
COVIA?
R#018
<
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The ACTIVE FLIGHT
PLAN page is now dis-
played with the waypoints
of the pair added.
Figure 3-59f
COMPANY ROUTES
1/1
ORIGIN
KCOF
KSMY
TLH?
>
>
DESTINATION
VIA
R#019
<
Figure 3-59g
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-36.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Note: In order to execute approaches with a specific aircraft installa-
tion, the installation must meet the standards set forth by the govern-
ing certification agency. Consult the Aircraft Flight Manual
Supplement for specific limitations.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-36.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
EXECUTING APPROACHES
WARNING: When entering PTs or HP airspace at high speed the
FMS may not constrain the airplane from violating maneuvering
airspace. Pilots are responsible for procedural compliance.
When the aircraft is within 30NM of the airport, the system will go into
the Approach Armed mode. The CDI sensitivity will change from
5.0NM full scale deflection to 1.0NM full scale deflection. At this point
the aircraft may bank slightly due to increased roll steering gains.
Anytime the TO waypoint is part of an Approach Procedure, the SXTK
field is disabled so that no parallel course can be entered.
The system is capable of executing GPS, GPS Overlay, NDB, RNAV,
CIRCLING, and VOR approaches only. No LOC, ILS or MLS capabili-
ty is available.
If RAIM is not available at 2NM from the FAF, an APPROACH WARN
message will appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. Also, the
HSI flag will be set invalid. At this point the appropriate missed
approach procedures should be executed. The system will remain in
the Approach Mode and the discrete APPROACH annunciator will
remain illuminated until the HSI is set valid. To set the HSI valid, can-
cel the Approach on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page by pressing the
ENT Key.
The system will not display any interim waypoints between the FAF
and the MAP, even though a waypoint may be shown on the
approach plate. The system may not give vertical guidance to the
interim waypoint. Pilots are responsible for procedural compli-
ance.
NOTE: If the MAP is abeam or beyond the threshold, or the approach
is a circling approach, no altitude constraints will be displayed at the
MAP from the database. Constraints may be entered manually.
When the Approach is flown, the system will provide guidance along
the final approach course to the Missed Approach Point.
When initially executing a missed approach procedure, use the
FMS Heading Mode or manually fly the procedure to ensure prop-
er track and turn direction.
NOTE: A “fence” (++++++) separates the Missed Approach
Procedure waypoint from the MAP, the last waypoint of the Approach.
No Auto Leg change (waypoint sequencing) will occur to waypoints
beyond the “fence” (++++++) once the airplane passes the MAP.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
At the MAP the pilot must manually or via the HDG Mode maneuver
the aircraft to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint. If, after the
missed approach, an approach at a different airport is desired, erase
the current approach procedure before selecting a procedure at the
new airport. This will insure proper waypoint sequencing on the
Active Flight Plan.
LOADING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS until
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
<
<
<
<
the ACTIVE FPL Page
appears. (Figure 3-60)
KEED
EED
- KPRC
DRK
2. Line Select Key
-
KPRC
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over APP-
ROACH?
DEPART
ARRIVE
ETA>
ERASE
<
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
APPROACH page is now
displayed. (Figure 3-61)
APPROACH?
Figure 3-60
4. Airport Identifier
INSERT or VERIFY.
-
APCH KPRC
1/1
>
>
RUNWAY
TYPE
------
------
------
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS
twice, if required, to dis-
play runway list if not
already displayed.
TRANSITION
RW17L?
RW11
<
If a circling type approach is
desired:
Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor over TYPE.
Figure 3-61
ENT Key - DEPRESS to display the TYPE list. Proceed to Step 10.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired runway.
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
8. TYPE - SELECT if required.
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
10. TRANSITION - SELECT if required.
11. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
12. Approach Waypoints - REVIEW.
13. ENT Key - DEPRESS ACTIVE FPL Page is displayed. VERIFY
the approach appears as selected.
14. Waypoint Sequencing - Edit, if required, based on assigned route.
EXECUTING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH
NOTE: To fly a full procedure DME ARC or Procedure Turn, either
coupled or using own navigation, follow the FMS and
EFIS/Instrument displays.
USING RADAR VECTORS TO FINAL APPROACH COURSE
1. FPL key - DEPRESS to
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
display the ACTIVE FPL
Page. (Figure 3-62)
<
<
<
<
KEED
EED
- KPRC
2. Approach and Waypoint
Sequencing - VERIFY
they appear as selected.
DRK
KPRC
DEPART
3. MSG Key - VERIFY
approach is armed within
30NM of the airport and
the HSI scaling output
has changed to TRMNL
on NAVIGATION Page 2.
ARRIVE
ETA>
ERASE
<
APPROACH?
Figure 3-62
4. FMS Mode - SELECT or
VERIFY the appropriate
mode for guidance if
required.
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
<HDG 155
CANCEL
TO DRK
5. Flight
Director
or
DTK
197
Autopilot - ENGAGE the
appropriate mode if
required.
ENTER HDG
6. HDG Key - DEPRESS to
display the HEADING
VECTOR Page. (Figure
3-63)
Figure 3-63
7. Heading - INSERT as assigned by ATC.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS
twice to engage Heading
Select mode. (Figure 3-
64)
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
HDG 155
<
<
<
HDG SELECT ?
TO DRK
After receiving the final
intercept vector from
ATC:
DTK
197
>
9. HDG Key - DEPRESS to
display the HEADING
VECTOR Page. (Figure
3-65)
Figure 3-64
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
HDG 155
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
11. BACK Key - DEPRESS
to display INTERCEPT?
<
<
<
INTERCEPT ?
FAF
12. ENT Key - DEPRESS
cursor moves to the TO
field.
TO DRK
DTK
125
>
13. BACK Key - DEPRESS
until the FAF waypoint is
displayed.
Figure 3-65
14. ENT Key - DEPRESS cursor moves to the DTK field.
15. Final Approach Course - INSERT if a Procedure Turn type
approach or VERIFY if any other type approach.
16. ENT Key - DEPRESS twice.
17. CDI Display - VERIFY the HSI course needle slews to the final
approach course or manually select the course.
18. Approach Annunciator - When over the FAF, VERIFY annuncia-
tion and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVI-
GATION Page 2.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
USING OWN NAVIGATION - NO DME ARC
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
display the ACTIVE FPL
Page. (Figure 3-66)
<
KEED
- KPRC
EED
<
DRK
2. Approach and Waypoint
KPRC
Sequencing - VERIFY
<
they appear as selected.
<
DEPART
3. MSG Key - VERIFY
ARRIVE
ETA>
ERASE
<
approach is armed within
APPROACH?
30NM of the airport and
the HSI scaling output
has changed to TRMNL
on NAVIGATION Page 2.
Figure 3-66
4. FMS Mode - SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guid-
ance.
5. Flight Director or Autopilot - ENGAGE the appropriate mode.
6. Waypoints and HSI Course - VERIFY proper sequencing during
the approach.
7. Approach Annunciator - When over the FAF, VERIFY annuncia-
tion and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVI-
GATION Page 2.
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
DIRECT
13:48
ALT ?
305
PROCEDURE TURN
PT DRK
<
>
NX PT OVERFLY TO
The following is a brief
description of the screen dis-
plays typically seen while
executing a Procedure Turn.
DIS
0.2
ETE
00:00.0
301
DTK
>
>
GS
150
WIND
-AUTO-
---/---
As the aircraft approaches
the PT waypoint, a message
is displayed on the fourth line
of the CDU indicating the
Figure 3-67
next action the aircraft will take. This message is displayed 30 sec-
onds prior to the event and disappears when the action is initiated.
Figure 3-67 indicates the aircraft is flying DIRECT to DRK where a
Procedure Turn (PT) will take place. Line four indicates the aircraft
will turn to a heading of 305° upon reaching DRK. While flying the
Procedure Turn, the TO DRK will change to TO INTCPT. When the
Procedure Turn is completed, and the aircraft is inbound, the TO
INTCPT field changes to TO (the FAF).
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: When flying the approach on a transition that specifies NoPT
and a “PT” waypoint is depicted on the flight plan, it will be necessary
to do a DIRECT TO the next waypoint beyond the “PT” waypoint to
avoid flying the Procedure Turn.
NOTE: When a Procedure
NAVIGATION 1/4
Turn is initiated, the out-
PROCEDURE TURN
bound course is displayed
on the NAVIGATION 1
Page. If the course arrow
does not automatically slew
to the outbound course, it
must be manually set to the
outbound course so that the
CDI sensing is correct.
<TO INTCPT
NX RIGHT TO
DIS (1.3)
ETE
-----
350
>
14.7
00:05.9
305
OUTBOUND CRS
GS
>
>
150
WIND
---/---
-AUTO-
Figure 3-68
Figure 3-68 indicates a right
turn to 350° is upcoming.
See the following diagram and Figures 3-70 through 3-73 as the air-
craft sequences through the turn.
(IAF)
DILLY
5757'
D10.0
3-71
3-70
6310'
3-68
(IAF)
3-72
DRAKE
(DH)114.1 DRK
259°
(IAF)
3-73
3-67
7640'
D3.9
6220 '
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NAVIGATION 1/4
PROCEDURE TURN
TO INTCPT
-----
125
<
>
NX LEFT INTCPT
DIS (2.5)
ETE
12.9
00:04.8
350
DTK
>
>
GS
150
WIND
---/---
Figure 3-70
NAVIGATION 1/4
PROCEDURE TURN
TO INTCPT
NX LEFT INTRCPT
DIS (5.2)
ETE
-----
125
>
<
6.3
00:02.5
125
INBOUND CRS
GS
>
>
150
WIND
---/---
Figure 3-71
NAVIGATION 1/4
PROCEDURE TURN
TO DRK
NX MA11RC
DIS
-----
<
>
7.8
00:03.1
125
ETE
INBOUND CRS
GS
>
>
150
WIND
---/---
Figure 3-72
NAVIGATION 1/4
FR DRK
11:45
5083G
TO MA11RC
<
>
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
2.5
00:00.7
125
>
>
199
WIND
---/---
Figure 3-73
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: If aircraft is configured for dual systems no XFILL? prompt
will be displayed during a PT even if dissimilar data exists in each
system.
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE) that is dispayed after crossing the IAF
on the procedure turn is the time from the aircraft’s present position
to where the airplane intercepts the final approach course inbound
(INTCPT). After crossing this intercept point, the ETE shown will be
from the airplane’s present position to the FAF.
DIS that is displayed after crossing the IAF on the procedure turn is
the distance from the aircraft’s present position to where the airplane
intercepts the final approach course inbound (INTCPT). The DIS
shown in parentheses is the straight-line distance from the aircraft’s
present position to the procedure turn fix.
NOTE: The bearing and bearing distance are with respect to the pro-
cedure turn fix.
After crossing this intercept point the DIS shown will be from the air-
plane’s present position to the FAF and the DIS in parentheses will
be removed. TO the FAF will be displayed at this time having
changed from TO INTCPT on NAV Page1.
USING RADAR VECTORS TO INTERCEPT A DME ARC
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
display the ACTIVE FPL
Page. (Figure 3-74)
<
<
<
<
KEED
EED
- KPRC
DRK
2. Approach and Waypoint
Sequencing - VERIFY
they appear as selected.
KPRC
DEPART
3. MSG Key - VERIFY
approach is armed within
30NM of the airport and
the HSI scaling output
has changed to TRMNL
on NAVIGATION Page
2.
ARRIVE
ETA>
ERASE
<
APPROACH?
Figure 3-74
4. FMS Mode - SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guid-
ance.
5. Flight Director or Autopilot - ENGAGE the appropriate mode.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
6. HDG Key - DEPRESS to
display the HEADING
VECTOR Page. (Figure
3-75)
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
<HDG 080
CANCEL
TO DRK
7. Heading - INSERT as
assigned by ATC.
DTK
080
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS
twice to engage HDG
SELECT mode.
ENTER HDG
Figure 3-75
After receiving ARC inter-
cept vector from ATC:
9. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display the HEADING VECTOR Page.
10. Heading - INSERT.
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
11. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
HDG 205
<
12. BACK Key - DEPRESS
INTERCEPT ?
<
to display INTERCEPT?
ARC
(Figure 3-76)
TO DILLY
DTK
011
<
>
13. ENT Key - DEPRESS
cursor moves to the TO
field.
Figure 3-76
14. BACK Key - DEPRESS
until the ARC End/Final
Approach Course Way-point is displayed.
NOTE: If an intermediate waypoint exists on the ARC between the
ARC beginning point and the ARC end point, the ARC intercept point
should be approximated so it can be determined whether the ARC end
or intermediate waypoint should be used as the TO waypoint. NO
ARC INTERCEPT may be displayed if the wrong waypoint is selected.
15. ENT Key - DEPRESS twice (accepts the default DTK).
16. CDI Display - VERIFY course needle is set to the DTK shown on
the HEADING VECTOR Page.
17. Waypoints and HSI Course - VERIFY proper sequencing during
the approach.
18. Approach Annunciator - When over the FAF, VERIFY annuncia-
tion and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVI-
GATION Page 2.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
USING OWN NAVIGATION TO FLY DME ARC
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FPL Page. (Figure
3-77)
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
<
<
<
<
KEED
EED
- KPRC
2. Approach and Waypoint
Sequencing - VERIFY
they appear as selected.
DRK
KPRC
3. MSG Key - VERIFY
approach is armed within
30NM of the airport and
the HSI scaling output
has changed to TRMNL
on NAVIGATION Page 2.
DEPART
ARRIVE
ETA>
ERASE
<
APPROACH?
Figure 3-77
4. FMS Mode - SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guid-
ance.
5. Flight Director or Autopilot - ENGAGE the appropriate mode.
6. Waypoints and HSI Course - VERIFY proper sequencing during
the approach.
7. Approach Annunciator - When over the FAF, VERIFY annuncia-
tion and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVI-
GATION Page 2.
The following is a brief description of the screen displays typically
seen flying a DME Arc.
NOTE: Certain EFIS map displays do not support curved lines to
draw DME Arcs. In this case the map will only display waypoints up
to and including the IAF waypoint at the beginning of the arc. No
waypoints will be displayed while on the arc. Once the aircraft has
passed the arc end waypoint, the map will display the remaining
waypoints of the active flight plan. Although no waypoints will be dis-
played during the DME Arc
NAVIGATION 1/4
Procedure, the FMS page
displays will be as depicted
in Figures 3-78 through 3-82
<
DIRECT
11:47
11:53
AR D259J
<
>
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
16.6
00:005.4
265
NOTE: If aircraft is config-
ured for dual systems no
XFILL? prompt will be dis-
played during a DME ARC
procedure even if dissimilar
data exists in each system.
>
>
201
WIND
---/---
-AUTO-
Figure 3-78
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
As the aircraft approaches
the AR waypoint, a message
is displayed on the fourth line
of the CDU indicating the
next action the aircraft will
take (NX DME ARC). This
message is displayed thirty
seconds prior to the event
and disappears when the
action is initiated. Figure 3-
78 indicates the aircraft is fly-
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
<
DIRECT
AR D259J
NX DMEARC
DIS
11:47
11:53
355
>
2.7
ETE
00:001.0
239
DTK
>
>
GS
150
WIND
---/---
-AUTO-
Figure 3-79
NAVIGATION 1/4
DMEARC
ing DIRECT to D259J where
the aircraft will begin flying a
DME Arc (AR).
TO DILLY
9000A
>
<
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
(ARC 10.0)
7.0
Figure 3-79 shows the air-
craft is within thirty seconds
of intercepting the DME Arc
at D259J.
00:03.0
355
150
WIND
---/---
>
Figure 3-80
NAVIGATION 1/4
NOTE: The naming conven-
tion for ARC waypoints is as
follows: D indicates DME.
259 indicates the radial from
the ARC center NAVAID. J
indicate the ARC distance.
i.e. A=1nm J=10nm.
DMEARC
TO DILLY
NX DRK
DIS
9000A
12:02
2.0
<
>
(10)
ETE
00:00.7
029
DTK
(125)
GS
150
WIND
---/---
>
-AUTO-
Figure 3-80 shows the air-
craft is flying the DME Arc to
DILLY. (ARC 10.0) in the
Figure 3-81
DIS field indicates the arc center is 10.0 NM from the aircraft’s pre-
sent position.
NAVIGATION 1/4
NOTE: Distance (DIS) dis-
FR DILLY
TO DRK
11:59
6500G
played is the distance from
the present aircraft position
to the TO waypoint.
<
>
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
9.5
00:03.8
125
Estimated Time Enroute
(ETE) is the time around the
arc path to the TO waypoint.
149
WIND
---/---
>
Figure 3-82
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Use one of the following options to sequence to the missed approach
waypoint.
OPTION 1, Direct To the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint
1. d Key - DEPRESS. The DIRECT Page will be displayed.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
Missed Approach Procedure waypoint, if required.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to sequence to the Missed Approach
Procedure waypoint.
NOTE: If the direction the airplane will turn is in question and the turn
direction may not be in accordance with the missed approach proce-
dure, manually turn the airplane toward the missed approach fix then
perform the d to procedure.
OPTION 2, Heading to intercept a course to the Missed
Approach Procedure waypoint
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS.
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
The HEADING VECTOR
Page appears with the
HDG L270
<
cursor over the HEAD-
ING field. Type in the
appropriate heading
using a preceding R or L
to establish the turn
direction (i.e. L150).
(Figure 3-83)
CANCEL
<
MAP
TO MA11RC
DTK
125
>
<
Figure 3-83
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The cursor moves to the
Heading Mode field and
HDG SELECT? is in the
cursor. (Figure 3-84)
HEADING VECTOR
HDG L270
1/1
<
<
<
NOTE: Prior to step 3 the
enter key may be pressed
with the cursor over HDG
select field so that the air-
plane can begin the intercept
process. Repeat the proce-
dure from step1 to complete
the HDG intercept procedure.
HDG SELECT?
MAP
TO MA11RC
DTK 125
>
Figure 3-84
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS until INTERCEPT? is displayed.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The cursor moves to the
TO field. (Figure 3-85)
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
<HDG L270
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS
until the Missed Approach
Procedure waypoint is dis-
played.
<INTERCEPT
MAP
TO MA12RC
DTK
197
>
<
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The cursor moves to the
DTK field. Type in the
desired track to be inter-
cepted to the Missed
Approach Procedure way-
point. (Figure 3-86)
Figure 3-85
HEADING VECTOR
HDG L270
1/1
<
<
<
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS
TWICE. The NAVIGA-
TION Page will be dis-
played with the HDG and
DTK displayed in yellow.
The autopilot may now be
re-engaged if required to
fly to the Missed Approach
Procedure waypoint.
CANCEL
MAP
TO MA12RC
DTK
260
>
Figure 3-86
It is recommended that the ETA field on NAVIGATION Page 1 be
changed to ALT during approach procedures for a display of the altitude
constraints at the current TO waypoint. To change the field from ETA to
ALT, perform the following:
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the ETA
field.
NAVIGATION 1/4
2. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
<
DIRECT
13:48
ALT ?
305
ALT? will be displayed in
the cursor. (Figure 3-87)
PT DRK
<
>
NX PT OVERFLY TO
DIS
0.2
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
ETE
00:00.0
301
change the field to altitude.
DTK
>
>
GS
150
NOTE: If no altitude con-
straint is programmed at the
current TO waypoint, the ALT
field will display dashes.
WIND
-AUTO-
---/---
Figure 3-87
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
ENROUTE
DIRECT TO - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT
d function enables the pilot to fly direct to any lateral waypoint on
the Active Flight Plan without reinserting the waypoint identifier.
NOTE: If a Direct To the MAP on the active flight plan is initiated, the
selected Approach Procedure will be canceled as indicated by the
waypoints of the approach no longer being indented and a MSG.
d
1.
Key - DEPRESS. A DIRECT TO Page will appear with the
cursor over the current TO waypoint. (Figure 3-88)
2. Line Select Key
-
DIRECT
KSNA
1/2
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the
desired identifier.
<
<
<
>
>
>
>
PWE
TO MUSEL
HEMET
TRM
LMN
BURKK
BDF
NOTE: Active Flight Plans
exceeding 18 waypoints will
be continued on subsequent
pages. Press d, NXT or
PRV Key to access remain-
ing waypoints.
EED*
TBC
GSH
KDTW
*****
<
<
FMN
PUB
HLC
Figure 3-88
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Display automatically
advances to NAVIGATION Page 1.
NOTE: The system must compute a turn from a wings level position.
If the aircraft is in a turn when the d Key pressed, the aircraft will
roll to wings level position momentarily. The aircraft will then contin-
ue the turn toward the Direct To waypoint.
If an offset waypoint was selected, an OFFSET WPT Page is dis-
played. Verify data and DEPRESS ENT. The DIRECT Page is dis-
played with cursor over the Offset Waypoint. Press ENT again to
proceed direct to the WPT. Display automatically advances to
NAVIGATION Page 1.
4. DIS, DTK - CHECK.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
DIRECT TO - HP WAYPOINT
d
1.
Key - DEPRESS. A DIRECT TO Page appears with the
cursor over the current TO waypoint.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
desired HP identifier. (Figure 3-89)
NOTE: Active Flight Plans
DIRECT
KSNA
1/2
>
>
>
>
exceeding 18 waypoints will
be continued on subsequent
pages. Press d, NXT or
PRV Key to access remain-
ing waypoints.
<
<
<
PWE
MUSEL
HEMET
TRM
LMN
BURKK
HP BDF
EED*
TBC
GSH
KDTW
*****
<
<
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display the HOLDING
PATTERN Page with
both the OK? ENT and
FMN
PUB
HLC
CANCEL
(Figure 3-90)
option.
Figure 3-89
NOTE: The holding pattern
may be edited if required , at
this time. See Page 3-67 for
details.
HOLDING PATTERN
1/1
>
>
>
AT BDF
DIRECT ENTRY
INBOUND CRS
MAX HOLDING TAS
TURN DIR
070
261
RIGHT
1.5
To Select and Go Direct
To HP Waypoint:
LEG TIME
>
>
LEG DIS
(0.0)
EXIT MODE
OK? ENTER
MANUAL
CANCEL
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Display automatically
advances to NAVIGA-
TION Page 1.
Figure 3-90
5. DIS, DTK - CHECK.
To Cancel Holding Pattern:(from the Holding Pattern page)
1. Line Select - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired HP way-
point.
2. Hold Key - DEPRESS
3. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over CANCEL?.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Display automatically advances to NAVI-
GATION Page 1 and aircraft proceeds Direct To the waypoint
with the Holding Pattern canceled.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
DIRECT TO - RANDOM WAYPOINT
This procedure enables the pilot to add a random waypoint to the
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN in the desired sequence and proceed direct
to it.
d
1.
Key - DEPRESS. The cursor will automatically appear over
the current TO waypoint on the DIRECT TO Page.
2. Line Select Key
-
DIRECT
KSNA
1/2
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the iden-
tifier to follow the new
entry. (Figure 3-91)
<
<
<
>
>
>
>
PWE
MUSEL
HEMET
TRM
LMN
BURKK
HP BDF
EED*
TBC
GSH
3. Type in the waypoint
identifier.
KDTW
*****
<
<
FMN
TO PUB
HLC
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
5. Waypoint
Coordinates - VERIFY or
INSERT. To insert
Waypoint Coordinates (cursor over POS field):
Page
Figure 3-91
a. Latitude - INSERT (N or S first, then degrees, minutes and
hundredths (6 characters)).
b. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
c. Longitude - INSERT (E or W first, then degrees, minutes and
hundredths (7 characters)).
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
DIRECT
KSNA
1/2
7. Waypoint Sequence -
VERIFY that the way-
point is in the proper
location. (Figure 3-92)
<
<
<
<
<
>
>
>
>
>
HLC
MUSEL
HEMET
TRM
PWE
LMN
BURKK
BDF
EED*
TBC
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Display automatically
advances to NAVIGA-
TION Page 1.
TO ALS
KDTW
*****
FMN
PUB
NOTE: If Direct To a pilot
entered waypoint is desired,
a latitude and longitude entry
may be required.
Figure 3-92
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
A. Latitude - Insert N or S first, then degrees, minutes, and hun-
dredths (6 characters)
B. Longitude - Insert E or W first, then degrees, minutes, and
hundredths (7 characters)
If Direct To an offset waypoint is desired, the radial and distance
entry from the parent waypoint may be required.
NOTE: If ENT Key is not depressed prior to leaving DIRECT Page,
the waypoint identifier will not appear on the Active Flight Plan, the
aircraft will not proceed DIRECT TO this waypoint and will need to be
re-entered.
9. DIS, DTK - CHECK.
NOTE: A Direct To function may also be accomplished from NAVI-
GATION Page 1, 2, or 3 by placing the cursor over the TO waypoint
and typing in the desired waypoint if required. Depress the ENT Key
and the system will proceed Direct To the selected waypoint.
If the selected waypoint was not on the active FPL a fence will be
added to the FPL and no AUTO LEG BACK will occur beyond this
waypoint.
Anytime the Direct To function is used to go Direct To the MAP the
Approach Procedure will be canceled. The SYSTEM MESSAGE
page will display APPROACH CANCELED and the CDI sensitivity
will return to Terminal scale of 1NM full scale deflection.
DIRECT TO - CLOSEST AIRPORT
This procedure allows the pilot to select a desired airport and pro-
ceed DIRECT TO it.
DIR CLOSET ARP 2/2
<
1. Æ Key- DEPRESS until
TO KSNA
KNZJ
KSLI
KLGB
KNFG
KCNO
KLAX
KRAL
KONT
034/ 13
057/ 17
360/ 20
349/ 23
123/ 32
041/ 34
335/ 36
055/ 39
040/ 39
DIR CLOSEST ARP Page
appears. (Figure 3-93)
<
<
When initially accessed
the cursor will be over
the airport closest to the
aircraft’s present posi-
tion at that time.
<
<
Figure 3-93
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired airport identifi-
er and press ENT. NAVIGATION Page 1 will be displayed and
d
the airplane will proceed
to the selected airport.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: The bearing and distance values to the closest airports are
based on the aircraft’s present position at the time this page is
accessed. The values are not updated while the page is being dis-
played. To obtain updated information, it is necessary to exit the
page then return.
PSEUDO-VORTAC (SELECTED COURSE)
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1.
NOTE: The system must be proceeding Direct To a waypoint or
DTK will not be an enterable field. If system is proceeding Direct To
the desired waypoint, proceed to Step 5. If system is not currently
proceeding direct to a waypoint, continue with Step 2.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over TO field.
3. TO Waypoint Identifier - INSERT (if necessary).
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
NAVIGATION 1/4
If Waypoint Page Appears:
<
DIRECT
PT LNK
22:36
22:42
a. Waypoint Page Co-
ordinates - VERIFY
or INSERT.
<
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
17.9
00:04.3
070
>
>
b. ENT Key - DE-
256
WIND
104/ 14
PRESS.
-AUTO-
5. Desired Track (DTK) -
Figure 3-94
INSERT. (Figure 3-94)
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS. If
the DTK entry positions
the aircraft on the
FROM, or far, side of the
TO waypoint, the Leg
Change Mode switches
to -MAN-, otherwise it
remains in -AUTO-.
(Figure 3-95) The pilot
must determine if -MAN-
or -AUTO- is appropri-
ate.
NAVIGATION 1/4
PSEUDO VORTAC
<
<
TO LNK
22:42
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
14.1
00:03.3
070
>
256
WIND
104/ 14
>
-MAN-
Figure 3-95
NOTE: The system will turn the aircraft to intercept the DTK at up to
a 45° angle if coupled to the autopilot.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: The d function may also be used to initiate a Pseudo-
VORTAC. Following the Direct To entry using the d Key the dis-
play automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1. Manually
position the cursor over DTK field and continue as described above
in Steps 5 and 6. To exit Pseudo-VORTAC Mode make any leg
change (e.g. d Key press and enter current TO waypoint). When
exiting Pseudo-VORTAC the system may return to the -AUTO- Leg
Change Mode unless the system was in -MAN- prior to initiating
Pseudo-VORTAC.
A manual leg change means the system will not automatically
sequence to the next waypoint on the active flight plan. To sequence
to the next waypoint in the flight plan, use the Direct To function or
place the cursor over -MAN-. Press the BACK Key and AUTO? will
be displayed. Press the ENT Key and the system will return to the
automatic leg change mode.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
USING HEADING VECTOR
This procedure enables the pilot to program and fly a specific head-
ing vector as well as program an automatic intercept of a specified
leg.
PROGRAMMING A HEADING VECTOR
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
display HEADING VEC-
TOR Page with cursor
over the HDG field.
<HDG 205
CANCEL
2. Heading
-
INSERT
TO LFK
DTK
197
desired Heading in whole
degrees, preceded by R
or L, if applicable, to indi-
cate a turn direction.
(Figure 3-96)
ENTER HDG
Figure 3-96
NOTE: R or L should be
used for a heading change
greater than 180° from the
present heading. A T in the
HDG and DTK fields indi-
cates the system is operating
in the true heading mode.
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
HDG 205
<
<
<
HDG SELECT ?
TO LFK
DTK
197
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The cursor advances to
Heading Mode field.
(Figure 3-97)
>
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select Heading Select
Mode and return to NAV-
IGATION Page 1.
Figure 3-97
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
FR PAXTO
19:07
19:21
205
NOTE: HDG SELECT and
the programmed heading are
displayed on NAVIGATION
Page 1 indicating the aircraft
is in Heading Select Mode.
(Figure 3-98)
TO LFK
HDG SELECT
DIS
<
21.9
ETE
00:05.3
197
DTK
>
GS
216
WIND
158/ 10
>
-AUTO-
Figure 3-98
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
CHANGING HEADING VECTOR WHILE IN HEADING SELECT
MODE
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page with
cursor over the HDG field.
2. Heading - INSERT desired Heading.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
NOTE: Cursor moves to the Heading Mode field, but it is not neces-
sary to depress ENT Key because the system is already in heading
select mode..
4. NAV or ENT Key - DEPRESS to check heading and return to
NAVIGATION Page 1.
CHANGING TO WAYPOINT WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE
NOTE: This procedure establishes a leg between the new TO
Waypoint and the waypoint preceding it on the Active Flight Plan or a
Pseudo-VORTAC. If crosstrack distance exceeds 125nm, the
HEADING Mode will be canceled and the STRG INVALID message
will be displayed.
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
display HEADING VEC-
TOR Page.
HDG 205
<
2. Line Select Key
-
HDG SELECT
TO LFK
<
<
DEPRESS to position the
cursor over TO Waypoint.
(Figure 3-99)
DTK
197
>
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS
to cycle through way-
points on the Active
Flight Plan or INSERT
alternate waypoint.
Figure 3-99
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
If Waypoint Page Appears:
a. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY or INSERT.
b. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to DTK field.
5. Desired Track (DTK) - VERIFY or INSERT.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
OK? ENT message
appears. (Figure 3-100)
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
<HDG 205
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select TO Waypoint and
return to NAVIGATION
Page 1. The cursor may
be positioned over the
Leg Change Mode field.
HDG SELECT
TO IAH
<
<
DTK
193
>
OK? ENTER
Figure 3-100
NOTE: If the Desired Track
is changed, a Pseudo-VORTAC is programmed. If the DTK entry
positions the aircraft on the FROM, or far-side of the TO waypoint,
the Leg Change Mode displayed on NAVIGATION Page 1 switches
to -MAN-, otherwise it remains in -AUTO-. The pilot must determine
if -MAN- or -AUTO- is appropriate.
CANCELING HEADING SELECT MODE
Initiate a DIRECT TO procedure, using the d and ENT Keys, which
immediately cancels the commanded heading or perform the follow-
ing:
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over HDG
SELECT.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS until CANCEL? is displayed.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to cancel Heading Vector and return to
NAVIGATION Page 1.
NOTE: The system may turn the aircraft to intercept the current
TO/FROM leg at up to a 45° angle.
PROGRAMMING AN INTERCEPT
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page with
cursor over the HDG field.
2. Heading - INSERT desired Heading in whole degrees, preceded
by R or L, if applicable, to indicate a turn direction.
NOTE: R or L should be used for a heading change greater than
180° from the present heading. A T indicates the system is operating
in the true heading mode.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The cursor advances to
Heading Mode field.
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
HDG 205
<
<
<
4. BACK Key - DEPRESS
to select INTERCEPT?
(Figure 3-101)
INTERCEPT ?
TO LFK
DTK
197
>
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Cursor moves to the TO
Waypoint field.
Figure 3-101
6. BACK Key - DEPRESS,
if required, to cycle
through waypoints on
the Active Flight Plan or
INSERT an alternate
waypoint. (Figure 3-
102)
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
<HDG 205
HDG SELECT
<
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
TO IAH
DTK
193
<
>
If Waypoint Page Appears:
a. Waypoint
Page
Coordinates - VERI-
FY or INSERT.
Figure 3-102
b. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to DTK field.
8. Desired Track (DTK) - VERIFY or INSERT.
NOTE: If the Desired Track is changed, a Pseudo-VORTAC is pro-
grammed. If the DTK entry positions the aircraft on the FROM, or far,
side of the TO waypoint, the Leg Change Mode on NAV page 1
switches to -MAN-, otherwise it remains in -AUTO-. The pilot must
determine if -MAN- or -AUTO- is appropriate.
NOTE: If a DME Arc endpoint is selected as the TO waypoint, a
default DTK will be displayed based on the point at which the ARC
will be intercepted and DTK is not selectable.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
An Intercept Message may
appear (NO COURSE
INTERCEPT, NO ARC
INTERCEPT, or INTER-
CEPT BEYOND FIX
(Figure 3-103). If no mes-
sage appears the intercept
will occur on the TO side of
the selected TO waypoint.
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
<HDG 205
INTERCEPT
<
<
TO IAH
DTK
193
>
INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX
OK? ENTER
The intercept messages are
based on the current aircraft
Figure 3-103
heading and track. Once the selected heading has been established,
the HEADING VECTOR Page may be viewed to determine the inter-
cept status. If NO COURSE INTERCEPT or NO ARC INTERCEPT
occurs, the message light will illuminate and these messages will be
displayed on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. To view one of these
messages on the HDG Page, use the Line Select Key to remove the
cursor from the page.
NOTE: BUSY - STANDBY may be displayed in yellow momentarily
while the intercept is calculated.
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS to accept data and return to NAV page 1.
The cursor is positioned over the Leg Change Mode if the DTK
has been entered manually on the Heading Page.
PROGRAMMING A HEADING INTERCEPT TO THE FINAL
APPROACH COURSE
This procedure non-precision approach may be accomplished using the
following steps:
1. HDG - DEPRESS to dis-
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
play the HEADING VEC-
TOR Page.
<HDG 205
2. Type in the assigned
<
heading. (Figure 3-104)
<TO DRK
DTK 125
>
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The cursor moves to the
heading mode field.
OK? ENTER
Figure 3-104
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
4. BACK Key - DEPRESS to
display the INTERCEPT?
prompt. (Figure 3-105)
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
<HDG 205
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The cursor moves to the
TO field.
INTERCEPT ?
FAF
<
<
TO DRK
DTK 125
>
6. BACK Key - DEPRESS
until the FAF waypoint is
displayed.
OK? ENTER
Figure 3-105
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
8. Enter the inbound final approach course in the DTK field if required.
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS Twice to return to Navigation Page 1.
NAVIGATION Page 1 will be displayed with the TO waypoint, the
FAF, and waypoint previous to the FAF in the FR field if no manual
DTK was entered. The system will now intercept the Final
Approach course and sequence to the MAP.
NOTE: If an intercept is programmed to a FAF that is part of a
Procedure Turn the DTK must be manually entered. This will cause
PSEUDO VORTAC to be displayed on NAV Page 1.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
PROGRAMMING A HOLDING PATTERN
WARNING: When entering PTs or HP airspace the FMS may not
constrain the airplane from violating maneuvering airspace.
Pilots are responsible for procedural compliance.
This procedure enables the pilot to program a Holding Pattern (HP) at
a specific waypoint.
An HP is automatically programmed from the database when it is part
of an Arrival or Approach procedure.
NOTE: No HP can be programmed at an ARC end point on the final
Approach course manually.
1. NAV, FPL, or d Key - DEPRESS to display applicable page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired
waypoint.
NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages, only the TO Waypoint can be
selected, and on the Active Flight Plan Page, a Holding Pattern
cannot be programmed at the FR or TO Waypoint.
NOTE: If WPT is a duplicate
HOLDING PATTERN
1/1
WPT the country code will
be displayed in this field in
parenthesis (in green)
(Figure 3-106)
AT CAP
(USA)
>
INBOUND CRS
MAX HOLDING TAS
TURN DIR
013
259
RIGHT
1.0
>
>
>
3. HOLD Key - DEPRESS
to display HOLDING
PATTERN Page with cur-
sor over the INBOUND
CRS field. (Figure 3-106)
LEG TIME
LEG DIS
(3.2)
EXIT MODE
MANUAL
Figure 3-106
4. INBOUND CRS - VERI-
FY or INSERT.
NOTE: A verified Inbound Course programs a DIRECT ENTRY pro-
cedure. The system Defaults to the inbound course between the pre-
vious WPT on the FPL and the waypoint at which the hold is desired.
If a Direct TO Leg is displayed on the NAV pages the inbound course
defaults to the leg between the aircraft’s present position and the cur-
rent TO waypoint. When an inserted Inbound Course value is
beyond the DIRECT ENTRY parameters, then a TEARDROP or
PARALLEL pattern is programmed.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
When a Holding Procedure is initiated, the inbound course is dis-
played on NAVIGATION Page 1. If the CDI needle does not auto-
matically slew to the inbound course, manually set the CDI needle to
the inbound course so that the course needle sensing is correct.
A T adjacent to the value displayed in the INBOUND CRS field indi-
cates the course is referenced to true north.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
HOLDING PATTERN
AT TRM (USA)
DIRECT ENTRY
1/1
The type of entry is dis-
played. Cursor moves to
the LEG TIME field.
(Figure 3-107)
>
>
INBOUND CRS
MAX HOLDING TAS
TURN DIR
013
259
RIGHT
1.0
6. LEG TIME - VERIFY or
INSERT (valid range 1.0
to 9.9 min).
LEG TIME
>
>
LEG DIS
(3.2)
EXIT MODE
MANUAL
7. If Holding Pattern is
complete proceed to
Step 11. If Optional
Entries are required,
continue with Steps 8, 9, or 10.
Figure 3-107
Optional Entry: Turn Direction
8. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over TURN DIR.
a. BACK Key - DEPRESS to change direction.
b. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Optional Entry: Leg Distance
9. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over LEG DIST.
a. Leg Distance
-
INSERT or VERIFY
(valid range 1.0nm
to 50nm).
HOLDING PATTERN
AT TRM (USA)
DIRECT ENTRY
1/1
>
>
INBOUND CRS
MAX HOLDING TAS
TURN DIR
013
259
RIGHT
(1.0)
b. ENT Key - DE-PRESS.
NOTE: When the leg dis-
tance is entered, the leg time
will be computed as indicated
by parentheses and vice-
versa. (Figure 3-108)
LEG TIME
>
>
LEG DIS
3.2
EXIT MODE
AUTO
Figure 3-108
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Selecting Exit Mode:
10. Line Select Key - DE-
PRESS to position the
cursor over MANUAL or
AUTO. Press the BACK
key to change exit mode
option. Selecting MANU-
AL will initiate a continu-
ous hold. Selecting
AUTO will exit the hold
the next time the HP fix is
crossed or after the entry
procedure is completed.
(Figure 3-109)
HOLDING PATTERN
AT TRM (USA)
DIRECT ENTRY
INBOUND CRS
1/1
>
>
>
>
013
MAX HOLDING TAS
TURN DIR
259
RIGHT
1.0
LEG TIME
LEG DIS
(3.2)
EXIT MODE
OK? ENTER
MANUAL
Figure 3-109
11. ENT Key - DEPRESS. OK? ENT prompt will appear. Verify inputs.
12. ENT Key - DEPRESS to load the Holding Pattern at the selected
waypoint and return to the NAVIGATION, DIRECT TO, or FPL
Page.
REVIEWING, EDITING, OR CANCELING A HOLDING PATTERN
This procedure enables the pilot to review, edit, or cancel a Holding
Pattern at a specific waypoint.
REVIEWING
1. NAV, FPL, or d Key - DEPRESS to display applicable page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired HP
waypoint.
NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages, only the TO Waypoint can be select-
ed, and on the Active Flight Plan, the TO Waypoint can only be
reviewed.
HOLDING PATTERN
AT TRM (USA)
DIRECT ENTRY
1/1
3. HOLD Key - DEPRESS
to display HOLDING
PATTERN Page. (Figure
3-110)
>
>
INBOUND CRS
MAX HOLDING TAS
TURN DIR
013
RIGHT
1.0
LEG TIME
4. Holding Pattern - REVIEW.
>
>
LEG DIS
(3.2)
EXIT MODE
OK? ENTER
MANUAL
CANCEL
Figure 3-110
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
EDITING
5. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired field.
a. INSERT value for INBOUND CRS, LEG TIME, or LEG DIST
or
b. BACK Key - DEPRESS to change TURN DIR or EXIT
MODE.
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The OK? ENT prompt will appear.
NOTE: A re-entry to the Holding Pattern must be flown if the
Inbound Course or Turn Direction are changed while holding at the
HP Waypoint. No XFILL capability is available to the other system in
a dual system installation from one or both systems when a holding
pattern is in progress.
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS to return to the NAVIGATION, DIRECT
TO, or FPL Page.
CANCELING
HOLDING PATTERN
AT CAP (USA)
DIRECT ENTRY
1/1
1. Line Select Key
-
>
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the
INBOUND CRS
MAX HOLDING TAS
TURN DIR
013
259
RIGHT
>
>
>
CANCEL?
prompt.
LEG TIME
1.0
(Figure 3-111)
LEG DIS
(3.2)
EXIT MODE
MANUAL
CANCEL ?
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The HP annunciation is
erased from NAVIGA-
TION, DIRECT TO, and
FPL Pages.
Figure 3-111
NOTE: If canceling holding pattern at the current TO Waypoint, HP
or AT is replaced by “TO”.
EXITING A HOLDING PATTERN
This procedure gives the pilot three options to exit a Holding Pattern:
exiting the next time over a holding fix, going Direct To the holding fix,
or performing a Leg Change.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
EXITING HOLDING PATTERN NEXT TIME OVER HOLDING FIX
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
<
>
>
display NAVIGATION
Page 1, 2 or 3.
HOLD RIGHT MANUAL
AT ORD
EXIT HOLD
DIS
01:01
00:00.4
1.4
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over MANU-
AL. (Figure 3-112)
ETE
00:00.4
299
INBOUND CRS
GS
119
WIND
327/ 13
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS
to display AUTO?.
(Figure 3-113)
Figure 3-112
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The NAVIGATION Page
indicates that the aircraft
will EXIT HOLD the next
time over the holding fix
(aircraft will complete the
loop around the holding
pattern). (Figure 3-114)
NAVIGATION 1/4
HOLD RIGHT AUTO?
01:01
<
>
AT ORD
EXIT HOLD
DIS
>
<
00:00.4
1.4
ETE
00:00.4
299
INBOUND CRS
GS
119
WIND
327/ 13
NOTE: The next (NX) way-
point information may also
appear if the exit is made
during Waypoint Alert.
-AUTO-
Figure 3-113
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
>
HOLD RIGHT
AUTO
AT ORD
EXIT HOLD
DIS
01:01
<
>
00:00.4
1.4
ETE
00:00.4
299
INBOUND CRS
GS
119
WIND
327/ 13
Figure 3-114
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY GOING DIRECT TO HOLDING
FIX
1. d Key - DEPRESS to
DIRECT
KABE
PSB
HP FNT
HASTE
1/2
<
<
>
>
>
>
>
display Direct To Page
with cursor over current
HP Waypoint. (Figure 3-
115)
ONL
CYS
DBL
DVC
<
<
<
PMM
PGS
KUBBS
OBK
HEC
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display HOLDING PAT-
TERN Page with cursor
over CANCEL?. (Figure
3-116)
KVNY
*****
DBQ
FOD
Figure 3-115
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
go Direct To current TO
Waypoint (Holding Fix)
and cancel Holding
Pattern.
HOLDING PATTERN
AT FNT
1/1
EXIT HOLD
INBOUND CRS
MAX HOLDING TAS
TURN DIR
00:00.4
299
>
305
>
>
>
EXITING HOLDING PAT-
TERN BY PERFORMING A
LEG CHANGE
RIGHT
1.0
LEG TIME
LEG DIS
(3.5)
EXIT MODE
MANUAL
CANCEL ?
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to
display the NAVIGA-
TION Page 1.
Figure 3-116
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over FROM
field (HOLD RIGHT/
LEFT). (Figure 3-117)
NAVIGATION 1/4
FR ------
<
>
------
15:22
00:02
7.3
AT FNT
EXIT HOLD
DIS
>
<
3. FR Waypoint - INSERT
desired waypoint.
ETE
00:02.4
299
INBOUND CRS
GS
175
WIND
375/ 13
Figure 3-117
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The next waypoint in the
Active Flight Plan
sequence will appear in
the TO field. (Figure 3-
118)
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
<
>
>
FR HASTE
TO PMM
EXIT HOLD
DIS
------
15:22
00:02
7.3
ETE
00:02.4
299
INBOUND CRS
GS
5. TO Waypoint - VERIFY.
To change the TO
Waypoint, insert the
desired identifier.
175
WIND
375/ 13
Figure 3-118
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
activate the new leg and
cancel the Holding Pattern.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) OPERATION - PRE-
DEPARTURE
SETTING CRUISE ALTITUDE, TRANSITION LEVEL, AND
DEFAULT FLIGHT PATH ANGLE
This procedure allows the pilot to define a Cruise Altitude and change
the default values for Transition Level and Flight Path Angle.
After Initial Leg Selection:
1. VNAV Key - DEPRESS to display VNAV Page 1.
2. Line Select Key
-
VNAV 1/4
DEPRESS to position
cursor over DATA?.
(Figure 3-119)
DESCENT
TO KSFO
875
11
>
>
>
EST CROSSING
875
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display VNAV DATA
Page with cursor over
the CRUISE ALT field.
REQUIRED FPM
----
0
ACTUAL
DATA?
FPM
4. Cruise Altitude - INSERT.
(Figure 3-120)
Figure 3-119
Only two or three digits
are required to input an
altitude, i.e. enter 80 and
8000 is displayed, enter
120 and 12000 is dis-
played.
VNAV DATA 1/1
CRUISE ALT
FL210
FL180
3.0
>
TRANS LEVEL
DEFAULT FPA
>
>
PRESEL ALT
FL210
-----
-----
Any altitude value
entered greater than the
TRANS LEVEL, altitude
value which normally
defaults to FL180, is
converted and displayed
RANGE
ETE
(NM)
Figure 3-120
as flight level (FL). Entering 210 will display FL210.
An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding
zero, i.e., enter 052 and 52 is displayed.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: CRUISE ALT may also be inserted on VNAV Page 1, line 3
(adjacent to the TO waypoint field) when #TOC or #TOD are the TO
waypoint. The cruise ALT may automatically be entered by the pres-
elector if the preselector has the capability and the system is config-
ured for digital preselector.
A (at or above) or B (at or below) constraint entries are not applicable
on this page. Setting a cruise altitude will establish a #TOD (Top of
Descent) waypoint or a #TOC (Top of Climb) waypoint if VNAV is
valid. A #TOC will be established only if there are no altitude con-
straints between the aircraft and #TOC and the aircraft is climbing.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
VNAV DATA 1/1
6. Transition Level - INSERT
CRUISE ALT
TRANS LEVEL
DEFAULT FPA
FL210
FL180
3.0
or VERIFY. (Figure 3-121)
>
>
>
NOTE: Field defaults to
FL180 if pilot does not enter
a value. Anytime a TRANS
ALT is entered, the value
will remain in non-volatile
memory even after the sys-
tem is shut down.
PRESEL ALT
FL210
150.5
RANGE
ETE
(NM)
00:15.6
Figure 3-121
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
8. Default Flight Path Angle (DEFAULT FPA) - INSERT or VERIFY
(in degrees and tenths, 0.1 to 6.0 range).
NOTE: Field defaults to 3.0 if pilot does not enter a value. Anytime an
FPA is entered, the value will remain in non-volatile memory even
after the system is shut down.
If configured, altitude preselector information will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen. If the aircraft is in a climb or descent, distance
and ETA information to the preselected altitude will be displayed.
(Figure 3-119)
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS to return to VNAV Page 1.
CREATING/CHANGING VNAV WAYPOINTS
Vertical navigation constraints can only be programmed for waypoints
on the Active Flight Plan, and though all Active Flight Plan waypoints
are displayed on VNAV Pages, new waypoints must be added to the
Active Flight Plan before they appear on the VNAV Flight Plan way-
point pages.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
After initial leg selection on NAV page 1:
1. NAV, FPL, or d Key - DEPRESS to display applicable page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired way-
point.
NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages, only the TO Waypoint can be
selected. If the waypoint is selected from either the NAV, or Direct
pages, Direct FPA information pages will be displayed on the last line
of the screen. ( Figure 3-123)
3. VNAV Key - DEPRESS
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
to display VNAV WAY-
POINT Page for selected
waypoint. (Figure 3-122)
WAYPOINT MENLO
ALT
-----
-----
---
>
>
EST CROSSING
OFFSET
REQ FPM
FPA
4. ALT - INSERT altitude
constraint followed by A
(at or above) or B (at or
below), if applicable.
Only two or three digits
are required to input an
altitude, i.e. enter 30A
and 3000A is displayed.
-----
---
DIRECT FPA
-----
Figure 3-122
Full digit entry may be used to enter an altitude. Altitudes less
1000 feet enter a preceding zero, i.e. enter 054 and 54 feet is
displayed.
Any altitude entered greater than the transition level is converted
and displayed as flight level (FL).
NOTE: If the waypoint is part of a SID, STAR or Approach proce-
dure, appropriate altitude constraints will prefill from the database.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to OFFSET field. (Figure
3-123)
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
6. OFFSET - If applicable,
WAYPOINT MENLO
ALT
3000A
3000
INSERT value in nautical
miles (-99 to +99 range).
>
>
>
EST CROSSING
OFFSET
---
REQ FPM
-----
a. If the offset is prior to
the waypoint, enter
the range value and
a (-) prefills as a
default or
FPA
(DEF)
DN ---
DIRECT FPA
UP 0.0
Figure 3-123
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
b. Enter a (+), then the range value to indicate the off
set is beyond the waypoint.
c. To erase the offset value, INSERT 0 and press ENT Key.
The field changes to dashes, indicating no offset is
programmed.
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The cursor moves to the FPA field only if
the entered constraint is below the aircraft’s present altitude.
NOTE: A climb FPA cannot be programmed but the direct FPA field
will display the up angle between the aircraft’s present altitude and
the altitude constraint that was entered. If an FPA is programmed to
a direct FPA up waypoint it will be a DN (descent) FPA and an ambi-
guity will be displayed on the VNAV waypoint page.
To program a Path Descent
8. Flight Path Angle (FPA) -
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
INSERT or VERIFY (valid
range is 0.1 to 6.0).
(Figure 3-124)
WAYPOINT MENLO
ALT
3000
2900
>
>
>
EST CROSSING
OFFSET
---
REQ FPM
-----
NOTE: The FPA value field
prefills with the default (DEF)
value programmed on the
VNAV DATA Page if this
waypoint was accessed from
the FPL Page. If accessed
from the NAV or d Page,
the FPA field prefills with the
FPA
(DEF)
DN 3.0
DIRECT FPA
DN 0.0
Figure 3-124
(DIR) value. If an FPA is manually entered, the FPA type field
changes to (MAN).
With the cursor over the FPA value, Depressing the BACK Key will
cycle through all or some of the following:
• (DEF)
• (DB)
• (AUTO)
• (DIR)
• (MAN)
To cancel the FPA, INSERT 0 and press ENT Key. The field
changes to dashes, indicating no FPA is programmed, the vertical
deviation output is invalid and no vertical deviation information will be
displayed on the CDU or the ADI/HSI.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS to load or verify the FPA value.
NOTE: When a descent FPA is programmed at a waypoint, a G
appears next to the altitude constraint indicating a Glide Path and ver-
tical deviation guidance and information will be available.
REVIEWING VNAV WAYPOINTS
When SIDs, STARs or Approaches have altitude constraints at way-
points on the procedure, the system automatically loads the altitude
constraints from the database on to the Active Flight Plan. No altitude
will be loaded at the MAP if the approach is a circling approach, or the
MAP is abeam or beyond the runway threshold. The system will not
load any “expect to cross” altitudes from the database on to the SIDS
or STARS, as part of ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN or VNAV Pages. No
altitudes are loaded from the database when an approach procedure
contains a Procedure Turn.
NOTE: The system will not fly a full SID or STAR procedure.
Using Active Flight Plan Page
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
desired waypoint.
3. VNAV Key - DEPRESS.
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
The VNAV WAYPOINT
WAYPOINT JOICE
Page appears with the
cursor over the ALT field.
(Figure 3-125)
ALT
3000
3000
>
>
>
EST CROSSING
OFFSET
---
REQ FPM
DN 1250
DN 3.0
4. ALT - REVIEW.
FPA
(AUTO)
NOTE: If (AUTO) FPA is
displayed, the system has
automatically programmed a
waypoint-to-waypoint FPA
for the procedure.
DIRECT FPA
DN 1.3
Figure 3-125
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS until display returns to ACTIVE FLIGHT
PLAN Page or depress the FPL Key.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to review VNAV waypoint data at
remaining waypoints.
Using VNAV Flight Plan Waypoints Page
1. VNAV Key - DEPRESS to display the VNAV FLIGHT PLAN
WAYPOINTS Pages.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
desired waypoint.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The VNAV WAYPOINT Page appears with
the cursor over the ALT field. (Figure 3-126)
4. ALT - REVIEW or INSERT new value.
NOTE: If the FPA was
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
retrieved from the database,
(DB) appears in the FPA
type field. (Figure 3-126)
WAYPOINT RW30L
ALT
633
633
>
>
>
EST CROSSING
OFFSET
---
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
return to the VNAV
FLIGHT PLAN WAY-
POINTS Page.
REQ FPM
DN 1450
DN 3.1
FPA
(DB)
DIRECT FPA
DN 0.9
6. Repeat Steps 2 through
5 to review or change
altitude constraints at
remaining waypoints.
Figure 3-126
VERTICAL NAVIGATION - ENROUTE
PROGRAMMING VERTICAL PATH DESCENTS
The pilot can use various methods to load a Flight Path Angle (FPA)
and determine the aircraft’s descent path.
NOTE: When the system detects a rapid change of baro altitude set-
ting, non-continuous data from an air data computer, vertical speed
change of more than 40ft/sec, or sequencing to the next waypoint on
the active flight plan, the vertical deviation output is momentarily set
Invalid. When vertical deviation returns to a valid state, the appropri-
ate value of vertical deviation will again be displayed.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Using Database (DB) FPA
The GNS-XL database contains Flight Path Angles associated with
waypoints on SIDs, STARs, and Approaches, that prefill when these
procedures are programmed into the Active Flight Plan. The FPA
field on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page displays (DB), which indicates
an FPA from the database is loaded and Vertical Deviation is provid-
ed at the programmed angle when the waypoint becomes the Vertical
TO Waypoint. If the FPA at the (DB) VNAV waypoint is changed in
any way, the (DB) FPA will no longer be available.
Using Default ( DEF) FPA
The default FPA value will automatically be displayed if an altitude is
programmed on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page, except if the FPA
comes from the database or the VNAV WAYPOINT Page was
accessed using a Direct To function.
The pilot can load the Default
FPA (set on the VNAV
DATA Page) by pressing the
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT CIVET
ALT
14000A
FL180B
FL230
>
>
>
ENT Key when the cursor is
on the FPA field of the
VNAV WAYPOINT Page.
The FPA field displays (DEF)
and Vertical Deviation is pro-
vided at the programmed
angle when the waypoint
becomes the Vertical TO
Waypoint. (Figure 3-127)
EST CROSSING
OFFSET
---
REQ FPM
DN 450
DN 3.0
FPA
(DEF)
DIRECT FPA
DN 1.3
Figure 3-127
Using Manual (MAN) FPA
The pilot can type in a desired Flight Path Angle on the VNAV WAY-
POINT Page within the valid range, 0.1 to 6.0 degrees. When the
ENT Key is depressed the FPA is loaded, the FPA field indicates
(MAN) and Vertical Deviation is provided at the programmed angle
when the waypoint becomes the Vertical TO Waypoint.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Using Automatic (AUTO) FPA
The (AUTO) mode is pro-
vided to link together
descent waypoints that
have Cross-At type con-
straints and provide a com-
puted Flight Path Angle
between them. (Figure 3-
128)
WPT1
10000
DESCENT PATH
WPT2
5000
(AUTO)
AUTOMATIC ANGLE
The (AUTO) mode may be
selected ONLY if the cho-
sen waypoint has a Cross-
AT type constraint pro-
Figure 3-128
grammed. All Cross-AT waypoints that are a part of a STAR or
APPROACH are automatically put into (AUTO) mode when the pro-
cedure is retrieved from the database and loaded onto the Active
Flight Plan.
If the waypoint prior to the selected (AUTO) FPA waypoint has a
Cross-AT-or-ABOVE, Cross-AT-or-BELOW, or Cross-BETWEEN
constraint programmed, an automatic angle is assigned and will be
the same angle as the programmed Default Angle on VNAV DATA
Page. Vertical Deviation is provided at the programmed angle when
the waypoint becomes the Descent Reference Waypoint.
NOTE: If no ALT constraints are programmed before the selected
(AUTO) FPA waypoint, the (AUTO) FPA is the same as the (DEF) FPA.
Unless an FPA is programmed at a waypoint, the system uses the
(DEF) FPA to the first waypoint on the flight plan with an altitude con-
straint to establish a #TOD point. To help establish #TOD, the sys-
tem will automatically load the destination airport elevation on the
flight plan, provided the flight plan was not obtained from AFIS. An
altitude constraint and FPA must be loaded using the ENT Key to
establish a Path Descent and activate Vertical Deviation to any way-
point except a (DB) WPT.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
EDITING ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
The following pages allow the pilot to edit altitude constraints for way-
points on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page, VNAV pages, referred to as
VNAV FPL Pages. One of the three following options may be used:
OPTION 1: Using the VNAV Page.
OPTION 2. Using the VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Pages.
OPTION 3: Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page.
Option 1: Using VNAV Page
1. VNAV Key - DEPRESS
VNAV 1/2
>
to display VNAV 1/2
CLIMB
TO CIVET
RANGE
ETE
5566
FL350
Page. The altitude con-
straint may be changed
on this page if the cur-
rent TO waypoint has a
constraint programmed.
Type the new altitude in
the altitude field adjacent
to the TO WPT. All
parameters associated
with the former con-
straint will remain
>
(NM)
300.4
01:13.5
ACTUAL FPM UP
400
>
CLIMB GRAD
DATA
97 /NM
Figure 3-129
unchanged, i.e., FPA, A, B, G, or OFFSET. (Figure 3-129)
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Option 2: Using VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Page
1. VNAV Key - DEPRESS to display the VNAV 2/2 Page.
NOTE: More VNAV Pages
will be available if the active
flight plan has several pages
of waypoints.
VNAV 2/2
<
>
>
>
CLIMB
LAX
8754
-10 10000A
- 2 13000A
- 3 15000A
<
<
KEGGS
COOP
DAG
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position the
cursor over the desired
waypoint altitude. (Figure
3-130)
CLARR
LAS
-----
-----
-----
ERASE
<
<
>
>
RENTT
Figure 3-130
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
3. Altitude Constraint - INSERT new altitude constraint followed by A
(at or above) or B (at or below), if applicable. Any altitude value
entered greater than the Transition Level value on the data page is
converted and displayed as FL (flight level, rounded off to the near-
est hundred feet). An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered
with a preceding zero.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Option 3: Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page
1. NAV, FPL, or d Key - DEPRESS to display applicable page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired waypoint.
NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages, only the TO Waypoint can be selected.
3. VNAV Key - DEPRESS
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
to display VNAV WAY-
POINT Page for selected
WWAAYYPPOOIINNTT CCIIVVEETT
waypoint. (Figure 3-131)
>
AALLTT
1144000000AA
FFLL118800BB
FL2300
EESSTT CCRROOSSSSIINNGG
OOFFFFSSEETT
4. ALT - INSERT new alti-
tude constraint followed
by A (at or above) or B
(at or below), if applica-
ble. Only two or three
digits are required to
input an altitude, i.e. enter
30A and 3000A is dis-
played.
>
>
------
RREEQQ FFPPMM
DDNN 445500
DDNN 33..00
FFPPAA
((DDEEFF))
DDIIRREECCTT FFPPAA
DUNP 11..33
Figure 3-131
Any altitude value entered greater than the Transition Level
value on the data page is converted and displayed as flight level
(FL). An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a pre-
ceding zero.
NOTE: If the waypoint is part of a SID, STAR or Approach proce-
dure, the altitude constraint prefills from database. “Cross-Between
two Altitudes” type constraints, as shown in Figure 3-130, cannot be
programmed manually.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to OFFSET field.
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The cursor moves to the FPA field.
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS to return to the page where the VNAV
waypoint was accessed.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
DIRECT TO - VNAV WAYPOINT AS LATERAL WAYPOINT
This procedure enables the pilot to proceed Direct To a waypoint,
both vertically and laterally by means of a Vertical Path Descent.
If the current To waypoint is the desired VNAV Direct To waypoint, go to Step 4.
1. Line Select Key (on NAVIGATION Page 1) - DEPRESS to posi-
tion the cursor over the TO waypoint field. Type in the desired
waypoint and press ENT
or,
DIRECT
KSNA
1/2
<
<
<
>
>
>
d
Key - DEPRESS.
PWE
MUSEL
HEMET
TRM
LMN
A DIRECT TO Page
appears with the cursor
over the current TO way-
point.
BURKK
TO BDF
EED*
TBC
GSH
KDTW
*****
<
<
FMN
2. Line Select Key
-
PUB
DEPRESS to position
cursor over desired way-
point. (Figure 3-132)
HLC
Figure 3-132
NOTE: Active Flight Plans containing more than 18 waypoints will
display the remaining waypoints on subsequent pages. Press
key again, or NXT Key, to access remaining pages.
d
A Random Waypoint may also be used. See DIRECT TO -
Random Waypoint.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS. CDU screen automatically advances to
NAVIGATION Page 1.
NOTE: If an offset waypoint was selected, the system first displays
the OFFSET WPT Page. Verify data and DEPRESS ENT. The
DIRECT Page will again be displayed with the cursor over the Offset
Waypoint. Press ENT. The
display
advances to NAVIGATION
Page 1.
automatically
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
DIRECT
23:03
05:22
TO BDF
<
>
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
1328.5
05:46.3
049
4. Line Select Key
DEPRESS to position
cursor over TO Waypoint
on NAVIGATION Page
1. (Figure 3-133)
-
>
>
228
WIND
230/ 8
-AUTO-
Figure 3-133
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
5. VNAV Key - DEPRESS to display the VNAV WAYPOINT Page
for TO Waypoint.
6. ALT - INSERT or VERIFY. If an altitude constraint has already
been programmed, the cursor will be displayed over the FPA
(DIR) field value. You may proceed to Step 10. (Figure 3-135)
NOTE: If the waypoint is part of a SID, STAR or Approach proce-
dure, the ALT constraint field prefills from the database.
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to OFFSET field. (Figure 3-
134)
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
8. OFFSET - If applicable,
WAYPOINT BDF
INSERT value in nautical
miles (-99 to +99 range)
ALT
12000
FL290
>
>
>
PLAN CROSSING
OFFSET
REQ FPM
FPA
---
a. If the offset is prior
to the waypoint,
enter the range
value and a (-) pre-
fills as a default or
DN 1200
DN ---
DIRECT FPA
DN 0.2
b. enter a (+), then the
range value to indi-
cate the offset is
beyond the waypoint.
Figure 3-134
NOTE: To erase the offset
value, INSERT 0 and press
ENT Key. The field changes
to dashes, indicating no off-
set is programmed.
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT BDF
ALT
12000
>
PLAN CROSSING
OFFSET
FL290
---
>
>
REQ FPM
DN 1200
DN 0.2
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Cursor moves to the
FPA field.
FPA
(DIR)
DIRECT FPA
DN 0.2
NOTE: Cursor only moves
to the FPA field if altitude
constraint is below current
baro altitude.
Figure 3-135
10. Flight Path Angle - VERIFY Direct Flight Path Angle is desirable to fly.
NOTE: Direct Flight Path Angle prefills if it is within the valid range
(0.1 to 6.0). (Figure 3-135)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
11. ENT Key - DEPRESS to accept waypoint entries. VNAV Page 1
is displayed, a Vertical Path Descent has been established, and
Vertical Deviation information and guidance is enabled if a
descent has been programmed.
DIRECT TO - VNAV WAYPOINT
This procedure allows the
DIRECT
KSNA
1/2
<
<
<
>
>
>
pilot to program a Direct To
on the Vertical Flight Plan,
while still flying the lateral
waypoints on the Active
Flight Plan. The VNAV
Direct To function automati-
cally deletes any intermedi-
ate altitude constraints and
sets up a Path Descent to
the Vertical TO Waypoint
using the Direct Flight Path
Angle.
PWE
MUSEL
HEMET
TRM
LMN
BURKK
TO BDF
EED*
TBC
GSH
KDTW
*****
<
<
FMN
PUB
HLC
Figure 3-136
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT BDF
d
1.
Key - DEPRESS. A
DIRECT TO Page will
appear with the cursor
over the current TO way-
point.
>
>
>
ALT
-----
PLAN CROSSING
OFFSET
14000
---
REQ FPM
DN 1100
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor over desired way-
point. (Figure 3-136)
DIRECT FPA
-----
Figure 3-137
3. VNAV Key - DEPRESS.
VNAV WAYPOINT Page
appears. If necessary,
position cursor over ALT
field (Figure 3-137). If
an altitude constraint has
already been pro-
grammed, the cursor will
appear over the FPA
value field (Figure 3-
138). Go to Step 8.
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT BDF
ALT
14000
>
>
>
PLAN CROSSING
OFFSET
14000
---
REQ FPM
DN 1100
DN 2.5
FPA
(DIR)
DIRECT FPA
DN 2.5
4. ALT - INSERT or VERIFY.
Figure 3-138
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to OFFSET field.
6. OFFSET - If applicable, INSERT value in nautical miles (-99 to
+99 range).
a. If the offset is prior to the waypoint, enter the range value
and a (-) prefills as a default or
b. enter a (+), then the range value to indicate the offset is
beyond the waypoint
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to FPA field.
8. Flight Path Angle - VERIFY or INSERT (in degrees and tenths,
0.1 to 6.0 range).
NOTE: Direct Flight Path Angle prefills if it is within the valid range
and an ALT is programmed. (Figure 3-138)
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS to accept waypoint entries and return to
VNAV Page 1.
CREATING VNAV PROFILE WAYPOINTS
VNAV profile waypoints (#TOC, #TOD, and #PRESL) are used to
provide a prediction of the position of the aircraft on the vertical flight
path. These are non-enterable waypoints computed by the system
based on current ground speed and vertical speed.
Top of Climb (#TOC)
Top of Climb Altitude is obtained from either the CRUISE ALT
entered by the pilot on the VNAV DATA Page, or from the Altitude
Preselector setting, if available. When the aircraft arrives at the pre-
selected altitude, the system will automatically set cruise altitude to
the pre-selected altitude which will then provide a #TOD prediction.
If vertical climb constraints are programmed, #TOC will automatically
appear as the Vertical To Waypoint when the aircraft laterally passes
within 1 mile the last vertical waypoint on the active flight plan that
has a climb constraint. Once the aircraft has crossed the final climb
constraint waypoint, #TOC will then become the Vertical To
Waypoint. If there are no vertical constraints programmed for climb,
#TOC will be displayed as the first vertical waypoint as long as the
aircraft is in a climb.
When the programmed cruise altitude is reached, #TOC is removed
from the VNAV Flight Plan, and #TOD becomes the Vertical To
Waypoint.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
When #TOC is the TO Waypoint:
The pilot may obtain range and ETE to any altitude above the aircraft
during a climb.
1. VNAV Key - DEPRESS
VNAV 1/3
>
>
<
<
to display VNAV Page 1.
CLIMB
TO #TOC
RANGE
ETE
1775
12000
80.5
2. Line Select Key
-
(NM)
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the
#TOC altitude field.
(Figure 3-139)
00:19.6
ACTUAL FPM UP
500
>
<
CLIMB GRAD
DATA?
118/NM
3. Alternate Altitude
-
INSERT. This value
may be above or below
the altitude pre-select
value, but must be
above the current baro
altitude.
Figure 3-139
VNAV 1/3
(NM)
>
<
CLIMB
TO #TOC
RANGE
ETE
1775
12000
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS
and observe the change
in RANGE and ETE.
(Figure 3-140)
>
<
125.5
00:19.6
ACTUAL FPM UP
500
>
5. Repeat steps 2 thru 4 to
return to previous #TOC
altitude setting.
CLIMB GRAD
DATA?
118/NM
<
Figure 3-140
Top of Descent (#TOD)
The Top of Descent waypoint is the position where the aircraft inter-
cepts the descent path at the cruise altitude. The system calculates
the #TOD by establishing a valid Descent Reference Waypoint, then
uses either the CRUISE ALT entered by the pilot on the VNAV
DATA Page, or the Altitude Preselector setting, if available. The
default FPA maybe used in this calculation.
If no Descent Reference Waypoint with FPA and crossing altitude is
programmed, the system will use the arrival airport and elevation
(ARP Reference Point, not a runway) and the default FPA to fix Top
of Descent as long as the active flight plan is not an AFIS flight plan.
NOTE: The default FPA may be used to establish #TOD, but no
Vertical Deviation Valid will occur until the FPA is actually loaded
from the VNAV WPT Page.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
One minute prior to arriving at #TOD, the system issues the VNAV
WPT ALERT message and the discrete waypoint light will flash for
10 seconds, then go steady.
NOTE: Changing CRUISE ALT on the CDU to a lower altitude
should only be done after the aircraft has departed cruise altitude, or
#TOD at the current cruise altitude will be lost.
Pre-Selected Altitude Intercept Point (#PRESL)
When the system has an input from an Altitude Pre-selector and the
aircraft is flying toward this altitude, a profile waypoint (#PRESL)
appears on the VNAV Page. #PRESL, however, never becomes the
Vertical To Waypoint. When the Pre-selector input is valid, ETE and
RANGE to #PRESL can be found on the VNAV DATA Page.
NOTE: With certain types of Pre-Selectors installed (analog), it may
be necessary to manually enter a CRUISE ALT when the PRESEL
ALT is set higher than the cruise altitude. The system does not read
analog Pre-selector output until the aircraft’s baro is within approxi-
mately 1000ft of the pre-selected value.
Descent Reference Waypoints
Descent Reference Waypoints have a fixed altitude crossing, i.e.
Cross-At type altitude constraint. To create a Descent Reference
Waypoint, the pilot can program a Flight Path Angle or a Cross-At
altitude constraint.
If a programmed FPA violates a prior vertical constraint, the system
reassigns the Descent Reference Waypoint, using the Default FPA
from the VNAV DATA Page, as illustrated in Figure 3-141.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Cruise Altitude FL210
#TOD
Vertical Constraint
FL180B
16500 PLAN CROSSING
CIVET
14000A
Vertical Constraint
Programmed FPA
3.0
8000
FUELR
Descent Reference
Wpt
As shown, FUELR is the Descent Reference Waypoint
that establishes #TOD. Because the programmed
FPA allows for a vertical descent that meets the
vertical constraints at CIVET, FUELR remains the
Descent Reference Waypoint.
126
KLAX
Cruise Altitude FL210
#TOD
FL180B
Default FPA 3.0
14000 PLAN CROSSING
CIVET Descent Reference Wpt
14000A
Programmed FPA
1.0
8000
FUELR
Descent Reference
Wpt
In this case, since the programmed FPA at FUELR is
too shallow to meet the vertical constraints at CIVET,
the system reassigns CIVET at the Descent Reference
Waypoint, using the default FPA to compute #TOD.
126
KLAX
Top of Descent and Descent Reference Waypoint
Figure 3-141
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
REMOTE TUNING
TUNING COMMS
This procedure enables the pilot to keyboard tune the aircraft radios
via the CDU. Some control heads may require placement in the
Remote Mode in order to accept tuning data from the CDU keyboard.
NOTE: If system is configured for 3 Comms the tune section will con-
sist of 4 pages.
1. TUNE Key - DEPRESS.
TUNE 1/3
COMM 1
The Comm Radio TUNE
Page will be displayed.
ACTIVE (MAN)
PRESET
------
132.55
2. Line Select Key
-
>
>
DEPRESS (if neces-
sary) to position cursor
over appropriate PRE-
SET field.
COMM 2
ACTIVE
PRESET
------
118.80
3. Frequency - INSERT.
(Figure 3-142)
Figure 3-142
NOTE: Trailing zeroes are not required.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
TRANSFER? will auto-
TUNE 1/3
COMM 1
ACTIVE (MAN)
PRESET
TRANSFER?
matically appear. (Figure
3-143)
------
132.55
>
>
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The entered PRESET fre-
quency transfers to
COMM 2
ACTIVE
PRESET
------
118.80
ACTIVE.
The new fre-
quency also displays as
the ACTIVE frequency on
the appropriate Comm
control head.
Figure 3-143
NOTE: Keyboard tuned frequencies may display for a few seconds
then go to dashes if the frequency read back from the radio or the
control head is not available.
NOTE: (MAN) adjacent to Active Comm frequency indicates that the
frequency has been entered using the COMM control head. No
prompts are displayed when Active Comm frequency has been key-
board entered.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
The PRESET frequency displayed on the control head is not neces-
sarily the PRESET frequency displayed on the CDU. Each may be
entered independently.
Depending on the system configuration the cursor can appear over
the PRESET field for either COMM 1 or COMM 2.
TUNE 2/3
TUNING NAVs
NAV 1
FREQ
RANGE
BRG
PSP
115.50
10.0
>
>
Keyboard Method
(MAN)
(MAN)
If Station Identifier Is Used:
302
NAV 2
FREQ
PRESET
BRG
TNP
1. TUNE Key -DEPRESS
until NAV TUNE Page is
displayed. (Figure 3-
144)
114.20
35.0
035
Figure 3-144
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor opposite the
desired radio: NAV 1 or
NAV 2.
TUNE 2/3
NAV 1
FREQ
RANGE
BRG
BLH
>
(MAN)
(MAN)
115.50
10.0
3. Station Identifier - INSERT
or VERIFY entry. (Figure
3-145)
302
NAV 2
FREQ
PRESET
BRG
TNP
>
114.20
35.0
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The new frequency is dis-
played immediately and is
annunciated with (KEY)
adjacent to the frequency
field. If the identifier is not
found immediately, the
IDENT field will go to
dashes until the station is
located in the database.
Once located, the identifi-
er will be displayed and
the (KEY) annunciation
will shift to the identifier
line. (Figure 3-146)
035
Figure 3-145
TUNE 2/3
(KEY)
NAV 1
FREQ
RANGE
BRG
BLH
>
>
117.40
61.7
141
NAV 2
FREQ
PRESET
BRG
TNP
(MAN)
114.20
35.0
035
Figure 3-146
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: NAV tuning is designed to enhance the VPU (VORTAC
Position Unit). The VPU will only use VOR/DME or DME only
navaids (includes TACAN and ILS) therefore, only VOR/DME or
DME only navaids will be displayed. In areas where a VOR only and
a DME only are on the same frequency and within line of sight of the
aircraft, entering the VOR identifier will result in the database replac-
ing the VOR identifier with the “usable” DME identifier. When this
occurs, the RANGE and BRG displays remain associated with the
VOR even though it is no longer displayed. This ambiguity will occur
when the frequency rather than the identifier is entered.
When the CDU keyboard is used to tune a navaid, the local VPU
database is searched for the tuned frequency. If found it is paired
with the nearest usable Navaid identifier associated with that fre-
quency. If the station identifier tuning method is used to tune the
radio. the identifier ultimately paired with the tuned frequency may
differ from the identifier originally entered. If the navaid is unusable,
that is, out of range, or a frequency conflict exists, dashes will be dis-
played in the IDENT field and the new frequency will be displayed.
5. Frequency - VERIFY that the ACTIVE frequency on the control
head and CDU displays agree.
If Station Frequency is Used:
1. TUNE Key -DEPRESS until NAV TUNE Page is displayed.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired
FREQ field.
3. Frequency - INSERT or
TUNE 2/3
VERIFY. (Figure 3-147)
NAV 1
FREQ
RANGE
BRG
BLH
115.50
10.0
NOTE: Trailing zeroes are
not required.
>
>
(MAN)
(MAN)
302
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
NAV 2
FREQ
PRESET
BRG
TNP
114.20
35.0
5. Frequency - VERIFY that
control head display is
tuned to the desired fre-
quency.
035
Figure 3-147
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
When the station is locat-
ed in the VPU database
the identifier will be dis-
played and the (KEY)
annunciation will shift to
the identifier line. (Figure
3-148)
TUNE 2/3
(KEY)
NAV 1
FREQ
RANGE
BRG
PSP
115.50
10.0
>
>
302
NAV 2
FREQ
PRESET
BRG
TNP
(MAN)
114.20
35.0
6. RANGE and BRG -
035
CHECK.
NOTE: (MAN) adjacent to
the FREQ field indicates that
Figure 3-148
the frequency has been entered manually from the NAV control head.
Auto Tune Method
Certain control heads will require placement in the Remote Mode at
the control head in order to recognize the tuning data from the GNS-
XL. Only NAV/DME radios may be placed in the AUTO TUNE mode.
DME HOLD, Manual Control
TUNE 2/3
Head Tuning, Keyboard
Tuning or use of the
AUTO/MAN Switch will take
the GNS-XL out of the
Auto/Tune Mode.
NAV 1
FREQ
RANGE
BRG
(KEY)
PSP
115.50
10.0
>
>
302
NAV 2
FREQ
PRESET
BRG
TNP
(MAN)
114.20
35.0
1. TUNE Key - DEPRESS
to display the NAV
TUNE Page.
035
2. Line Select Key
-
Figure 3-149
DEPRESS to place cur-
sor over IDENT or
FREQ field of NAV 1 or
2. (Figure 3-149)
TUNE 2/3
AUTO?
NAV 1
FREQ
RANGE
BRG
PSP
>
>
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS,
AUTO? is displayed in
place of (KEY) or
(MAN). (Figure 3-150)
115.50
10.0
302
NAV 2
FREQ
PRESET
BRG
TNP
(MAN)
114.20
35.0
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
place system in AUTO
TUNE Mode. After a
brief pause the CDU and
control head information
035
Figure 3-150
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
will change to reflect the
Identifier chosen by the
system. (Figure 3-151)
TUNE 2/3
NAV 1
FREQ
RANGE
BRG
MZB
117.80
74.9
>
>
NOTE: No prompt is dis-
played adjacent to the
IDENT field when system is
in AUTO TUNE mode.
204
NAV 2
FREQ
PRESET
BRG
TNP
(MAN)
114.20
35.0
5. FREQ, RANGE and
BRG - CHECK that the
FREQ of the control
head and CDU display
agree and that range
and bearing are reasonable.
035
Figure 3-151
TRANSPONDER AND ADF KEYBOARD TUNE
1. TUNE Key - DEPRESS to display the page with XPDR and ADF.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
desired code or frequen-
cy field. (Figure 3-152)
TUNE 3/3
3. Code or Frequency -
XPDR
ADF
(MAN)
-----
-----
>
INSERT and verify new
value.(Figure 3-153)
>
>
(MAN)
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
(MAN) field disappears
indicating radios have
been keyboard tuned.
Verify the code or fre-
quency changes on
CDU and control head
displays.
Figure 3-152
TUNE 3/3
(MAN)
NOTE: (MAN) adjacent to
ADF or XPDR indicates that
the frequency or code has
been entered manually from
the control head.
XPDR
ADF
-----
300.0
>
>
>
(MAN)
Figure 3-153
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
PLANNING PROCEDURES
FUEL PLANNING
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS to display FUEL STATUS Page.
NOTE: REMAINING and RESERVE quantities are stored in non-
volatile memory after system shutdown. Upon system turn-on, VERIFY
INPUTS is displayed and REMAINING, RESERVE, and FLOW values
will flash.
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor over REMAINING
field. (Figure 3-154)
PLAN 1/8
FUEL STATUS
>
>
>
LB
REMAINING
RESERVE
FLOW
5000
1000
0
3. Fuel Quantity Remaining
- VERIFY or INSERT.
HOURS
RANGE
NM/LB
-----
-----
-----
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
5. Fuel Reserve - VERIFY
or INSERT.
Figure 3-154
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
7. Fuel Flow - INSERT or VERIFY.
NOTE: No fuel flow entry is required in the Automatic Fuel Flow mode.
All flashing fields must be verified or values inserted using the ENT Key, in
order for HOURS field to display information. RANGE and NM/LB fields
will display information when a valid ground speed is recognized.
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS. If a manual fuel flow is entered the VERIFY
INPUTS message changes to LAST INPUT: and sets the time at
:00 minutes. (MAN) will be displayed adjacent to the FLOW field.
When the LAST INPUT field exceeds 15 minutes, the REMAINING,
RESERVE, and FLOW fields blink indicating verification or update
is required. REMAINING, RESERVE and FLOW must be manually
verified.
NOTE: Auto fuel flow can be reselected by positioning the cursor over
the manual fuel flow and depressing the BACK Key. AUTO? is dis-
played. The current auto fuel flow is displayed in the cursor.
Depressing ENT Key will select the auto fuel flow. When going from
Manual to Automatic Fuel Flow Mode the REMAINING, RESERVE
and FLOW fields will blink. Verifying inputs is required, Repeat Steps
2 through 7.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: HOURS of fuel and RANGE are calculated to the RESERVE
fuel, not “0” fuel, unless the RESERVE fuel is “0”.
To change the unit of measurement (LB or KG):
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
REMAINING field. DEPRESS the Line Select Key above to
position the cursor over the unit field (LB or KG).
b. BACK
Key
-
DEPRESS.
The
field will display LB?
or KG? to notify the
pilot of the pending
change. (Figure 3-
155)
PLAN 1/8
FUEL STATUS
>
>
>
LB?
5000
1000
1200
00:05
REMAINING
RESERVE
FLOW
LAST INPUT:
c. ENT
Key
-
HOURS
RANGE
NM/LB
03+19
1341
DEPRESS. The units
field on the title line
and specific range line
will change. All fuel
figures are recalculat-
0.335
Figure 3-155
ed to reflect the new units of measurement.
TRIP PLANNING
The TRIP PLAN Page provides the capability to calculate information
for Active or Stored Flight Plans, DIRECT TO legs, or Random legs
without affecting any of the system’s navigation functions.
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS to display TRIP PLAN Page.
NOTE: Initially the TRIP
PLAN 2/8
PLAN Page will display the
TRIP PLAN
<DIRECT
A
KDAL
KHPN
Active Flight Plan (if pre-
sent). The initial leg dis-
played will be DIRECT TO
the current TO waypoint on
the active flight plan or the
first TO waypoint on the
flight plan selected. (Figure
3-156)
TO LIT
GS
407
<
DIS/DTK
ETE
258.1/060
00:38.2
FPL
1242/03+03
04:00
ETA @KHPN
RAIM @KHPN
AVAIL
Figure 3-156
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
2. Line Select Key
-
PLAN 2/8
TRIP PLAN
< DIRECT
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the TRIP
PLAN field.
>
>
6
KDAL
KHPN
TO LIT
GS
407
3. Desired Flight Plan -
INSERT Flight Plan
Number (Figure 3-157)
or “A” for Active Flight
Plan. (Figure 3-158).
DIS/DTK
ETE
-----/---
------
FPL
-----/-----
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Figure 3-157
NOTE: If a Flight Plan num-
ber is left in the TRIP PLAN
field and not returned to “A”,
no updated Active Flight
Plan information will be dis-
played. Figures 3-156 and 3-
157 show how the screen
appears when an Active FPL
has been selected and the
airplane is airborne.
PLAN 2/8
TRIP PLAN
DIRECT
>
A
KDAL
KHPN
<
TO LIT
GS
407
>
DIS/DTK
ETE
-----/---
------
FPL
-----/-----
5. FR Waypoint - VERIFY
or INSERT as required.
(Figure 3-159)
Figure 3-158
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
PLAN 2/8
TRIP PLAN
FR KDAL
>
6
KDAL
KHPN
7. TO Waypoint - VERIFY
or INSERT as required.
<
TO ----
GS
407
>
DIS/DTK
ETE
-----/---
------
FPL
------/------
Figure 3-159
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: With TRIP PLAN A
selected, the TRIP PLAN leg
will automatically advance to
display DIRECT TO the cur-
rent NAVIGATION Page TO
Waypoint each time the
TRIP PLAN Page is
accessed. (Figure 3-160)
PLAN 2/8
TRIP PLAN
DIRECT
>
>
A
KDAL
KHPN
407
<
TO LIT
GS
DIS/DTK
ETE
-----/---
------
FPL
------/------
8. ENT Key - DE-PRESS
(Figure 3-161). Selected
leg information and time
distance for the remain-
der of the Flight Plan are
displayed. Information
between the remaining
legs of the Flight Plan
can be reviewed by
pressing the ENT Key
for each subsequent leg.
Figure 3-160
PLAN 2/8
TRIP PLAN
FR KDAL
>
6
KDAL
KHPN
<
TO LIT
GS
407
>
DIS/DTK
ETE
258.1/060
00:38.2
FPL
1242/03+03
9. Groundspeed - VERIFY.
Current aircraft ground-
speed is displayed
unless a manual entry is
made.
Figure 3-161
To Enter Manual Groundspeed:
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over GS
value field.
b. Groundspeed - INSERT.
c. ENT Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) will appear adjacent to the
GS field.
To Return to Automatic Groundspeed:
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over GS
value field.
b. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO? appears in the GS field to
inform pilot of the pending change and current GS is dis-
played in the cursor.
c. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
10. Data - CHECK. When DIRECT is displayed all data except DTK
is updated continuously.
If data is not continuously updated, it will be recalculated each time:
a. The TRIP PLAN Page is selected.
b. A TRIP PLAN is entered.
c. A leg change is made on the TRIP PLAN Page. ETE and
FPL time are recalculated whenever the groundspeed
changes.
d. Leg or GS change is made on FUEL PLAN Page.
NOTE: ETA @ the destination and RAIM @ the destination are dis-
played only when DIRECT legs are being viewed. (Figure 3-163)
If the TRIP PLAN Page is being displayed during a leg change on
the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN the new TO Waypoint is not displayed.
Exit and return to the TRIP PLAN Page to view the updated TO
Waypoint.
PLAN 2/8
>
11. To review the remainder
TRIP PLAN
FR KLAX
--
----
----
of the Flight Plan:
Position cursor over TO
field, DEPRESS ENT
Key TWICE to call up
next leg. DEPRESS
ENT Key ONCE for
each subsequent leg.
(Ground-speed should
be updated if neces-
sary.)
<
TO KPIA
GS
406
>
DIS/DTK
ETE
1425.3/051
03:30.3
FPL
1425/03+03
Figure 3-162
NOTE: Information between
any desired waypoints can
be reviewed by selecting the
TRIP PLAN Page and enter-
ing a FROM and TO way-
point (Figure 3-162) or per-
forming the present position
direct procedures (Figure 3-
163). If the TO waypoint is
not on the selected Flight
Plan, the Flight Plan number
and origin/destination fields
will display dashes.
PLAN 2/8
TRIP PLAN
DIRECT
>
>
--
----
----
<
TO COS
GS
404
DIS/DTK
ETE
441.5/075
001:5.6
FPL
4410/01+05
01:00
ETA @KLIT
RAIM @KLIT
AVAIL
Figure 3-163
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
To update the TRIP PLAN leg to the current TO waypoint with
an Active Flight Plan selected:
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over TRIP
PLAN field.
b. ENT the letter [A] in the cursor.
c. ENT Key - DEPRESS twice to display information in the data
fields.
NOTE: If an offset waypoint is in the TO field the OFFSET WPT
Page will appear. The ENT Key must be depressed again.
The TRIP PLAN leg will display DIRECT TO the current NAVIGA-
TION Page TO waypoint.
Selecting another display page (other than MSG and FUEL PLAN)
and returning to the TRIP PLAN Page will also update the leg with
DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint.
FLIGHT PLAN FUEL PLANNING
The FUEL PLAN Page provides the capability to calculate fuel con-
sumption information for Active or Stored Flight Plans, DIRECT TO
Legs or Random Legs without affecting any of the system’s naviga-
tion functions.
The Fuel Plan Number and Origin and Destination identifiers,
TO/FROM leg and groundspeed value on this page will be identical
to the TRIP PLAN Page. Changing GS or the current leg on the
FUEL PLAN Page also affects the TRIP PLAN Page. Pilot initiated
changes made to the FLOW field on the FUEL STATUS Page are
reflected on the FUEL PLAN Page.
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS to display FUEL PLAN Page.
NOTE: Initially the FUEL
PLAN 3/8
>
PLAN will display the Active
FUEL PLAN
DIRECT
A
KDAL
KHPN
Flight Plan (if selected). The
initial leg displayed will be
DIRECT TO the current TO
waypoint from NAV page 1.
(Figure 3-164)
<
TO LIT
GS
434
>
FLOW
1200
271
LEG FUEL
FPL FUEL
2938
2. Line Select Key
-
REM @ KHPN
1264
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the
FUEL PLAN field.
Figure 3-164
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
3. Desired Flight Plan -
INSERT Flight Plan
Number (Figure 3-165)
or “A” for Active Flight
Plan.
PLAN 3/8
FUEL PLAN
<DIRECT
>
>
3
KDAL
KHPN
TO LIT
GS
450
FLOW
1200
------
------
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
LEG FUEL
FPL FUEL
NOTE: If a flight plan num-
ber is left in the Fuel Plan
field and not returned to “A”,
no updated Active Flight
Plan information will appear.
Figure 3-165
5. FR Waypoint - VERIFY
(Figure
INSERT as required.
3-166)
or
PLAN 3/8
FUEL PLAN
<FR KLAX
>
>
3
KLAX
KMDW
434
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
TO -----
GS
7. TO Waypoint - VERIFY
FLOW
(MAN)
1200
------
------
or INSERT as required.
LEG FUEL
FPL FUEL
NOTE: With FUEL PLAN A
selected the FUEL PLAN
leg automatically advances
to display DIRECT TO the
NAVIGATION Page TO
waypoint each time the
FUEL PLAN or TRIP PLAN
Page is accessed.
Figure 3-166
PLAN 3/8
FUEL PLAN
>
>
3
< FR KLAX
TO DAG
GS
KLAX
KMDW
425
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS
twice to display LEG and
FPL FUEL information.
(Figure 3-167).
FLOW
(MAN)
1200
324
LEG FUEL
FPL FUEL
4504
9. Groundspeed - VERIFY.
The current aircraft
groundspeed is dis-
played unless a manual
entry is made.
Figure 3-167
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
To Enter Manual Groundspeed:
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over GS value
field.
b. Groundspeed - INSERT.
c. ENT Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) will appear adjacent to the GS
field.
To Return To Automatic Groundspeed:
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over GS
value field.
b. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO? appears in the GS field to
inform pilot of the pending change and current GS is dis-
played under the cursor.
c. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
10. Fuel Flow - VERIFY. Current aircraft total fuel flow is displayed
unless a manual entry is made.
To Enter A Manual Fuel Flow:
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over FLOW
value field.
b. Fuel Flow - INSERT.
c. ENT Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) will appear adjacent to the
FLOW field.
To Return to Automatic Fuel Flow:
a. Line Select Key -DEPRESS to position cursor over FLOW
field.
b. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO? appears adjacent to the
FLOW field to inform pilot of the pending change and current
flow is displayed under cursor.
c. ENT Key- DEPRESS.
11. Data - CHECK. When DIRECT is displayed all data is continu-
ously updated. If data is not continuously updated, it will be recal-
culated each time:
a. The TRIP PLAN Page has changes in FR/TO leg or GS.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
b. The FUEL PLAN Page is selected.
c. Leg or GS change is made on the FUEL PLAN Page. LEG
FUEL and FPL FUEL are recalculated whenever the FLOW
changes.
d. FUEL FLOW is changed on FUEL STATUS Page.
NOTE: The REM @ field only appears when a DIRECT TO leg is
displayed. (Figure 3-169) The REM @ Field will be displayed in yel-
low anytime the REM @ value falls below the reserve fuel pro-
grammed on Plan Page 1.
12. To review the remainder of the Flight Plan: position cursor over
TO field, DEPRESS ENT Key TWICE to call up next leg.
(Groundspeed and/or Fuel Flow should be updated if necessary).
NOTE: Information between
any desired waypoints can
PLAN 3/8
>
FUEL PLAN
<FR KLAX
TO DAG
GS
KLAX
KMDW
be reviewed by selecting the
FUEL PLAN Page and
entering a FROM - TO leg
from the Flight Plan. (Figure
3-168) or by executing the
present position direct proce-
dures (Figure 3-169). If the
TO waypoint is not on the
selected Flight Plan, the
Flight Plan number and ori-
gin/destination fields will dis-
play dashes.
425
1200
324
>
FLOW
(MAN)
LEG FUEL
FPL FUEL
324
Figure 3-168
PLAN 2/8
>
>
FUEL PLAN
--
To update the Fuel Plan leg
to the current TO leg of the
Active Flight Plan:
DIRECT
TO COS
GS
----
----
<
457
1300
1679
1679
FLOW
a. Line Select Key -
DEPRESS to posi-
tion cursor over
FUEL PLAN field.
LEG FUEL
FPL FUEL
REM @ COS
5761
b. ENT the letter [A] in
the cursor.
Figure 3-169
c. ENT
Key
-
DEPRESS TWICE to display information in data fields.
The FUEL PLAN leg displays DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION
Page TO waypoint.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Selecting another display page (other than MSG and TRIP PLAN)
and returning to FUEL PLAN Page also updates the leg with
DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint.
VERIFYING OR CHANGING DATE AND TIME
DEPRESS the Plan Key until the DATE/GMT Page appears
DATE:
VERIFY or INSERT
Position cursor with Line Select Key and follow procedure in INITIAL-
IZATION PAGE section.
GMT:
VERIFY or INSERT
Position cursor with Line Select Key and follow procedure in INITIAL-
IZATION PAGE section.
NOTE: If GPS time is available, GMT is automatically updated to
GPS time. (Figure 3-170)
PLAN 5/8
TAKEOFF:
DATE
GMT
18 FEB 95
14:13
The GMT at weight-off-
wheels plus 10 seconds.
(Figure 3-170)
>
TAKEOFF
LAND
20:43
22:45
LAND:
FLIGHT TIME
02+02
The GMT at weight-on-
wheels. This field is not dis-
played until 10 seconds after
weight-on-wheels occurs.
(Figure 3-170)
Figure 3-170
NOTE: TAKEOFF and LAND data may be based on groundspeed
and/or TAS valids depending upon system configuration.
FLIGHT TIME:
The elapsed flight time is displayed in hours and minutes. (Figure 3-170)
NOTE: TAKEOFF and Flight times will be altered if the GMT is
changed during flight.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
VERIFYING OR CHANGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT PARAMETERS
This procedure allows the pilot to confirm or adjust basic operating
weight, payload, or fuel to current on board data.
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS to display AIRCRAFT WEIGHT Page
NOTE: BASIC OP WT, PAYLOAD, and FUEL ON BOARD fields will
be blinking if update has not been entered after system power up.
FUEL USED will remain dashes until auto fuel flow is detected.
2. Line Select Key
-
PLAN 6/8
DEPRESS to place the
cursor over flashing weight
field. (Figure 3-171)
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
BASIC OP WT
7400
400
>
>
>
3. BASIC OP WT - VERI-
PAYLOAD
FUEL ON BOARD
VERIFY INPUTS
FUEL USED
1600
FY or INSERT.
-------
----
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
GROSS WT
5. PAYLOAD - VERIFY or
INSERT.
Figure 3-171
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
7. FUEL ON BOARD -
PLAN 6/8
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
BASIC OP WT
VERIFY or INSERT.
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
7400
400
>
NOTE: VERIFY INPUTS
field disappears and a
GROSS WT value replaces
dashes, and weight fields no
longer blink. (Figure 3-172)
PAYLOAD
FUEL ON BOARD
1600
>
>
FUEL USED
GROSS WT
-------
9400
VERIFY FUEL message
replaces VERIFY INPUTS
message when MAN fuel
Figure 3-172
flow is being used and FUEL ON BOARD has not been verified or
updated on PLAN Page 1 or 6.
All blinking weight fields must be verified or values inserted using the
ENT Key, for GROSS WT field to display information.
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
RESETTING FUEL USED
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS to display aircraft weight page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to place the cursor over FUEL
USED. The field will display ZERO?. (Figure 3-172a)
NOTE: To leave the FUEL USED field without changing the value,
depress the line select key when the field displays ZERO?. The cur-
sor will be removed from the page.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to reset fuel used to zero.
PLAN 6/8
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
BASIC OP WT
PAYLOAD
7400
400
>
>
>
FUEL ON BOARD
1600
FUEL USED
GROSS WT
ZERO?
9400
Figure 3-172a
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
The following are various procedures that can be performed during
navigation, when applicable.
PILOT ENTED LEG CHANGE
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to select NAVIGATION Page 1. A pilot
entered leg change may be accomplished on any NAVIGATION
Page with a FR/TO field. However, NAVIGATION Page 1 is rec-
ommended to simplify a reasonability check of DIS and DTK.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the FR field.
3. FR Waypoint Identifier - INSERT or VERIFY.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS. If inserting a Waypoint Identifier not
found in the Active Flight Plan, or an offset waypoint, a Waypoint
Page appears. The following procedure should be performed:
If Waypoint Page Appears:
a. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY Database Waypoint
or INSERT Waypoint Data.
To Insert Waypoint Coordinates (cursor over POS Field):
(1) Latitude - INSERT (N or S first, then degrees, minutes,
and hundredths).
(2) ENT Key - DEPRESS.
(3) Longitude - INSERT (E or W first, then degrees, min-
utes, and hundredths).
b. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
5. If VERIFYING current FR
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
Waypoint - DEPRESS
ENT and cursor box
expands to enclose both
FR and TO Waypoint
Identifiers, which activates
the TO field.
FR HEMET
00:43
01:01
<TO CORLA
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
120.4
00:17.4
069
119
WIND
327/ 13
>
6. TO Waypoint Identifier -
INSERT or VERIFY.
(Figure 3-173)
-AUTO-
Figure 3-173
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
If Waypoint Page Appears:
a. Waypoint Page Co-
ordinates - VERIFY
Database Waypoint
or INSERT Waypoint
Data. (Figure 3-174)
DATABASE WPT
1/1
WAYPOINT CORLA
POS N 3338.30
W11616.70
To Insert Waypoint
Coordinates (cursor over
POS Field):
NDB-ENTER
(1) Latitude - IN-
SERT (N or S
first, then de-
grees, minutes,
and hundredths).
Figure 3-174
(2) ENT Key - DEPRESS.
(3) Longitude - IN-SERT (E or W first, then de-grees, min-
utes, tenths and hundredths).
b. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
8. DIS, DTK - CHECK.
NOTE: The Pilot Entered Leg Change procedure inserts a “fence”
indicated by (----) on the
ACTIVE FPL
1/2
DIRECT TO and ACTIVE
FPL pages preventing Auto
Leg Change beyond the TO
waypoint, if the TO waypoint
was not on the original
Active Flight Plan (Figure 3-
175) The MSG light illumi-
nates and the SYSTEM
MESSAGE Page displays
NO AUTO LEG CHG, how-
ever the AUTO field on
NAVIGATION Page 1 con-
tinues to display AUTO.
FR HEMET
7
<TO CORLA
------
00:20
-KDTW
8
KSNA
<
MUSEL
HEMET
<
>
DEPART
ARRIVE
ETA
>
>
<
APPROACH
ERASE
Figure 3-175
To jump the fence and continue with the flight plan use the d Key
then the Line Select Keys to position the cursor over a way point
beyond the fence then press ENT Key
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
PREVENTING AUTOMATIC LEG CHANGES
The Auto Leg change function allows the system to automatically
sequence from waypoint to waypoint on the Active Flight Plan. When
the system is initialized it is in the Automatic Leg Change Mode
unless changed by the pilot. The following procedure inhibits auto-
matic leg changes.
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over -AUTO-.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
Cursor field displays
FR HEMET
TO CORLA
00:43
01:01
MAN? to inform the pilot
of the pending change.
(Figure 3-176)
<
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
120.4
00:17.4
069
4. ENT Key - DE-PRESS.
The cursor disappears
and -MAN- remains in
the field confirming that
leg changes must be
made manually. NO
AUTO LEG CHG mes-
119
WIND
327/ 13
>
MAN?
Figure 3-176
sage appears on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page, however the
MSG light does not illuminate.
Returning to Automatic Leg Change Mode
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over -MAN-.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS. Cursor field displays AUTO? to inform
the pilot of the pending change.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The cursor disappears and -AUTO-
remains in the field confirming return to the Automatic Leg
Change Mode. NO AUTO LEG CHG message on the SYSTEM
MESSAGES Page disappears unless the current TO waypoint is
the last waypoint on the Active Flight Plan.
NOTE: Certain HDG Intercept and Pseudo VORTAC Procedures
automatically put the leg change mode into -MAN-. The pilot must
determine if -MAN- or -AUTO- is appropriate then select the desired
leg change mode.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
DEAD RECKONING (DR) TO PRIMARY NAVIGATION MODE -
VLF (RPU) ONLY EQUIPPED
NOTE: System automatically reverts to the Primary Navigation
Mode 30 seconds after the NAV RDY-VERIFY POSITION message
appears. VERIFY POSITION message and the MSG light remains
on. To verify position use Position Check and Update Procedure.
NAV RDY - VERIFY POSITION message only appears on the SYS-
TEM MESSAGES Page following a system DR.
POSITION CHECK AND UPDATE PROCEDURES
Using a Sensor
A position update may also be performed using any one of the navi-
gating interfaced position sensors as a reference. The following pro-
cedure describes this action:
POSITION FIX
1. HOLD Key -DEPRESS.
2. Line Select Key
-
POS N 40
W096
59.80
17.00
DEPRESS ONCE to
place the cursor over the
FIX field. The field will dis-
play FIX? (Figure 3-177)
>
>
IDENT
----
FIX ?
N 40
W096
S
59.80
17.00
0.00
<
DIF
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS
until the desired sensor
(preferably the GPS sen-
sor) to be used as the
update reference appears
in the cursor. The position
of each sensor will appear
sequentially along with the
DIF to the composite posi-
tion. (Figure 3-178)
E
0.00
Figure 3-177
POSITION FIX
POS N 40
W096
59.80
17.00
>
>
IDENT
----
GPS ?
N 40
W096
N
59.70
17.20
0.10
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The cursor will advance to
the DIF field displaying the
direction and distance in
degrees, minutes, and
hundredths of minutes
from the sensor position
to the composite position.
<
DIF
E
0.20
Figure 3-178
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS to update composite position to the selected
sensor. NAV Page 1 will be displayed.
Rev. 2
Apr/00
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Over Known Point
This procedure is used to cross check or update the system by over-
flying a known reference point such as a radio navaid or visual check
point.
1. HOLD Key - DEPRESS over known point.
2. Known Point - ENT using either:
Option 1: IDENT
or
Option 2: Coordinates for check points not in memory.
Option 1: IDENT
a. IDENT - INSERT.
b. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
c. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY.
d. ENT
Key
-
POSITION FIX
DEPRESS. The DIF
display shows the
direction and dis-
tance in degrees,
minutes and hun-
dredths of minutes
from the FIX position
to the composite
position. (Figure 3-
179)
POS N 40
W096
55.30
47.30
>
>
IDENT
N 40
W096
S
LNK
FIX
DIF
55.40
44.50
0.10
2.80
<
W
Figure 3-179
e. ENT
Key
-
DEPRESS if position
update is desired.
NAVIGATION Page
1 is displayed.
POSITION FIX
POS N 40
W096
55.30
47.30
>
>
Option 2: Coordinates
IDENT
N 40
W096
----
----
FIX
DIF
55.40
44.50
-----
-----
<
a. Line Select Key
(cursor over FIX
c o o r d i n a t e s ) .
(Figure 3-180)
----
Figure 3-180
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
b. Latitude - INSERT (N or S first, then degrees, minutes, and
hundredths).
c. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
d. Longitude - INSERT (E or W first, then degrees, minutes,
and hundredths).
e. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The DIF display shows the direction and distance in degrees,
minutes and hundredths of minutes from the FIX position to
the composite position.
f. ENT Key - DEPRESS if position update is desired. NAVI-
GATION Page 1 is displayed
NOTE: If coordinate field flashes after entry, verify coordinates and
depress ENT again.
If System Updated:
The VLF (RPU) sensor and the VPU interfaced to the updated CDU
are updated as well as the composite position, GPS, and IRS sen-
sors are not updated. Only IRS velocities are required to contribute to
the composite position.
If Update Not Desired:
3. NAV, PLAN, FPL, TUNE, VNAV, HDG, or d Key - DEPRESS
to cancel the position fix.
Using An Offset
This procedure is used to cross-check or update the system using an
offset from a known point such as VORTAC Radial and Distance.
Record Radial and Distance at the same time as performing Step 1.
NOTE: Overflying a predetermined radial and distance is not neces-
sary.
1. HOLD Key - DEPRESS.
2. Offset Waypoint IDENT - INSERT.
NOTE: If necessary, refer to the procedure for Creating An Offset
Waypoint.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
4. Recorded Radial - INSERT.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
6. Recorded Distance - INSERT (NM and tenths).
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
8. Waypoint Coordinates -
OFFSET WPT 1/1
VERIFY for reasonabili-
ty. (Figure 3-181)
WAYPOINT
LNK*
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The DIF display shows
the direction and dis-
tance in degrees, min-
utes, and hundredths of
minutes from the FIX
position to the composite
position. (Figure 3-182)
RAD
DIS
230.0
>
15.0
47.30
POSN 40
W097
01.20
<
OK? ENTER
Figure 3-181
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS, if
position update desired.
POSITION FIX
If System Updated :
POS N 40
W097
49.30
03.20
The VLF (RPU) sensor and
the VPU interfaced to the
updated CDU are updated
as well as the composite
position. GPS, and IRS sen-
sors are not updated. Only
IRS velocities are required to
contribute to the composite
position.
>
>
IDENT
N 40
W097
N
LNK*
47.70
01.50
1.60
FIX
DIF
<
W
1.70
Figure 3-182
If Update Not Desired:
11. NAV, PLAN, FPL, TUNE, VNAV, HDG, or d Key - DEPRESS
to cancel the position fix.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
PARALLEL COURSE
This procedure is used to establish an offset course (steering refer-
ence) parallel to the current leg. This field is inactive when in
APPROACH ARMED mode (within 30 nm of the destination airport).
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION 2/4 Page with
SXTK.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over SXTK field.
3. L or R Key - DEPRESS.
4. Offset Distance - INSERT (NM and tenths). The maximum value
that can be entered is 99.9 NM.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS. XTK deviation remains referenced to the
original track. However the HSI will display a centered needle
when the SXTK has been captured. BRG, DIS, ETE remain ref-
erenced to the current TO waypoint.
NOTE: If the system is coupled to the autopilot, the roll command
will turn the aircraft to intercept the parallel course at the selected
SXTK distance.
If XTK is greater than 12.5NM, VNAV will become INVALID and no
vertical deviation information will be displayed.
Canceling Parallel Course
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to
NAVIGATION 2/4
<
FR TBC
TO FMN
15:41
16:00
display page with SXTK.
<
2. Line Select Key
DEPRESS to position
cursor over SXTK field .
-
WIND % 11
8 &
18:59
1377
008
ETE
- KDTW
FUEL - KDTW
TKE
R
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
The cursor field will dis-
play CANCEL? to
inform the pilot of the
XTK
SXTK
ENRTE
L 5.00
CANCEL?
>
pending
(Figure 3-183).
change.
Figure 3-183
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The steering reference will be to the orig-
inal desired track.
NOTE: Any Leg Change (manual or automatic) including DIRECT
TO will also cancel selected crosstrack (SXTK).
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
MANUAL MAGNETIC VARIATION ENTRY
A manual magnetic variation entry is required north of 70° N latitude
and south of 60°S latitude.
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION 3/4 Page with VAR.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over VAR field.
3. Local Variation - INSERT (E or W first).
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) will be annunciated adjacent to
the VAR field.
RETURNING TO AUTOMATIC VARIATION
This checklist must be accomplished to return to Automatic Variation
following a Manual Variation entry.
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display page with VAR.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over VAR field.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO? will appear in the VAR field to
inform the pilot of pending change. The automatic variation
value will appear in the cursor.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
SELECTING ETE, ETA, DIS, OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION (Active
Flight Plan Page)
The pilot can view the estimated time enroute, the estimated time of
arrival, the distance, or altitude constraints of waypoints on the Active
Flight Plan.
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to
ACTIVE FPL
FR RW19R
TO ORD
1/1
display ACTIVE FPL
Page.
1
2
3
4
-----
-----
-----
<
<
AZO
KDTW
######
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor over ETE, ETA,
DIS, or ALT field.
(Figure 3-184)
<
<
>
>
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETE?
ERASE
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS
to display desired option.
Figure 3-184
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to select option. (Figure 3-185)
NOTE: To display numbers
when the DIS option is
selected, a Flight Plan must
ACTIVE FPL
1/1
FR RW19R
1
2
3
4
TO ORD
00:42
00:16
01:11
<
<
be selected and a leg
defined. To display numbers
when the ETE or ETA option
is selected, a valid ground
speed is required. Altitude
constraints and waypoint off-
sets are only displayed if
programmed.
AZO
KDTW
######
<
<
>
>
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
ETE
ERASE
Figure 3-185
SELECTING NAV PAGE
ETA OR ALT DISPLAY
OPTION (NAV Page 1, 2,
or 3)
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
<
DIRECT
23:03
05:22
TO BDF
>
The pilot can view the esti-
mated time of arrival or alti-
tude constraint of TO way-
point on the NAV Pages.
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
1328.5
18:59
049
>
>
228
WIND
230/ 8
-AUTO-
Selecting ALT Display:
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to
display the NAVIGA-
TION Page.
Figure 3-186
NAVIGATION 1/4
DIRECT
2. Line Select Key
-
<
23:03
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the ETA
field. (Figure 3-186)
<TO BDF
12000G
>
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
1328.5
05:46.3
049
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
ALT? appears in cursor.
>
>
228
WIND
230/ 8
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
-AUTO-
display
Altitude
Constraint. (Figure 3-
187)
Figure 3-187
NOTE: Altitude constraint and waypoint offset are only displayed if a
VNAV Waypoint is programmed at the TO Waypoint and VNAV is
valid. The altitude cannot be changed on these pages. The ALT dis-
play should always be selected during SID, STAR, or Approach pro-
cedures.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
To Return to ETA:
5. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the alti-
tude constraint field.
6. BACK Key - DEPRESS. ETA? appears in cursor.
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS to display ETA.
INITIALIZATION ENROUTE VLF (RPU) ONLY
This procedure allows the pilot to initialize the system in flight when
only VLF is available. If the aircraft has lost power for more than 7
seconds refer to Special Procedure, Loss of Power In-Flight, for ini-
tialization procedure.
POWER ON: (Five minutes minimum prior to reaching known point.)
1. ON Key - DEPRESS.
2. BRT Key - ADJUST as required.
3. DATE and GMT - VERIFY. If DATE or GMT is incorrect it may
be updated as described in the INITIALIZATION Page proce-
dures.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to place the cursor over POS field.
5. POS Coordinates - VERIFY displayed.
NOTE: POS coordinate accuracy is not critical on this step as an
update will follow.
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
7. Manual TAS - INSERT (if required). If necessary refer to the pro-
cedure for Manual TAS Entry under Special Procedures.
Enter Primary Navigation Mode: (Prior to reaching known point)
NOTE: This step is automatic with weight-off-wheels or at 150 knots
Auto-TAS.
8. NAV RDY MSG - VERIFY. If the system enters the Primary
Navigation Mode automatically, VERIFY POSITION is displayed
on the SYSTEM MESSAGE Page, and Step 9 and 10 are not
required.
9. HOLD Key - DEPRESS.
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS TWICE
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Position Update:
A position update must be performed to give the system an accurate
starting position. An update may be accomplished over a known
point or by using an offset. If necessary, refer to the procedure for
Position Check and Update.
11. HOLD Key - DEPRESS over known point.
12. IDENT or Known Point Coordinates - ENT.
If Waypoint Page appears:
a. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY or INSERT.
b. ENT Key- DEPRESS.
13. DIF - CHECK. Since the system was initialized in-flight using an
approximate position, the DIF check is not used to determine the
suitability of an update, but is used to check for reasonability or
manual entry errors.
14. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Enter the following information as required:
• Active Flight Plan
• Initial Leg
• Manual Magnetic Variation (only for latitudes north of 70N and
south of 60S)
MANUAL TAS ENTRY
only VLF is available
NOTE: Manual TAS cannot be entered if a valid TAS is present from
the Airdata Computer.
If the system is using an unaided VLF/OMEGA sensor (no heading,
TAS or IRS velocities available) manual TAS entry is required when
fewer than three stations are received. MAN TAS REQD message
appears on the SYSTEM MESSAGE Page.
TAS must be manually entered if the aircraft does not have an auto-
TAS system or the auto-TAS input has failed. If TAS is entered man-
ually, no wind will be displayed. If the auto-TAS input returns, it will
override the manual entry.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
To Enter Manual TAS:
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display page with TAS.
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to place the
cursor over TAS field.
NAVIGATION 3/4
FR ABQ
<
01:09
01:57
TO PGS
<
3. TAS - INSERT in knots.
DRIFT
VAR
TAS
HDG
BRG
TK
R 002
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
(MAN) will appear adja-
cent to the TAS field.
(Figure 3-188)
>
>
E
12
420
269
219
267
(MAN)
NOTE: Maximum manual
TAS value that can be
entered is 850 knots.
Figure 3-188
MANUAL HEADING ENTRY
only if IRS or VLF is available
A manual heading entry will be possible only if the system is using a
VLF/OMEGA sensor with H-field antenna and the automatic heading
input has failed. If the automatic heading input returns it will override
the manual entry without operator action.
If the manual heading is required a “MAN HDG REQD” message will
appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.
To Enter A Manual Heading:
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display page with HDG.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to place the cursor over HDG field.
3. HDG - INSERT.
NAVIGATION 3/4
<
FR ABQ
01:09
01:57
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
(MAN) will appear adja-
cent to the HDG field.
(Figure 3-189)
<TO PGS
DRIFT
VAR
TAS
HDG
BRG
TK
R 002
>
>
E
12
420
269
219
267
(MAN)
NOTE: SYSTEM
MES-
SAGES Page will display
USING MAN HDG message.
Figure 3-189
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
VLF/OMEGA STATION DESELECTION
The following procedure allows a VLF Communication or Omega sta-
tion to be removed from an RPU’s navigation solution.
NOTE: This procedure should be used with caution since stations are
automatically deselected by the computer if unsuitable for navigation.
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to
NAVIGATION 4/4
display NAVIGATION
Page 4.
IDENT ------
>
2. Line Select Key
-
POS N 33 43.33
W116 54.37
>
>
>
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over VLF sen-
sor field. (Figure 3-190)
VLF ? 0.1
VPU
0.0
0.1
<
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
IRS
0.2
GPS
4. NAV or NXT Key -
DEPRESS to sequence
through VLF SUBSEC-
TION. Select either VLF
Comm or Omega Station
List Page. (Figure 3-191)
Figure 3-190
VLF
SUBSECTION
3/4
WSH
AUS
ANT
MNE
HAW
99
--
+
<
<
TOO FAR
5. Line Select Key
-
--
-
DEPRESS to position
cursor over station iden-
tifier to be deselected.
(Figure 3-191)
99
73
76
35
99
+
UNSTABLE
<JPN
SPARE
PTR
+
+
<
ANN
6. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
(Figure 3-192) DESE-
LECT? will appear to
inform the pilot of the
pending change.
Figure 3-191
VLF
SUBSECTION
3/4
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
WSH
99
--
+
<
DESELECT station.
AUS
TOO FAR
ANT
--
-
<
To restore a deselected
station:
MNE
HAW
99
73
76
35
99
+
DESELECT?
<JPN
SPARE
a. Line Select Key -
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the sta-
tion identifier to be
restored.
PTR
+
+
<
ANN
Figure 3-192
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
b. BACK Key - DEPRESS. RESTORE? will appear to inform the
pilot of the pending change.
c. ENT Key - DEPRESS to restore the station.
SENSOR DESELECTION
The deselection of a position sensor on NAVIGATION Page 4 com-
pletely eliminates the sensor’s contribution to the composite (blended)
position. This is only recommended if the pilot can determine which
position keeping sensor is inaccurate or by flying over a known location
and then comparing the sensor position against the known position.
To Deselect a Sensor:
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 4 is displayed.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over sensor to
be deselected.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
NAVIGATION 4/4
OUT? will appear to
inform the pilot of the
pending change. (Figure
IDENT ------
>
3-193)
POS N 33 43.33
>
W116 54.37
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
VLF ? OUT? VPU
0.0
0.1
>
>
<
“OUT” will remain in the
sensor field and “DESE-
IRS
0.2
GPS
LECTED”
appears
beside the corresponding
sensor on the SENSOR
MESSAGES Page.
Figure 3-193
To Restore a Sensor:
a. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 4.
b. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over sensor to
be restored.
c. BACK Key - DEPRESS. IN? appears to inform the pilot of
the pending change.
d. ENT Key - DEPRESS to restore the sensor.
NOTE: If GPS is deselected, the remaining sensor radial error fields
will turn from yellow to green, indicating that those sensors are now
contributing to the composite position. Under normal circumstances,
the GPS is the sole contributor to the composite position. The IRS
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
contributes to GPS accuracy by providing GPS with velocity aiding. It
will always be displayed in green.
EXTERNAL WAYPOINT ACCEPTANCE
Up to 99 external waypoints may be accepted from an interfaced
radar or EFIS system.
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
When a waypoint is generat-
DIRECT
22:36
22:42
ed from this equipment, a
DIRECT TO leg change is
made to that waypoint.
<TO EX#03
DIS
ETE
DTK
GS
17.9
00:04.3
070
The generated waypoint will
be designated EX#01 to
EX#99. (Figure 3-194)
>
>
---
WIND
---/---
-AUTO-
As the External Waypoint
(EX#) is off the Flight Plan it
will be separated from the
Active Flight Plan waypoint
sequence by a fence - - - - -.
“NO AUTO LEG CHG” mes-
sage will appear on the SYS-
TEM MESSAGES Page.
The following procedure may
be used to link the EX# way-
point into the Flight Plan
sequence.
Figure 3-194
DIRECT
1/2
<
<
<
>
>
>
TO EX#03
-----
KSNA
MUSEL
HEMET
TRM
PUB
HLC
PWE
LMN
BURKK
BDF
<
<
EED*
TBC
GSH
KDTW
*****
FMN
d
1.
Key - DEPRESS.
The display will show
Direct To the EX# way-
point with the waypoints
of the Active Flight Plan
listed below. (Figure 3-
195).
Figure 3-195
DIRECT
1/2
<
<
>
>
>
EX#03
-----
KSNA
MUSEL
HEMET
TRM
PUB
HLC
PWE
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the way-
point to follow the EX#
waypoint. (Figure 3-196)
TO LMN
<
<
<
BURKK
BDF
EED*
TBC
GSH
KDTW
*****
FMN
3. EX# Waypoint Identifier -
INSERT.
Figure 3-196
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
NOTE: The EX# waypoint identifier will flash if an unassigned num-
ber is entered. EX# waypoint coordinates can ONLY be assigned by
an external source (radar or EFIS).
5. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY.
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
DIRECT
EX#03
1/2
<
<
>
>
>
7. Waypoint Sequence -
VERIFY. (Figure 3-197)
PUB
HLC
PWE
-----
KSNA
MUSEL
HEMET
TRM
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
CDU display will automat-
ically advance to NAVI-
GATION Page 1. “NO
AUTO LEG CHG” mes-
sage will be removed
from the SYSTEM MES-
SAGES Page.
TO EX#03
BURKK
BDF
<
<
<
EED*
TBC
GSH
KDTW
FMN
*****
Figure 3-197
PRESENT POSITION AS A WAYPOINT
A special waypoint location is reserved for storing present position
coordinates as a waypoint. The identifier for this waypoint is inserted
as “#1.” As well, the identifier may be used as a parent identifier for
an offset waypoint by adding an asterisk (“*”).
Waypoint #1 is redefined each time the HOLD Key is depressed. An
example of the application of waypoint #1 is to store the coordinates of
a point overflown to which you may wish to return. This is accom-
plished by depressing the HOLD Key directly over that desired point.
In this case these coordinates would be stored under identifier “#1”
until either the HOLD Key is depressed again, updating #1, or the
system is shut down.
NOTE: Since waypoint #1 is frequently redefined, it is not retained in
non-volatile memory and the identifier #1 cannot be entered on a
stored flight plan. However, the coordinates of WPT #1 can be
stored on a Flight Plan by making them part of a pilot entered way-
point. See page 3-127 for creating pilot entered waypoints. It does,
however, use up one of the 999 available waypoints, as do #OFF, #0
and EX (external) Waypoints.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NAVIGATION AT EXTREME LATITUDES (North of 70° N or
South of 60° S)
CAUTION: THE PROCEDURES LISTED IN THIS SECTION CON-
TAIN INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION OF THE GNS-Xl AT
SPECIFIED LATITUDES BEYOND THE AUTO-COMPUTED MAG-
NETIC VARIATION MODEL. IN ALL CASES THE FLIGHT CREW
OF ANY AIRCRAFT OPERATING AT THESE LATITUDES MUST
CONSULT THE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT IN ORDER TO
OBTAIN SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY.
Manual Magnetic Variation Entry
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display until NAVIGATION Page 3 is
displayed.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR value
field.
3. Local Variation - INSERT (E or W first).
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) will be annunciated adjacent to
the VAR field.
Returning To Automatic Variation
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 3 is displayed.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR value
field.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO? will be displayed to advise the
pilot of the impending change.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
NOTE: Insertion of E or W followed by ENT will also revert the sys-
tem to Auto Variation.
TRUE HEADING
Aircraft Equipped With TRUE/MAG Switch
1. TRUE/MAG Switch - Place in TRUE position.
NOTE: Once the TRUE/MAG Switch is placed in the TRUE position
T is displayed adjacent to BRG, HDG and TK since they are now ref-
erenced to true north.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Aircraft Not Equipped With A TRUE/MAG Switch
NOTE: This procedure must be accompanied by the input of TRUE
heading into the system.
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 3 appears.
2. LINE SELECT Key - DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR
field.
3. INSERT E0.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
NOTE: The Variation is now E0 and the system will be referenced to
TRUE north. There will be no T annunciation adjacent to BRG, HDG
and TK.
SET HEADING ENTRY
When an IRS is placed in the
Attitude Mode the message
NAVIGATION 3/4
<
ENTR SET HDG appears on
FR ABQ
01:09
01:57
<TO PGS
the SENSOR MESSAGES
Page. It is necessary to
enter a set heading in order
to allow the IRS to output
valid magnetic heading data.
DRIFT
VAR
TAS
HDG
BRG
TK
R 002
>
>
E
12
420
---
219
267
To Enter A Set Heading:
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS
until NAVIGATION Page
3 is displayed. The
heading field may
appear as dashes.
(Figure 3-198)
Figure 3-198
NAVIGATION 3/4
FR ABQ
<
01:09
01:57
<TO PGS
2. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS to place the
cursor over HDG field.
The last valid heading
value appears. (Figure
3-199)
DRIFT
VAR
TAS
HDG
BRG
TK
R 002
>
>
E
12
420
269
219
267
3. HDG - VERIFY or INSERT.
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS
Figure 3-199
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: In some cases, (MAN) will appear in the HDG field and the
SYSTEM MESSAGES Page will display USING MAN HDG mes-
sage.
LOSS OF POWER IN FLIGHT
THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE USED IN A REMOTE
AREA WHERE NAVAIDS ARE UNAVAILABLE AND THERE IS
REASON TO BELIEVE THE SENSORS CONTRIBUTING TO THE
COMPOSITE POSITION MAY BE IN ERROR.
The procedure allows the pilot to initialize enroute when the aircraft
has sustained a loss of power for more than 7 seconds. The Power
Off Waypoint, “#OFF”, provides a snapshot of system data at the
moment power was lost.
To Initialize when power is restored:
NOTE: When power returns, system performs Self Test and displays
the INITIALIZATION Page.
1. DATE and GMT - VERIFY
POSITION FIX
or ENT current DATE and
GMT if required.
POS N 4055.30
W09547.30
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
place the cursor over the
POS field, if required.
>
IDENT
#OFF
---------
---------
---------
---------
FIX
DIF
<
>
NOTE: The coordinates are
a rolling display of the real
time blended position of the
sensors being updated.
Figure 3-200
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
accept real time position.
SPECIAL WPT
4. HOLD Key - DEPRESS.
WAYPOINT
#OFF
5. Power Off Waypoint
IDENT - INSERT “#OFF”.
(Figure 3-200).
POSN 3837.20
W10537.00
GMT OFF
21:50
00.6
060
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
MINUTES OFF
LAST TK
7. MINUTES OFF, LAST
TK, LAST GS - VERIFY
and RECORD for future
use. (Figure 3-201).
LAST GS
407
Figure 3-201
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
8. BACK Key - DEPRESS to return to HOLD Page.
NOTE: An Offset Waypoint (#OFF*) can be input with a radial based
on the LAST TK value and distance calculated from the LAST GS
value as well as the time elapsed from power off, provided significant
changes to aircraft track or groundspeed have not been made. If the
aircraft has turned or if the speed has changed, the pilot should esti-
mate the track and distance traveled since the loss of power.
9. Offset Waypoint IDENT - INSERT.
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
OFFSET WPT 1/1
11. Recorded or Estimated
WAYPOINT
#OFF*
Radial - INSERT LAST
TK value or averaged
value. (Figure 3-202)
RAD
DIS
060.0
>
-----
POS --------
12. Distance - INSERT cal-
culated distance in NM
and tenths.
--------
818 WPTS AVAIL
13. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Figure 3-202
14. Waypoint Coordinates -
VERIFY for reasonability.
15. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
16. DIF - CHECK
If Update Desired:
17. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The VLF (RPU) sensor and the VPU
interfaced to the updated CDU are updated as well as the com-
posite position.
If Update Not Desired:
18. NAV, PLAN, FPL, TUNE, VNAV, HDG, or d Key - DEPRESS
to cancel the HOLD.
CREATING/CHANGING PILOT ENTED
(PERSONALIZED) WAYPOINTS
A personalized waypoint may be created by entering a non-NDB
(Nav Data Base) waypoint identifier and inserting the desired position
coordinates on the Waypoint Page.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
The CDU has non-volatile storage for up to 999 waypoints which are
retained in memory ONLY if the waypoints are entered on a Stored
Flight Plan. The ICAO identifiers stored in the database can not be
used for personalized waypoints.
Attempting to enter more than 999 pilot entered waypoints in memory
causes MEM FULL to be displayed on the FLIGHT PLAN Page.
The message light will flash and WPT MEM FULL will be displayed
on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.
Select the desired Flight Plan and position the cursor over the
desired field. If necessary, refer to the procedure for Creating a Flight
Plan or Modifying a Flight Plan.
Creating Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints:
1. Personalized IDENT- INSERT.
2. ENT Key- DEPRESS.
PILOT ENTERED WPT
(Figure 3-203)
WAYPOINT
GLOBAL
3. Latitude- INSERT (N or S
first, then degrees, min-
utes, and hundredths).
POS
--------
--------
>
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
5. Longitude- INSERT (E
or W first, degrees, then
minutes, and hun-
dredths).
944 WPTS AVAIL
Figure 3-203
6. ENT Key- DEPRESS. The display will change to the appropriate
FLIGHT PLAN or DIRECT Page.
Changing Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints:
1. Personalized IDENT- INSERT.
2. ENT Key- DEPRESS. PILOT ENTED WPT Page will appear.
3. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over POS field.
4. Repeat Steps 4 - 6 above.
NOTE: If an offset waypoint from a pilot entered waypoint is pro-
grammed, the RAD and DIS can be changed, but the coordinates
cannot be manually inserted.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
CREATING AN OFFSET WAYPOINT
This procedure enables the system to create a waypoint at a given
radial and distance from a known point. The known point (parent
waypoint) may be any stored personalized or database waypoint.
An offset waypoint may be inserted in any Waypoint IDENT field.
The offset waypoint is retained in memory after system shutdown
ONLY if entered on a Stored Flight Plan.
Position the cursor over the desired waypoint IDENT field.
NOTE: The offset waypoint uses station declination, if available, or it
uses the calculated magnetic variation of the parent waypoint. All
waypoints defined by a VHF Navaid in the National/International
Airspace System are based on the VHF Navaid station declination.
Since the magnetic variation and station declination may not be the
same at a given Navaid, the calculated position and the defined
FMS position may differ.
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
<
1. Parent Waypoint IDENT-
KDAL
CHAD*
KHART
19DFW
ELD
- CMK
INSERT with an * follow-
ing the entry. (Figure 3-
204)
<
<
MEI
NOTE: More than one offset
waypoint is allowed from one
parent, using *, *1, *A1, etc.,
as identifying notation.
>
>
<
<
DEPART
ARRIVE
APPROACH
XFILL
SELECT
ERASE
Figure 3-204
2. ENT Key-DEPRESS.
NOTE: If field blinks, Parent Waypoint does not exist in CDU memo-
ry or in database and must be defined on a Flight Plan Page.
3. Desired Radial- INSERT. The degrees can be entered as whole
numbers and the .0 will be loaded automatically. i.e. type 77,
077.0 will be displayed. If a of a degree is desired, all 4 digits
must be entered. 0775 will be displayed as 077.5, 3001 will be
displayed as 300.1 etc.
4. ENT Key-DEPRESS.
5. Desired Distance-INSERT (NM and tenths, 1999.9 NM maxi-
mum).
6. ENT Key-DEPRESS.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
7. POS Coordinates- VER-
IFY for reasonability.
(Figure 3-205)
OFFSET WPT 1/1
WAYPOINT
CHAD*
8. ENT Key-DEPRESS.
RAD
DIS
030.0
>
12.3
NOTE: An Offset Waypoint
is used in the same manner
as any other waypoint.
POS N 3837.20
W10537.00
818 WPTS AVAIL
Figure 3-205
PERFORMING FDE PREDICTION FOR
OCEANIC/REMOTE OPERATION
This procedure must be performed prior to departure for a flight plan
involving Oceanic/Remote operation where GPS is to be the sole
source of navigation. The maximum segment length for which FDE
prediction can be calculated is 25 hours at a ground speed of 100
Kts.
PLAN 7/8
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS
FDE
to display PLAN 7/8
FDE Page. See Figure
3-206
DEPART DT
DEPART GMT
20 DEC 95
--:--
<
<
<
<
ROUTE SPACING
EXPECTED GS
START FDE WPT
END FDE WPT
EXCLUDE SATS
--
---
2. Line Select Key
-
-----
-----
(QTY 0)
DEPRESS if necessary
to place the cursor over
the DEPART DT field.
Enter the departure date
for which FDE prediction
is desired.
PREDICTION UNAVAIL
Figure 3-206
NOTE: The date entered
may be up to six months
either side of the current
date.
PLAN 7/8
FDE
DEPART DT
DEPART GMT
25 DEC 95
13:00
<
<
<
<
ROUTE SPACING
EXPECTED GS
START FDE WPT
END FDE WPT
EXCLUDE SATS
35
300
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
JFK
4. Enter the departure time
for which FDE prediction
desired.
EBBR
(QTY 0)
START CALC? ENTER
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Figure 3-207
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
6. Enter the desired route spacing in nautical miles. 60NM is nor-
mal.
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
8. Enter the expected ground speed in knots. A value of 100 to 999
Kts may be entered.
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
10. Enter the starting waypoint of the active flight plan leg for which
FDE prediction is being calculated. Pressing the BACK Key will
cycle through the waypoints on the active flight plan. Dashes are
displayed prior to the last waypoint on the flight plan. Pressing
ENT while the dashes are displayed will clear the start and end
waypoints, resulting in an undefined Oceanic/Remote segment.
11. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
12. Enter the ending waypoint of the active flight plan leg for which
FDE prediction is being calculated. The BACK and dashes oper-
ate the same here as in the previous step.
13. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
14. If no satellites are to be excluded from the FDE prediction,
DEPRESS the lower right Line Select Key and proceed to Step
20. If specific satellites are to be excluded from the FDE predic-
tion, go to Step 15.
15. ENT Key - DEPRESS to display the FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1
Page. See Figure 3-208
16. Line Select Key
-
FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1
EXCLUDED SATS LIST
DEPRESS to position
the cursor in the SAT #
field.
<
<
17. Enter the satellite num-
ber to be excluded.
SAT #--
18. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The satellite number is now
displayed in the EXCLUDED
SATS LIST field.
OK? ENTER
Figure 3-208
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
NOTE: Entering a number
already listed and pressing
ENT will remove the number
from the list. Pressing the
Line Select Key next to
CLEAR ALL and pressing
ENT will remove all satellites
from the exclusion list.
FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1
EXCLUDED SATS LIST
12 14 02 16 19 22 07
<
<
SAT #02
CLEAR ALL
19. ENT Key - DEPRESS
when all desired satellites
are entered. PLAN 7/8 FDE
Page will again be displayed.
OK? ENTER
Figure 3-209
20. START CALC? ENT is
displayed at the bottom of
the screen. See Figure 3-
210
PLAN 7/8
FDE
DEPART DT
DEPART GMT
25 DEC 95
13:00
<
<
<
<
ROUTE SPACING
EXPECTED GS
START FDE WPT
END FDE WPT
EXCLUDE SATS
35
300
JFK
EBBR
(QTY 0)
START CALC? ENTER
Figure 3-210
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
21. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTA-
TION Page is now displayed.
COMPUTING - STANDBY
will flash while FDE predic-
tion is being calculated and
the percentage completed
will be shown. When the
prediction calculation is com-
plete, an FDE and NAV
AVAILABLE or UNAVAIL-
ABLE message will be dis-
played as shown in Figures
3-212 and 3-213.
PLAN 8/8
FDE COMPUTATION
COMPUTING - STANDBY
51" COMPLETE
CANCEL COMPUTE
<
Figure 3-211
PLAN 8/8
FDE COMPUTATION
FDE AVAILABLE
NAV AVAILABLE
GPS PRIMARY MEANS
NAV OK
Figure 3-212
PLAN 8/8
FDE COMPUTATION
FDE UNAVAILABLE
NAV UNAVAILABLE
GPS PRIMARY MEANS
NAV NOT ALLOWED
Figure 3-213
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
3-134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VHF/OMEGA Transmitter sites
SECTION 4
VLF/OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES
VLF COMMUNICATIONS STATIONS
LETTER
DESIGNATION
WASHINGTON
USA
(WSH)
Jim Creek, Washington
AUSTRALIA
ANTHORNE
MAINE
(AUS)
(ANT)
(MNE)
(HAW)
(GBR)
or
Northwest Cape, Australia
Anthorne, England
Cutler, Maine USA
Lualualei, Hawaii USA
Rugby, England
HAWAII
GREAT BRITAIN
PUERTO RICO
ANNAPOLIS
(PTR)
(ANN)
Puerto Rico
Annapolis, Maryland USA
OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK
LETTER
DESIGNATION
NORWAY
(NOR)
(LIB)
Aldra, Norway
LIBERIA
Liberia, Africa
HAWAII
(HAW)
(DAK)
(REN)
Haiku, Hawaii USA
NORTH DAKOTA
LA REUNION
LaMoure, North Dakota USA
Reunion Island, Indian Ocean
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VHF/OMEGA Transmitter sites
OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK (CONTINUED)
ARGENTINA
AUSTRALIA
JAPAN
(ARG)
(AUS)
(JPN)
Gulfo Nuevo, Argentina
Darriman, Australia
Tsushima, Japan
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Database Update
SECTION 5
DATABASE UPDATE
DATA BASE UPDATE PROCEDURES
1. Apply aircraft power.
2. Open the hinged door located at the top of the CDU.
3. Insert current Data Base Update card firmly into the slot. The
double row of holes on
the forward edge of the
DATA BASE UPDATE
card must be inserted
TYPE:WW
CARD:1/1
3-95
REVISION:
EXPIRES:
first, with the write pro-
tect slot toward the right
edge of the card. Insert
the card at the same
level as the eject button
located at the right edge
of the slot.
13 MAR 95
ENTER CHOICE:
1 BEGIN UPDATE
<
<
2 RESTART NAV
(REMOVE CARD)
4. ON Key - DEPRESS to
turn on system. Figure
5-1 appears.
Figure 5-1
TO UPDATE
CAUTION: IF AN INTERRUPTION OF THE UPDATE PROCESS IS
DESIRED, REMOVE THE UPDATE DISK. DO NOT TURN OFF
POWER TO STOP THE UPDATE.
5. Line Select or 1 Key - DEPRESS to select BEGIN UPDATE, if
required. If update is not
desired, depress the
Line Select or 2 Key to
select restart NAV.
DATA BASE UPDATE
TYPE:WW
CARD:1/1
3-95
REVISION:
EXPIRES:
13 MAR 95
6. With cursor over option
1, ENT Key - DEPRESS.
The Update - Data Base
Page and, the message
“X” % “COMPLETE”
appear indicating the
update is in progress.
(Figure 5-2)
<
<
2% COMPLETE
Figure 5-2
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Database Update
WHEN UPDATE IS COMPLETE
If the update is successful,
Figure 5-3 is displayed.
UPDATE COMPLETE
8. Turn system OFF or
DEPRESS ENT Key to
restart navigation.
PRESS ENTER
TO
RESTART NAV
IF UPDATE FAILS
If the database update fails,
Figure 5-4 is displayed.
Figure 5-3
Depress the 1 Key then
ENT Key to retry the update
or use the following proce-
dure. Sometimes when a
retry is initiated, a display
such as that shown in Figure
5-5 may be seen momentari-
ly.
DATA BASE UPDATE
ERROR: FAILED
ENTER CHOICE:
1 BEGIN UPDATE
<
<
1. Update
REMOVE.
Card
-
2 RESTART NAV
(REMOVE CARD)
2. Turn system OFF.
3. Update Card - RE-
INSERT into CDU.
Figure 5-4
4. Turn system ON and
retry Update using
DATA BASE UPDATE
ERROR: CARD INVALID
UPDATE
PROCE-
DURE, Steps 1-7.
ENTER CHOICE:
1 RETRY UPDATE
<
<
2 RESTART NAV
(REMOVE CARD)
Figure 5-5
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Abbreviations & Definitions
SECTION 6
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
DEFINITION
A
AT or ABOVE (Ref. to VNAV Altitude Constraint)
Air Data Computer
ADC
ADF
AFIS
AFM
AHRS
ALT
Automatic Direction Finder
Airborne Flight Information System
Aircraft Flight Manual
Attitude Heading Reference System
Altitude
APRCH
AR
Approach
DME Arc
ARINC
ARP
ASU
ATC
AUTO
AZ
Aeronautical Radio, Inc.
Airport Reference Point
Antenna Switching Unit
Air Traffic Control
Automatic
Satellite Azimuth Relative to Aircraft Position
B
AT or BELOW (Ref. VNAV Altitude Constraint)
Barometric Altitude
Baro
BASIC OP WT
BRG
Basic Operating Weight
Bearing to Waypoint
BRT
Bright
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Abbreviations & Definitions
DEFINITION
CDI
Course Deviation Indicator
CDU
Control Display Unit
Channel
CH
CLIMB GRAD
Current Aircraft Climb Performance in feet per
Nautical Mile
CRUISE ALT
Cruise Altitude
Æ
Direct To (Laterally)
Database
DB
DEF
DIF
DIR
DIS
DME
DN
Default
Difference
Direct
Distance
Distance Measuring Equipment
Down
DTK
Desired Track
EFIS
EL
Electronic Flight Instrument System
Satellite Elevation Above the Horizon
Elevation
ELEV
ENRTE
Enroute
EST CROSSING Estimated Crossing Altitude
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time of Arrival at Destination
Estimated Time Enroute
Expires
ETA @
ETE
EXP
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Abbreviations & Definitions
DEFINITION
FCF
FL
Final Course (Alignment) Fix.
Flight Level
FAF
FDE
Final Approach Fix
Fault Detection and Exclusion. Detection mean-
ing the capability of the system to detect a satel-
lite failure that will affect navigation. Exclusion
meaning the capability of the system to exclude
one or more failed satellites from the prediction
solution, thus, preventing a satellite failure from
affecting navigation.
FMS
Flight Management System - includes CDU and
optional RPU
FPA
FPL
FPM
FR
Flight Path Angle
Flight Plan
Feet per minute
From Waypoint
Frequency
FREQ
FT
feet
G
Glide path (Ref. to VNAV Altitude Constraint)
Greenwich Mean Time
GMT
GPS
GS
Global Positioning System
Groundspeed
HDG
HDOP
HLTH
HP
Heading
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
Satellite Health (Good or Bad)
Holding Pattern
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Abbreviations & Definitions
DEFINITION
HPE
Horizontal Position Error (A Quality Factor for
the GPS.)
HSI
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Initial Approach Fix
IAF
ICAO
IDENT
ILS
International Civil Aviation Organization
Identifier
Instrument Landing System
INBOUND CRS
Inbound Holding or Procedure Turn course
Inertial Navigation System
INS
IRS
Inertial Reference System
Jeppesen
Name of Navigation Database Source
KEY
KG
CDU Keyboard Entry
Kilogram/Kilograms
Kilohertz
kHz
LAT
Latitude
LB
Pound/Pounds
Leg Distance
Longitude
LEG DIST
LON
MAG
Magnetic
MAG VAR
MAN ALT
Magnetic VariationMAN
Manual Altitude
Manual Entry
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Abbreviations & Definitions
DEFINITION
MAP
MHz
MSG
Missed Approach Point
Megahertz
Message
NAV
Navigation
NAVAID
Navigation Aid (Typically a Radio Station
Providing VOR and/or DME Position Data)
NDB
NAV Database or Non-Directional Beacon
NM
Nautical Miles
Notice to Airman
Next Waypoint
Next
NOTAM
NX
NXT
OM
Outer Marker
POS
Position (Present or Waypoint)
Preselect Altitude
PRESEL ALT
#PRESL
PREV or PRV
PRN
Preselected Altitude Profile Point
Previous
Pseudo Random Noise (GPS Satellite Number)
Procedure Turn
PT
RAD
Radial
RAIM
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Abbreviations & Definitions
DEFINITION
REM
Remaining
REQ FPM
RCVD
RMI
Required Feet Per Minute
Received
Radio Magnetic Indicator
RNAV
Area Navigation or type of Non Precision
Approach
RNG
RPU
Range
Receiver Processor Unit (Contains the VLF
Omega)
RW
Runway
SAT
SID
Satellite (PRN) Number
Standard Instrument Departure
Software MOD Level
SM
SNR
STAR
SXTK
Signal to Noise Ratio
Standard Terminal Arrival
Selected Crosstrack
T
True ( Heading or Track) or whether a Satellite
is being tracked or not.
TACAN
TAS
TACtical Air Navigation
True Airspeed
TK
Track Angle
TKE
Track Error
#TOC
#TOD
Top of Climb Profile Point
Top of Descent Profile Point
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System
Oct/96
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Abbreviations & Definitions
DEFINITION
TRANS LEVEL
Transition Level (The Altitude at which Altitudes
Become Flight Levels)
TRCK
Track (Satellite Status)
Terminal
TRMNL
VAR
Magnetic Variation
VERT DEV
VHF
Vertical Deviation
Very High Frequency
Very Low Frequency
Vertical Navigation
VLF
VNAV
VOR
VHF Omnirange
VORTAC
VPU
VHF Omnidirectional Range TACAN
VORTAC Position Unit
Waypoint
WPT
A Point Defined in Space Used in Navigation
Waypoint
WW
NDB Worldwide Coverage
XPDR
XTK
Transponder
Crosstrack
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Abbreviations & Definitions
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 7
AFIS
AIRBORNE FLIGHT INFORMATION SYSTEM
AND
SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
This section applies only to aircraft equipped with an AFIS system.
The purpose of this section is to acquaint users of AFIS Flight Plan
and Weather Advisory Services with the equipment, its capabilities,
and its operation. AFIS services are ADVISORY only, as they con-
tain elements provided by the National Weather Service and informa-
tion supplied by the pilot. Therefore, it is the responsibility of the pilot
in command to exercise reasonable and prudent judgment in the use
of these ADVISORY services.
Rev. 0
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
Oct/96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DESCRIPTION
AFIS is an Airborne Flight Information System that provides integrat-
ed flight planning and performance management interfaces to the
GNS-XL Nav Management System.
These interfaces consist of three major capabilities:
1. Access to ground based Global Data Center computers from a
Personal Computer for the purpose of generating or retrieving per-
formance optimized flight plans and current aviation weather;
2. Digital transfer of AFIS Flight Plan and weather data into the Nav
Management System for display and performance monitoring on
the GNS-XL Color CDU; and
3. Air/ground computer link interfacing the GNS-XL Nav
Management System to the ground based Global Data Center
computers for the purpose of providing enroute flight plan, weath-
er, performance updates, requesting pre-departure clearance,
and sending or receiving messages.
AFIS interfaces with ARINC, SITA and AVICOM VHF networks and
the Inmarsat satellite network to provide a communication link
between the aircraft and the Global Data Center. ARINC provides
coverage within the continental United States, Hawaii, Alaska, the
Aleutians, Guam, Saipan, Mexico, Puerto Rico, and parts of Canada;
SITA covers Europe, the South Pacific, Southeast Asia, the
Caribbean, and South and Central America and AVICOM covers
Japan. In most areas while using the VHF networks, data link cover-
age is excellent above Flight Level 200, but deteriorates below this
flight level. Satellite data link coverage is excellent both on the ground
and in-flight between 70° North and 70° South.
Many variables, including the amount of processing time and the
length of the message, effect the turnaround time for information.
Depending on the nature of the update request, the pilot should
expect a turnaround time of approximately five minutes when using
the VHF network and twelve minutes when using the satellite net-
work.
AFIS consists of the following components: Global Data Center
(GDC), Data Transfer Unit (DTU), Data Management Unit (DMU),
and Antenna Switching Unit (ASU).
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLOBAL DATA CENTER (GDC)
The Global Data Center (GDC) is a ground based computer facility
built and operated by Honeywell for the purpose of providing flight
planning, aviation weather, and message forwarding services to AFIS
operators on a subscription basis. The GDC communicates with the
operator via data quality telephone lines to a Personal Computer as
well as through the ACARS and satellite networks directly to the air-
craft in flight.
DATA TRANSFER UNIT (DTU)
The Data Transfer Unit (DTU) is a 3.5 inch micro floppy disk drive
mounted in the cockpit. Once the GNS-XL is switched on and the
disk inserted in the DTU, the AFIS Flight Plan and weather data are
transferred to and stored in the Data Management Unit.
DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (DMU)
The Data Management Unit (DMU) computer formats the disk infor-
mation and presents it to the GNS-XL for display on the CDU.
The DMU also incorporates a data quality VHF transceiver. This
radio is tuned automatically by the DMU computer to the appropriate
ground station for the purpose of transmitting data to and receiving
data from the Global Data Center while in flight.
ANTENNA SWITCHING UNIT (ASU)
The Antenna Switching Unit (ASU) is required for those installations
where the DMU transceiver shares an existing VHF communications
antenna. The ASU switches the transmit side of the antenna
between the DMU data transmitter and the VHF voice transmitter.
During power up, the ASU defaults to the voice transmitter, if AFIS is
configured for a shared antenna. Pressing the AFIS annunciator on
the instrument panel switches the transmit side of the antenna to the
DMU data transmitter. Pressing the annunciator again, or pressing
the "push to talk" button on the VHF communications radio switches
the transmit side of the antenna back to the voice transmitter.
If AFIS is configured for non-shared antenna or there is no configura-
tion module, during power up the system will assume an antenna is
dedicated to AFIS.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Satellite Data Communications System consists of the following
components: Satellite Communications Unit (SCU), High Power
Amplifier/ Low Noise Amplifier (HPA/LNA), and Satellite Antenna.
SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS UNIT (SCU)
The Satellite Communications Unit (SCU) incorporates the satellite
transceiver and instruction for transmitting to and receiving data from
the satellite network. The SCU also contains information to allow it to
tune the appropriate satellite operating region automatically and to
the appropriate ground stations.
HIGH POWER AMPLIFIER/ LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER (HPA/LNA)
The High Power Amplifier/ Low Noise Amplifier (HPA/LNA) amplifies
transmitted and received information while minimizing noise.
SATELLITE ANTENNA
The antenna is designed to meet the Inmarsat system specification.
PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST PAGE
If the GNS-XL is configured for AFIS, this page appears directly after
the Initialization Page. The DTU reads the inserted disk and displays
one of the following messages:
NO AFIS FLT PLANS ON
DISK: There are no AFIS Flight
Plans stored on the disk.
AFIS
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4
(Figure 7-1)
NO DISK: Either no disk was
inserted into the DTU prior to
NO AFIS FLT PLANS
ON DISK
power up or the DTU cannot
read the disk.
READING DISK: The DTU is
transferring data from the disk
to the DMU.
Figure 7-1
AIRCRAFT TYPE: The Global designated aircraft type as trans-
ferred from the disk or obtained by an Update or Recall procedure.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: Once the system is initialized, the page appears between the
Active Flight Plan Page and the first GNS-XL FLIGHT PLAN LIST
Page.
AFIS FLT PLAN LIST: A list of
AFIS generated Flight Plan ori-
AFIS
gin/destination identifiers with
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4
date of issue. (Figure 7-2)
<
KABE-KVNY
KAPA-KTEB
KBUR-KLGA
KBZN-KLAN
KDAL-KDEN
KDAL-KJFK
04JAN9O
04JAN90
04JAN90
04JAN90
04JAN90
04JAN90
NOTE: Additional pages can
be accessed when more than 6
Flight Plans are listed by
DEPRESSING the FPL Key to
access page.
<
<
<
LOADING FLIGHT PLAN:
The system is loading a select-
ed AFIS Flight Plan.
Figure 7-2
REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?: Allows a selected AFIS Flight Plan to
replace an existing Active Flight Plan.
UPDA-XXXX: (Where XXXX is an ident) Indicates a Flight Plan
Update for an active Flight Plan has occurred.
FLIGHT PLAN PROGRESS (NAVIGATION PAGE 5)
HEC:KVNY: Current FROM
and TO waypoints. (Figure 7-
NAVIGATION 5/5
3) The FROM waypoint can be
<
replaced by DIR TO for
DIRECT TO.
HEC:KVNY
FL390
ACT
PLAN
2150
625
F REM
FF P/E
ETA
3380
0
FL: AFIS planned flight level
for leg being flown.
00:06
460
18:52
460
TAS
NOTE: Field is dashes when
aircraft is projected to be climb-
ing or descending.
GS
448
460
WIND 330/ 40
360/ 0
Figure 7-3
PLAN: Planned
This column is AFIS planned data either transferred from the disk or
received via the data link.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: Planned fields become
dashes when no planned data
is available for the current leg.
NAVIGATION 5/5
DIR TO:PSB
<
FL390
ACT
PLAN
------
----
(Figure 7-4).
F REM
FF P/E
ETA
11952
0
ACT: Actual
-----
---
05:26
300
TAS
This column is GNS-XL data.
GS
---
300
NOTE: Actual fields become
dashes when cursor is posi-
tioned over the leg identifiers.
Figure 7-4
(Figure 7-5).
F REM: Fuel Remaining
NAVIGATION 5/5
HEC:KVNY
<
Planned: AFIS planned fuel
remaining at aircraft present
position based on DMU inter-
polated values.
FL390
ACT
PLAN
375
F REQ
FF P/E
ETE
------
----
-----
---
625
0+16
460
Actual: The total fuel on board
as calculated by the GNS-XL.
TAS
GS
448
---
NOTE: Field changes to F
REQ when cursor is positioned
over the leg identifiers
Figure 7-5
F REQ: Fuel Required
Planned: The AFIS planned fuel required to fly the leg displayed.
FF P/E: Fuel Flow per Engine
Planned: AFIS planned fuel flow per engine for leg displayed.
Actual: Total actual fuel flow divided by the number of engines. This
is an averaged quantity.
ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival
Planned: The sum of the AFIS planned time enroute for the leg dis-
played and the actual time of arrival over the previous waypoint.
Actual: The estimated time of arrival over TO waypoint based on
current groundspeed.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: Field changes to ETE
when cursor is positioned over
the leg identifiers. (Figure 7-6)
NAVIGATION 5/5
PGS:HEC
<
FL390
ACT
ETE: Estimated Time Enroute
PLAN
624
F REQ
FF P/E
ETE
------
----
Planned: The AFIS planned
time enroute for leg displayed.
619
0+20
457
-----
---
TAS
GS
452
---
TAS: True Airspeed
WIND 340/ 39
---/---
Planned: AFIS planned true air-
speed for leg displayed.
Figure 7-6
Actual: Actual true airspeed of
aircraft. The TAS value shown is the same as on NAVIGATION
Page 3.
GS: Groundspeed
Planned: AFIS planned groundspeed for leg displayed.
Actual: Actual groundspeed of the aircraft as calculated by the GNS-
XL. The GS value shown is the same as on NAVIGATION Page 1.
WIND:
Planned: AFIS forecast wind for leg displayed. Direction is displayed
relative to True North with velocity in knots.
Actual: Actual wind for leg as computed by the system. Direction is
displayed relative to True North with velocity in knots.
AFIS MENU PAGE
AFIS FLT PLAN: Review of
the AFIS Flight Plan displaying:
AFIS MENU
•
•
Fuel and time requirements
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMENTS
<
Weights, flight level, and
route
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
•
•
Operator inputs used in
generating Flight Plan
Performance bias entered
by operator
Figure 7-7
SIGMETS: Review of all SIG-
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
METS(SIGnificant METeorology) transferred via the disk and/or
received via the data link.
TERMINAL WX: Review of all Terminal Weather transferred via the
disk and/or received via the data link. Additional requests can be
entered.
WINDS ALOFT: Review of all Winds Aloft identifiers transferred via
the disk and/or received via the data link. Additional requests can be
entered.
RECALL AFIS FPL: Allows operator to recall a previously accessed
flight plan and associated weather from the Global Data Center via
the data link.
SEND AFIS MSG: Allows operator to send non-flight related text
messages via the satellite data link and flight related text messages
via the satellite or VHF data link.
DISPL AFIS MSG: Allows operator to display flight related mes-
sages received via the data link.
OPERATING MODES: Allows operator to select operating mode for:
•
•
•
•
•
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK (ARINC, SITA/AVICOM) and if applicable,
SAT (satellite) NETWORK.
PRINTER CTRL
AFIS FLT PLAN PAGES
The AFIS Flight Plan Pages are
accessed by selecting Option 1
on the AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4
FUEL
TIME
FR KSNA
TO KJFK
HOLDING
TO ----
RESERVE
AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 1
8806
-----
-----
2000
4+30
-----
-----
1+03
FUEL AND TIME REQUIRE-
MENTS
FR: The origin airport identifier.
(Figure 7-8) When there is an
enroute update to the flight plan,
the identifier will change to
UPDATE.
TOTALS
10806
5+33
Figure 7-8
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UPDATE refers to the Lat/Lon
position of aircraft at time of last
update request. (Figure 7-9).
AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4
FUEL
TIME
FR UPDA
TO KJFK
HOLDING
TO ----
RESERVE
TO: The TO waypoint identifier.
6400
-----
-----
5563
4+04
-----
-----
2+32
TO/FUEL: Projected fuel
required from FROM waypoint
to TO waypoint as transferred
from disk or updated enroute via
the data link.
TOTALS
11963
6+36
TO/TIME: The estimated time
enroute in hours and minutes
Figure 7-9
from the FROM waypoint to the TO waypoint as transferred from the
disk or updated through the data link.
HOLDING/FUEL: Projected fuel required for Holding Time as trans-
ferred from disk or received via the data link.
HOLDING/TIME: The holding time in hours and minutes as trans-
ferred from disk or received via the data link.
TO/FUEL: Projected fuel required from TO waypoint to alternate air-
port as transferred from disk or received via the data link.
TO/TIME: The estimated time enroute in hours and minutes from TO
waypoint to alternate airport as transferred from disk or received via
the data link.
RESERVE FUEL: Projected reserve fuel at TO waypoint as trans-
ferred from the disk or received via the data link.
RESERVE TIME: Projected flight time remaining at TO waypoint to
consume the displayed RESERVE FUEL.
TOTALS: Sum of planned enroute and reserve fuel and sum of
planned enroute and reserve time.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 2
AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4
WEIGHTS, FLIGHT LEVEL
AND ROUTE
RAMP WT
FPL LDWT
FLT LVL
30365
21559
410/450
ROUTE
RAMP WT: Planned ramp
weight in lbs prior to starting
engines as transferred from disk
or received via the data link.
(Figure 7-10)
KSNA-HEC-PGS-DBL-
CYS-J148-ONL-J94-
DBQ-GIJ-J554-CRL-
PSB-KJFK
GROSS WT: Sum of basic
operating weight, payload, and
fuel remaining as calculated by
GNS-XL. (Figure 7-11)
Figure 7-10
AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4
NOTE: RAMP WT changes to
GROSS WT if there is an auto-
matic FUEL FLOW input, FUEL
REMAINING quantity, and
input for basic operating weight
and PAYLOAD input.
RAMP WT
FPL LDWT
FLT LVL
30365
21559
410/450
ROUTE
KSNA-HEC-PGS-DBL-
CYS-J148-ONL-J94-
DBQ-GIJ-J554-CRL-
PSB-KJFK
FPL LDWT: Flight planned
landing weight of aircraft at des-
tination as transferred from disk
or received via the data link.
Figure 7-11
FLT LVL: Planned flight
level(s) as transferred from disk or received via the data link.
ROUTE: Planned route of flight as computed by Global Data Center
and transferred from disk or received via the data link.
NOTE: Pressing the AFIS or NXT Key displays the remainder of the
route (up to 50 waypoints).
UPDATE: Waypoint identifier defining position of aircraft at time of
last update request.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 3
OPERATOR INPUTS
FROM: Origin airport identifier as transferred from disk or received
via the data link, or UPDATE
waypoint defining position of air-
craft at time of last update
AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4
request. (Figure 7-12)
FROM
KSNA
KJFK
22:00
18959
600
TO
TO: Destination waypoint trans-
ferred from disk or received via
the data link.
DEP TIME
BASIC OP WT
PAYLOAD
RAMP FUEL
RESERVE FUEL
PERF OPTION M80
10806
2000
/ F
DEP TIME: Estimated time of
departure in GMT. This field
changes to UPDATE TIME
when a flight plan is updated
and indicates time of issued
update. (Figure 7-13)
Figure 7-12
BASIC OP WT: AFIS planned
basic operating weight as trans-
ferred from disk or received via
the data link.
AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4
FROM
UPDA
KJFK
22:03
18959
1200
11963
5563
M80
TO
UPDATE TIME
BASIC OP WT
PAYLOAD
PAYLOAD: AFIS planned pay-
load weight as transferred from
disk or received via data link.
RAMP FUEL
RESERVE FUEL
PERF OPTION
RAMP FUEL: AFIS planned
total trip fuel as transferred from
disk or received via data link.
This field changes to UPDATE
FUEL when a flight plan is
Figure 7-13
updated and refers to the actual fuel remaining at time of last update
request.
FPL RES FUEL: AFIS planned reserve fuel remaining at destination
as transferred from disk or received via the data link. This field
changes to RESERVE FUEL when a flight plan is updated and refers
to the updated estimate of fuel remaining at destination.
PERF OPTION: AFIS planned cruise mode as transferred from disk
or received via the data link. Alternate cruise mode options may be
requested and updated via the data link.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 4
PERFORMANCE BIAS
This page allows a review of the
operator entered performance
bias data transferred from disk
or received via the data link.
(Figure 7-14)
AFIS FLT PLAN 4/4
MIN FLT LVL
---
---
MAX FLT LVL
HOLD TIME
-----
----
--
ALTERNATE
CLIMB F/T 100
ARRIV F/T 100
SIGMETS PAGES
5
AFIS SIGMETS pages are
accessed by selecting Option 2
on the AFIS MENU Page.
This page allows a review of all
SIGMETS transferred from disk
or received via the airborne data
link. SIGMETS may consist of
one or more pages of text and
display their FAA code names
followed by text.
Figure 7-14
AFIS SIGMETS 1/7
<
FR KSNA
TO KJFK
CONVECTIVE SIGMET
51C
DATE: Issue date of SIGMET.
This field may be blank if trans-
ferred from disk.
VALID UNTIL 1955Z
MO
FROM 40S IRK-50WSW
SGF
NOTE: Date field will remain
blank if no date is supplied on
disk or by UPDATE.
Figure 7-15
FR: Desired start VOR, airport,
waypoint, Lat/Lon, VORTAC
ident, or NAT (North Atlantic
Tracks). (Figure 7-15 or 7-16)
AFIS SIGMETS 1/29
<
FR NAT
TO
NOTE: Parentheses remain
until a SIGMET update is
received via the data link.
NAT TRACKS FLS 310
370 INCLUSIVE APRIL
01/1130Z TO APRIL
01/1900Z
TO: Desired end VOR, airport,
waypoint, Lat/Lon or VORTAC
ident. No entry is required if FR
is NAT.
A 63/30 63/40 63/50
Figure 7-16
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANSMIT REQUEST?: When cursor is on this field and ENT is
pressed, a SIGMET update request is sent to the Global Data Center
via data link. DATA LINK DISABLED will appear if the data link is
disabled and the request will not be transmitted.
NOTE: This field only appears
when the FR or TO fields are in
AFIS SIGMETS 1/1
<
parentheses.
FR KSNA
NO SIGMETS
TO KMIA
If no SIGMETS are on disk, the
message NO SIGMETS ON
DISK appears. If there are no
SIGMETS via a Flight Plan
update the message reads NO
SIGMETS.
(Figure 7-17)
Figure 7-17
TERMINAL WEATHER PAGES
The TERMINAL WEATHER Menu Page is accessed by selecting
Option 3 on the AFIS MENU Page.
Terminal identifiers for which associated weather data is available to
review are listed. The identifiers in parentheses represent pilot
entered requests for additional weather not stored in the DMU. The
parentheses disappear when weather updates have been received
via the data link.
TRANSMIT
REQUEST?:
AFIS TERMINAL WX
When cursor is on this field and
ENT is pressed, a weather
update request is sent to the
Global Data Center via data
link. (Figure 7-18)
<
>
(KSNA)
(KSTL)
(KMKC)
(KENO)
(KDQO)
<
<
<
>
>
>
DATA LINK DISABLED:
Aircraft equipped with the
Antenna Switching Unit must
DEPRESS momentary AFIS
annunciator to enable the air to
ground data link. VHF or satel-
lite network must also be enabled.
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
Figure 7-18
Rev. 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TERMINAL WX DATA PAGES
These pages are accessed by
selecting a terminal weather
identifier on the TERMINAL
WEATHER Menu Page.
TERMINAL WEATHER 1/3
KSNA
SA: 1846 -X 200 SCT
6H 71/61/2015/990/H3
They allow review of Terminal
Weather by identifier as trans-
ferred from disk or received by
the Global Data Center via the
data link.
FT: 071919 -X 250
SCT 1912. 03Z C200
BKN. 13Z MVFR H..
NOTAMS: !SNA 01/004
DATE: Issue date of actual
weather. This field may be blank
if transferred from disk.
Figure 7-19
Weather available for review includes:
•
•
•
•
SA (Sequence Reports)
FT (Terminal Forecasts)
NOTAMS (Notices to Airmen)
PIREPS (Pilot Reports)
WINDS ALOFT PAGES
The AFIS WINDS ALOFT
Menu Page is accessed by
selecting Option 4 on the AFIS
MENU Page.
AFIS WINDS ALOFT
<
>
(SNA )
(STL )
(MKC )
(ENO )
(DQO )
<
<
<
>
>
>
The WIND identifiers represent
VOR, airport, waypoint, Lat/Lon
or VORTAC locations, for
which associated weather data
is available.
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
WINDS ALOFT DATA PAGES
Figure 7-20
These pages are accessed by
selecting a wind identifier on the WINDS ALOFT MENU page.
They allow review of Winds Aloft data by VOR, airport, waypoint,
Lat/Lon or VORTAC identifier as transferred from disk or received via
the data link.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DATE/TIME: Actual day and time of the issue of the wind informa-
tion. This field may be blank if transferred from disk. The number is
read 12th day 2356 ZULU.
(Figure 7-21)
WINDS ALOFT
SNA
122356Z
Wind data available to review
includes:
18000 000/
24000 320/
30000 290/
34000 260/
39000 270/
1
-9
2 -21
4 -36
6 -46
9 -55
•
•
•
•
Flight Level
Wind Direction (True North)
Wind Velocity (Knots)
45000 280/ 13 -63
Temperature (Degrees
Celsius)
Figure 7-21
RECALL AFIS FPL PAGE
This page is accessed by
selecting Option 5 on the AFIS
MENU Page.
RECALL AFIS FPL
FPL-# D8751
<
DATE
ETD
FR
This page allows the pilot to
recall previously computed
AFIS Flight Plan and Weather
requests from the Global Data
Center via the data link.
TO
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
FPL-#: A Global Data Center
generated Flight Plan number.
Entered as an alpha character
followed by four numeric digits.
If FPL# is entered, other entries
are not required. (Figure 7-22)
Figure 7-22
RECALL AFIS FPL
DATE: Issue date of recalled
AFIS Flight Plan.
FPL-#
<
DATE29MAY91
ETD
FR
12:00
KSNA
KLAX
ETD: Estimated time of depar-
ture in GMT of recalled AFIS
Flight Plan .
TO
FR: Origin of recalled AFIS
Flight Plan.
Figure 7-23
TO: Destination of recalled
AFIS Flight Plan. (Figure 7-23)
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANSMIT REQUEST?: When cursor is on this field and ENT is
pressed, the recall request is sent to the Global Data Center via data
link. (Figure 7-22)
DATA LINK DISABLED: Aircraft equipped with the Antenna
Switching Unit, must DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to
enable the air to ground data link. VHF or satellite network must also
be enabled.
SEND AFIS MESSAGE PAGE
This page is accessed by selecting Option 6 on the AFIS MENU
Page.
↑ ↓ indicate that pressing the Line Select Key adjacent the arrow will
move the cursor in the direction of the arrow.
PPM: Preprogrammed messages that can be stored in non-volatile
memory, selected and sent without being re-entered.
TO: Receiver of message.
FROM: Sender's identification (name or tail number).
#: Receiver's address. See Table A-1 for possible address varia-
tions and the method in which the Global Data Center processes the
message.
MESSAGE TEXT: Fifteen lines of text entry available. Text must be
flight related when using the VHF network operating mode.
SEND MESSAGE: When cur-
sor is over this field and ENT is
pressed the message is sent via
the data link. (Figure 7-24)
SEND AFIS MSG
TO: GLOBAL
FR: N214SC
$
%
>
PPM
#:FAX 752 0604
DATA LINK DISABLED:
Aircraft equipped with the
Antenna Switching Unit, must
DEPRESS momentary AFIS
annunciator to enable the air to
ground data link. VHF or satel-
lite network must also be
enabled.
DELAYED DUE TO WX
NEW ETA IS 1400Z
<
>
SEND MESSAGE?
Figure 7-24
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Phone number
#206 869 6450
#N4322B
•
GDC will deliver message verbally to given number.
AFIS-equipped aircraft
•
GDC will deliver message to aircraft specified.
"A" followed by phone number
#A206 869 6458
#AI4118106530
•
GDC will deliver message to PC at given number.
"AI" followed by Country Code, City Code, and phone number
•
GDC will deliver message to PC located outside the
US or Canada.
"F" followed by phone number
#F206 869 6464
#FI4118108708
•
GDC will deliver message to FAX machine at given number
"FI" followed by Country Code, City Code and phone number
•
GDC will deliver message FAX machine located
outside the US or Canada.
"A" followed by ARINC or SITA address
GDC will deliver message to ARINC or SITA address given.
#AHDQGLXH
#GWSOPS
•
Auto Forward Code
GDC will deliver message to PC, FAX, or ARINC/SITA
as defined in GDC database.
•
GDC Code
#GWSPJC
•
GDC will search database for phone number and special
contact name or message associated with code and
deliver message verbally.
ADCUS XXX
GDC will search database for customs phone number
at specified airport and deliver message verbally.
#ADCUS TEB
#PDC LAX
•
PDC XXX
GDC will search database for pre-departure clearance
and forward to aircraft if found.
•
Global Defined Codes
•
BASEOPS International
#BASEOPS or
#BOPS
•
•
Air Routing International
Universal Weather
#ARC
#UNIVERSAL or
#UV or #UVAIR
#JETPLAN or
#DATAPLAN
or #JEPPESEN
#MEDLINK
•
Jeppesen Data Plan
•
Medlink
GDC
•
#GDC
Message will be printed at GDC further action.
AFIS Addresses
Table 1
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PPM MENU PAGE (PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGES)
This page is accessed from the
SEND MESSAGE Page by
PPM MENU
selecting PPM in the upper right
hand corner.
<
1 SNA-PRC STD MSG
PPM can only be selected when
an entry has been made in the
TO or # fields on the SEND
MESSAGE Page. The TO,
2 PRC-SNA STD MSG
<
3 MSG MECH
4
<
5
6
<
FROM, and # data are used
when sending
a
prepro-
grammed message.
Figure 7-25
Titles for up to six prepro-
grammed messages can be list-
ed for selection to review,
change, and send.
PREPROGRAMMED MES-
SAGE PAGES
PREPROGRAMMED MSG
NEW ETA MKC****
These pages display the mes-
sage text for each prepro-
grammed message title select-
ed from the PPM MENU Page.
Up to seven lines of text may be
NEW ETA IS 1300 MKC
HAVE A GOOD DAY
<
entered.
Preprogrammed
<
>
Messages will remain in non-
volatile memory and can be
removed by editing the title on
the PREPROGRAMMED MSG
Menu Page.
SEND MESSAGE?
Figure 7-26
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY AFIS MSG PAGE
The message page is displayed
by selecting Option 7 on the
AFIS MENU Page.
DISPLAY AFIS MSG 3/7
7-JUN-90 20:00Z
FR:OFFICE
All text messages sent to the tail
number of the aircraft being
flown appear in this section. Up
to 15 pages of text can be
stored according to time
received, with the newest mes-
sage appearing first. Messages
can originate from:
TO:CAPTAIN
PLEASE CALL HOME
ASAP.
7-JUN-90 20:04Z
FR:222
TO:111
Figure 7-27
•
•
•
Another AFIS equipped aircraft,
third party, or
Global Data Center.
OPERATING MODES PAGE (FOR AFIS USERS EQUIPPED
WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM)
Operating modes information is accessed by selecting option 8 on
the AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
AUTO REPORT:
ON:
The aircraft will auto-
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
OFF
ON
matically report position and
station ID for weather updates
to the Global Data Center via
the data link on a timed basis.
ON
ON
OFF: The automatic reporting
capability has been manually
inhibited by the pilot.
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-28
AUTO WX UPDT (WEATHER
UPDATE):
ON:
The Global Data Center will automatically send weather/wind
updates for the displayed idents when new information is issued.
OFF: The auto weather update function is not enabled.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VHF NETWORK:
Ground networks that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link
with the Global Data Center.
ON:
The appropriate VHF network will automatically be selected
whenever the aircraft present position is within the specified bound-
aries. (Figure 7-28)
OFF: Network is not enabled.
SAT NETWORK:
Satellite network that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link with
the Global Data Center.
ON:
The appropriate satellite region will automatically be selected
whenever the aircraft present position is within the specified bound-
aries.
OFF: Network is not enabled.
PRINTER CTRL:
Allows access to the Printer Control Page.
ACTIVE LINK:
Indicates the network in service,
i.e. ARINC, SITA or SATCOM.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
(Figure 7-29)
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
OFF
ON
NONE: All networks are turned
OFF or current position does
not correspond with the manual-
ly selected boundaries.
>
>
OFF
ON
NOTE: The VHF network has
precedence over the satellite
network in areas of shared cov-
erage and must be turned OFF
ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM
Figure 7-29
in order for SATCOM to be the Active Link. AUTO REPORT, AUTO
WX UPDT and OPERATING MODE selection status are stored in
non-volatile memory. If the operator turns to OFF the operator must
reselect to turn ON.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VHF LINK CONTROL PAGE
This page is accessed when the
VHF Network is turned ON.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
VHF LINK CONTROL
ARINC,
SITA/AVICOM:
>
>
Ground networks that AFIS
interfaces with to establish a
data link with the Global Data
Center.
ARINC
SITA/AVICOM
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO: The VHF network will
automatically be selected when-
ever the aircraft present position
is within the appropriate bound-
aries. (Figure 7-30)
Figure 7-30
MAN (manual): The desired network will be maintained independent
of the present position. In manual, the system will only allow trans-
mission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries.
All other networks will be turned OFF if one is in MAN.
OFF: Network is not enabled.
SAT LINK CONTROL PAGE
This page is accessed when the SAT Network is turned ON.
SAT COMM:
AUTO: The satellite network will automatically be selected whenever
the aircraft present position is within the appropriate boundaries and
VHF Network is turned OFF or is not in VHF coverage.
MAN (manual): The desired region will be maintained independent
of the present position. In manual, the system will only allow trans-
mission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries
and VHF network is turned OFF or is not in VHF coverage.
OFF: Network is not enabled.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REGION: The four satellite
regions, West Atlantic, East
Atlantic, Pacific Ocean and
Indian Ocean, that AFIS inter-
faces with to establish a data
link with the Global Data Center.
(Figure 7-31)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
$ SAT LINK CONTROL
%
SAT COM: MAN
REGION: E. ATLANTIC
LINK:OPERATIONAL
LINK:
OPERATIONAL: Message indi-
cating the SAT COMM link is
enabled.
Figure 7-31
NONE: Current position does
not correspond with the manual-
ly selected boundaries or satel-
lite link is not operational.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
SAT LINK CONTROL
SAT COM: MAN
ACTIVATE?: Use to enable
satellite network in AUTO or
MAN. (Figure 7-32)
REGION: W. ATLANTIC
LINK:ACTIVATE?
Figure 7-32
OPERATING MODES PAGE (FOR AFIS USERS NOT EQUIPPED
WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM)
Operating Modes information is accessed by selecting Option 8 on
the AFIS MENU Page.
AUTO REPORT:
ON:
The aircraft will automatically report position and station ID
for weather updates to the Global Data Center via the data link on a
timed basis.
OFF: The automatic reporting capability has been manually inhibit-
ed by the pilot.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO WX UPDT (WEATHER UPDATE):
ON: The Global Data Center
will automatically send weath-
er/wind updates for the dis-
played idents when new infor-
mation is issued.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
ON
ON
OFF: The auto weather
update function is not enabled.
AUTO
OFF
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
ARINC, SITA, AVICOM:
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Ground networks that AFIS
interfaces with to establish a
data link with the Global Data
Center.
Figure 7-33
AUTO: The desired network will automatically be selected whenever
the aircraft present position is within the appropriate boundaries.
MAN (manual): The desired network will be maintained independent
of the present position. In manual, the system will only allow trans-
mission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries.
OFF: Network is not enabled.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
NOTE: If a ground network is
placed in manual mode, all oth-
ers will go to OFF.
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
OFF
ON
>
>
OFF
AUTO
PRINTER CTRL:
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
Allows access to the Printer
Control Page.
ACTIVE LINK: NONE
ACTIVE LINK:
Figure 7-34
Indicates the network in service,
i.e. ARINC, SITA, AVICOM, or AIR CA (Air Canada).
NONE: All networks are turned OFF or current position does not cor-
respond with the selected mode.
NOTE: AUTO REPORT, AUTO WX UPDT and OPERATING
MODE selection status are stored in non-volatile memory. If the
operator turns to OFF or MAN, the operator must reselect to turn ON.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE (FOR AFIS FLIGHT PLAN
UPDATING)
AFIS UPDATE: Allows pilot to:
•
Amend an existing AFIS
Flight Plan
ACTIVE FPL
KSEA
1/1
- KLAX
<
<
<
<
ELMAA
HQM
•
•
Update SIGMETS
KLAX
******
Request a new AFIS Flight
Plan
>
>
DEPART
<ARRIVE
APPROACH
AFIS UPDATE
ETA
ERASE
AFIS UPDATE VERIFICATION
PAGE
Figure 7-35
ACTUAL FL: Actual flight level
of aircraft rounded to nearest
100 ft. as entered by the pilot.
AFIS UPDATE
ASSIGNED FL: Current Flight
Level assigned by ATC as veri-
fied or amended by the pilot.
ACTUAL FL
ASSIGNED FL 370
PAYLOAD 1200
FUEL REM 11985
410
PAYLOAD: Current aircraft
payload verified or amended by
the pilot.
CRUISE MODE M80
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
FUEL REM:
Actual fuel
remaining as calculated by the
GNS-XL or amended by the
pilot.
Figure 7-36
CRUISE MODE: Current air-
craft Cruise Mode as verified or
amended by the pilot.
AFIS UPDATE
ACTUAL FL
ASSIGNED FL
PAYLOAD
410
370
TRANSMIT REQUEST: When
cursor is over this field and ENT
is pressed, the update request
is sent via the data link. (Figure
7-36)
1200
FUEL REM
CRUISE MODE
11985
DATA LINK DISABLED
DATA LINK DISABLED:
Aircraft equipped with the
Antenna Switching Unit, must
DEPRESS momentary AFIS
Figure 7-37
annunciator to enable the air to ground data link. VHF or satellite
network must also be enabled.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MESSAGES PAGE
AFIS related messages appear
on the SYSTEM MESSAGES
Page (see Section 2 of the
Operators Manual). When new
messages are added, the MSG
Key will flash and a flashing
asterisk will appear next to the
new message.
SYSTEM MESSAGES 1/1
*SEE AFIS MSG
*WX UPDATED
DATA CENTER AK
NDB- WW EXP 31MAY
SYSTEM MESSAGES
ADVISORY:
Figure 7-38
The following are the advisory messages which pertain to AFIS and
may appear on the GNS-XL SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.
SYSTEM MESSAGE EXPLANATION
WX UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS terminal weather
update from the Global Data Center.
WINDS UPDATED
The DMU has received an AFIS Winds Aloft
update from the Global Data Center.
SIGMETS UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS SIGMETS
update from the Global Data Center.
FPL UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS Flight Plan update
from the Global Data Center.
1 NO COMM
AFIS update request initiated by the pilot has not
been acknowledged by the ground communications network.
DOWNLINK FAIL The last AFIS downlink request contained
an invalid character and was not transmitted to the ground network.
UPLINK FAIL The last AFIS uplink attempt by the ground network
was not accepted by the DMU.
FPL RECALLED
The DMU has received a previously
accessed AFIS Flight Plan from the Global Data Center.
DATA CENT AK
Global Data Center has acknowledged a
downlink request.
AFIS CONFIG CHG.
Configuration information in the DMU has
been changed to agree with interfaced configuration module
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AFIS CONFIG FAIL
Configuration module has failed. DMU non-
volatile memory configuration information will be used.
AFIS CONFIG LOST
DMU non-volatile memory has lost its con-
figuration information and the configuration module has failed.
NOTE: Message may not cause MSG Annunciator to flash.
ACTION REQUIRED:
The following are the action required messages which pertain to AFIS
and may appear on the GNS-XL SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.
SEE AFIS MSG There is a text message on the AFIS MESSAGES
page which requires acknowledgement and possibly pilot action.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM OPERATION
PRE-DEPARTURE
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN SELECTION
The AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears after the Initialization
Page. The page also appears between the Active Flight Plan Page
and the first GNS-XL FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page.
NOTE: For aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit,
DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground
data link.
TO ENTER AN AFIS FLIGHT
PLAN
AFIS
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4
<
1. Preprogrammed AFIS Disk
CYUL-KJFK
KJFK-KORD
KORD-KSNA
KSNA-KSTL
06APR9O
06APR90
06APR90
09APR90
- INSERT disk into DTU.
<
<
2. Select AFIS FLIGHT PLAN
LIST Page using either (a)
or (b).
GUIII
a. Initialization Page -
Enter Date, GMT, and Initial
Position. AFIS FLIGHT
PLAN LIST Page appears.
Figure 7-39
b. FPL Key - DEPRESS until desired AFIS FLIGHT PLAN
LIST Page appears. (Figure 7-39)
NOTE: Desired flight plan may be found on a subsequent page if
more than six flight plans have been either transferred from the disk or
received via the data link. If there is more than one Flight Plan with the
same Departure/ Destination pair
a random letter will be displayed
between the Depart?Dest pair
and the date. This letter and the
date distinguish one FPL from
the other.
AFIS
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4
<
CYUL-KJFK
KJFK-KORD
KORD-KSNA
KSNA-KSTL
06APR9O
06APR90
06APR90
09APR90
<
<
3. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to place cursor
over desired Flight Plan.
(Figure 7-40)
REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?
Figure 7-40
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. FPL Date - VERIFY.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
NOTE: If an Active Flight Plan exists, the message REPLACE
ACTIVE FPL? appears. DEPRESS ENTER to replace the Active
Flight Plan with the AFIS Flight Plan.
6. ACTIVE FPL - CONFIRM. AFIS Flight Plan becomes the Active
Flight Plan. The initial leg must be established on the NAV Page
so the system can navigate normally.
NAVIGATION 5/5
<
ENROUTE
PRC: GUP
FL410
ACT
PLAN
9642
1832
02:09
488
F REM
FF P/E
ETA
9685
REVIEWING FLIGHT PLAN
PROGRESS
1800
02:08
485
TAS
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS until
NAVIGATION Page 5,
Flight Plan Progress Page
appears. (Figure 7-41)
GS
507
519
WIND 300/ 26
310/ 38
Figure 7-41
2. Current Leg Data - CON-
FIRM.
Observe AFIS
Planned data vs. Actual
GNS-XL calculated data.
NAVIGATION 5/5
PRC: GUP
<
FL410
ACT
PLAN
1330
1832
0+22
488
REVIEWING AFIS PLANNED
LEG DATA
F REQ
FF P/E
ETE
------
----
-----
---
3. Line
Select
Key
-
TAS
GS
507
---
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Leg Identifiers.
(Figure 7-42)
WIND 300/ 26
---/---
Figure 7-42
NOTE: ACTUAL data fields
become dashes, F REM field
becomes F REQ and ETA field
becomes ETE.
NAVIGATION 5/5
DIR TO ICT
<
FL---
ACT
PLAN
------
----
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
review Planned data for
future legs of the Active
AFIS Flight Plan.
F REQ
FF P/E
ETA
9475
1800
-----
---
03:17
485
TAS
GS
---
491
5. BACK or PRV Key -
DEPRESS to review
Planned data for previous
WIND
---/---
310/ 38
Figure 7-43
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
legs of the AFIS Flight Plan.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to remove cursor from page and
return to Current Leg Progress.
NOTE: If the current leg displayed does not agree with a planned
AFIS leg, the PLAN fields display dashes. (Figure 7-43) If AFIS
Flight Plan is updated via the data link, new values will appear. Refer
to Updating AFIS Flight Plan for update procedure.
AFIS MENU
REVIEWING AFIS FLIGHT
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
PLAN DATA
2 SIGMETS
3 TERMINAL WX
<
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
4 WINDS ALOFT
display AFIS MENU Page.
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
<
2. Line Select Key - Place cur-
sor over menu Option 1,
AFIS FLT PLAN. (Figure 7-
44)
<
Figure 7-44
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4
FUEL
TIME
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 1
FR KSNA
TO KSTL 10859
2+51
-----
-----
0+45
4. REVIEW fuel and time data.
(Figure 7-45) If the Flight
Plan has been updated, the
FROM identifier (origin air-
port) will be changed to
UPDATE. (Figure 7-46)
HOLDING
TO ----
RESERVE
-----
-----
2500
TOTALS
13359
3+36
Fuel and time data change as a
result of the updated informa-
tion. The TOTALS reflect the
changes in the TO and
RESERVE fields.
Figure 7-45
AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4
FUEL
TIME
FR UPDATE
TO KSTL
HOLDING
TO ----
9285
-----
-----
2700
1+58
-----
-----
0+49
RESERVE
TOTALS
11985
2+47
Figure 7-46
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. AFIS or NXT
Key -
DEPRESS to display AFIS
Flight Plan Page 2.
AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4
RAMP WT
FPL LDWT
FLT LVL
52185
42700
410
NOTE: Pressing the PRV or
BACK Key will re-display the
AFIS MENU Page with the cur-
sor positioned over Option 1.
ROUTE
KSNA-MUSEL-TRM-
J134-STL-KSTL
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 2
6. WEIGHTS, FLIGHT LEVEL
and ROUTE - REVIEW
(Figure 7-47). If the Flight
Plan has been updated, the
first route identifier will be
UPDATE, followed by the
updated route to destina-
tion. FPL LDWT and FLT
LVL values may change as
data is updated.
Figure 7-47
AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4
RAMP WT
FPL LDWT
FLT LVL
51900
42500
370
ROUTE
UPDATE-ICT-J134-
STL-KSTL
NOTE: If Automatic Fuel Flow
is interfaced to the GNS-XL,
RAMP WT changes to GROSS
WT after the engines are started
and the GROSS WT value field
decreases on a periodic basis
as the GNS-XL recalculates.
(Figure 7-48)
Figure 7-48
7. AFIS or NXT Key - DEPRESS. Subsequent pages of the Route
will appear as needed (up to 50 waypoints) or AFIS FLT PLAN
Page 3 appears.
NOTE: DEPRESSING PRV or BACK Key will display AFIS FLT
PLAN Page 1.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 3
AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4
FROM
8. Pilot Inputs - REVIEW.
(Figure 7-49)
KSNA
KSTL
23:45
39000
1200
13359
2500
/ 2
TO
DEP TIME
NOTE: If there has been an
update to the flight plan: FROM
identifier (origin airport) changes
to UPDATE; DEP TIME
changes to UPDATE TIME;
RAMP FUEL changes to
UPDATE FUEL; FPL RES
FUEL changes to RESERVE
FUEL; and the values in the
respective fields change to
reflect the updated information.
(Figure 7-50)
BASIC OP WT
PAYLOAD
RAMP FUEL
RESERVE FUEL
PERF OPTION M80
Figure 7-49
AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4
FROM
UPDATE
KSTL
TO
9. AFIS or NXT
Key -
DEP TIME
00:54
39000
1200
BASIC OP WT
PAYLOAD
DEPRESS to display AFIS
FLT PLAN Page 4.
RAMP FUEL
RESERVE FUEL
PERF OPTION M80
11985
2700
NOTE: DEPRESSING PRV or
BACK Key will display AFIS
FLT PLAN Page 3.
/ 2
Figure 7-50
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 4
10. Performance Bias Data -
REVIEW. (Figure 7-51)
11. AFIS or NXT
Key -
AFIS FLT PLAN 4/4
DEPRESS to return to AFIS
MENU Page, where the
cursor will be positioned
over Option 2.
MIN FLT LVL
330
410
-----
----
--
MAX FLT LVL
HOLD TIME
ALTERNATE
CLIMB F/T
ARRIV F/T
----
----
--
NOTE: Pressing the BACK or
PRV Key throughout the Flight
Plan Pages will cause the previ-
ous Flight Plan Page to appear.
Figure 7-51
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIGMETS REVIEW/UPDATE
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 2,
SIGMETS.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display first SIGMETS Page.
(Figure 7-52 or 7-53)
AFIS SIGMETS 1/2
<
9APR95
FR KLAS
TO KLAX
NOTE: If no SIGMETS have
been recorded on the disk, a
page appears displaying the
message NO SIGMETS ON
DISK. If there are no SIGMETS
via a Flight Plan update the
message reads NO SIGMETS.
Depress AFIS, PRV, or BACK
Key to return to AFIS MENU
Page.
SIGMET ECHO 7 VALID
UNTIL 222205
CA
FROM RNO TO EED TO
Figure 7-52
4. Select Key - DEPRESS TO
POSITION cursor over
FROM field
AFIS SIGMETS 1/26
20OCT95
FR NAT
TO
NAT TRACKS FLS 310
370 INCLUSIVE OCT
20/11 30Z TO OCT 20
190002
5. FROM Identifier - VERIFY
or INSERT.
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The
cursor will automatically
move to the TO Identifier
field.
A 53/15 52/20 50/30
Figure 7-53
7. TO Identifier- VERIFY or
INSERT.
AFIS SIGMETS
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
The cursor will automatically
<
FR (KSNA)
TO (KMIA)
move
to
TRANSMIT
REQUEST? (Figure 7-54)
NO SIGMETS
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The
request is downlinked and
the system will display the
AFIS MENU Page with the
cursor over Option 3.
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
Figure 7-54
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple
requests. A ( ) around the FR and TO waypoints indicates that the
updated information has not yet been received.
10. AFIS or NXT Key - DEPRESS. Subsequent SIGMETS Pages
will appear or AFIS MENU Page returns with cursor positioned
over Option 3.
TERMINAL WEATHER MENU - DATA UPDATE AND REVIEW
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page.
2. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 3, TERMI-
NAL WX. (Figure 7-55)
AFIS MENU
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display TERMINAL WX
Menu Page. (Figure 7-56)
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
4. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over the desired
Terminal Wx airport identifi-
er.
Figure 7-55
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
TERMINAL WX
If the desired identifier is
enclosed in parentheses,
pressing the ENT Key will
cause it to blink, indicating no
weather information is available
for that identifier.
KSNA
KSTL
(KMKC)
(ENO)
(DQO)
<
>
<
<
<
>
>
>
If no identifiers are displayed,
they may be inserted by press-
ing the Line Select Key, which
will create a cursor over the first
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
Figure 7-56
blank identifier
position.
INSERT an airport identifier.
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS
7. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT
REQUEST?
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Identifiers listed on this page will be trans-
mitted to the ground via the data link.
NOTE: Wait for DATA CEN-
TERMINAL WEATHER 1/5
TER AK message if sending
KSTL
09APR90
multiple requests.
SA: 1547 50 SCT E90
BKN 120 BKN 10 156
82 /70 /1912G18 /001
CB NW-NE
9. If there are identifiers:
Placing the cursor over the
selected identifier on the ter-
minal weather and pressing
ENT will display the weather
information for the airport.
(Figure 7-57)
MOVG NE
Figure 7-57
10. Weather information - REVIEW.
TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER:
11. Line Select - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the identifier field.
12. IDENTIFIER - INSERT. The data text fields will go blank.
13. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The TERMINAL WX Menu Page appears
with the new identifier in place of the original identifier, and the
cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier selected.
If there is no data available for this new identifier, it will appear in
parentheses.
TO DELETE TEXT WHEN THERE IS NO DATA ENTRY IN
PROGRESS:
14. Place cursor over airport identifier on TERMINAL WX page.
15. Depress BACK key. DELETE? will appear.
16. ENT Key- Depress to delete the airport identifier.
AFIS MENU
WINDS ALOFT MENU - DATA
UPDATE AND REVIEW
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
2 SIGMETS
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
3 TERMINAL WX
<
display AFIS MENU Page.
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
<
2. Line
Select
Key
-
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 4, WINDS
ALOFT. (Figure 7-59)
<
Figure 7-59
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display WINDS ALOFT
Menu Page. (Figure 7-60)
AFIS WINDS ALOFT
KSNA
(ENO)
(DQO)
<
>
4. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over the desired Wind
identifier.
KSTL
(MKC)
<
<
<
>
>
>
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
If the desired identifier is
enclosed in parentheses,
pressing the ENT Key will
Figure 7-60
cause it to blink, indicating no weather information is available for that
identifier.
If no identifiers are displayed, they may be inserted by pressing the
Line Select Key, which will create a cursor over the first blank identifi-
er position. INSERT an identifier. (Usually a VOR or intersection)
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS
7. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT
REQUEST?
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Identifiers listed on this page will be trans-
mitted to the ground via the data link.
NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER
AK message if sending multiple
requests.
WINDS ALOFT
ICT
122356Z
18000
24000
30000
34000
39000
45000
310/23-17
9. If there are identifiers, upon
depressing the ENT Key,
the WINDS ALOFT Data
Pages pertaining to the
selected identifier appear.
(Figure 7-61)
290/34-31
290/44-47
300/53-54
310/68-56
310/57-59
10. Wind
REVIEW.
information
-
Figure 7-61
TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER:
11. Press Line Select Key to position the cursor over the identifier
field.
12. IDENTIFIER - INSERT. The data text fields will go blank.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The WINDS ALOFT Menu Page appears
with the new identifier in place of the original identifier, and the
cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier selected.
If there is no data available for the new identifier, it will appear in
parentheses.
TO DELETE TEXT WHEN THERE IS NO DATA ENTRY IN
PROGRESS:
14. Place cursor over identifier on AFIS WINDS ALOFT page.
15. Depress BACK key the the ENT Key.
RECALLING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN
This procedure allows a previ-
ously accessed AFIS Flight
AFIS MENU
Plan and associated weather to
be recalled from the Global
Data Center.
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
2 SIGMETS
3 TERMINAL WX
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
RECALL OPTION 1:
<
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
<
8 OPERATING MODES
display AFIS MENU Page.
2. Line
Select
Key
-
Figure 7-63
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 5, RECALL
AFIS FPL. (Figure 7-63)
RECALL AFIS FPL
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
RECALL AFIS FPL Page
appears.
FPL-# A1234
<
DATE
ETD
FR
4. Line
Select
Key
-
TO
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor next to FPL # field.
5. FPL # - INSERT desired
AFIS Flight Plan number.
(Figure 7-64)
Figure 7-64
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Cursor is positioned over TRANSMIT
REQUEST? (Figure 7-65)
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS to ini-
RECALL AFIS FPL
tiate recalling of AFIS Flight
Plan from Global Data
FPL-# A1234
<
Center.
DATE
ETD
NOTE: For aircraft equipped
FR
with the Antenna Switching Unit,
if DATA LINK DISABLED mes-
sage appears DEPRESS
momentary AFIS annunciator to
enable the air to ground data
link. Also enable VHF or satel-
lite network.
TO
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
Figure 7-65
Wait for DATA CENT AK mes-
sage if sending multiple
requests.
RECALL AFIS FPL
FPL-#
DATE
ETD
FR
<
RECALL OPTION 2:
If Flight Plan Number field is
blank:
TO
1. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Cursor will position itself
over date field. (Figure 7-
66)
Figure 7-66
2. DATE - INSERT issue date (day, month, year, digits only) of
AFIS Flight Plan being recalled.
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
4. ETD - INSERT estimated time of departure in GMT of AFIS Flight
Plan being recalled.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
6. FR field - INSERT origin ICAO Identifier.
7. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
8. TO field - INSERT destination ICAO Identifier.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Cursor is positioned over
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
(Figure 7-67)
RECALL AFIS FPL
FPL-#
DATE07MAR90
<
ETD
FR
14:30
KSNA
KDEN
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS to ini-
tiate recalling of AFIS Flight
Plan from Global Data
Center. AFIS MENU Page
will appear with cursor posi-
tioned over Option 6.
TO
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
Figure 7-67
NOTE: SIGMETS ,Winds and
Term Wx are automatically
updated once the FPL is recalled.
NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple
requests.
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
OR PDC
AFIS MENU
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
display AFIS MENU Page.
2 SIGMETS
3 TERMINAL WX
<
2. Line
Select
Key
-
4 WINDS ALOFT
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 6, SEND
AFIS MSG. (Figure 7-68)
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
<
<
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
SEND AFIS MESSAGE
Page appears. (Figure 7-
69) If not requesting PDC
proceed to step 7
Figure 7-68
SEND AFIS MSG
MESSAGE
$
4. Line Select Key - Depress
to position cursor over #:
field.
PPM
TO:
FR:
#:
%
5. INSERT - PDCXXX (XXX is
departure airport identifier).
6. ENT Key - Depress twice to
<
>
SEND MESSAGE?
transmit request.
7. TO - INSERT receiver of
Figure 7-69
message.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
9. FR - INSERT sender's iden-
tification (name or tail num-
ber).
SEND AFIS MSG
MESSAGE
% TO: DISPATCH
FR: N2175C
$
>
PPM
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
#: SNABCDE
11. # - INSERT receiver's
address. See Table 1 for
possible addresses.
DELAYED DUE TO WX
NEW ETA IS 1430Z
<
>
SEND MESSAGE?
12. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
13. Message - INSERT text
message using the ENTER
Key to access each succes-
sive line. (Figure 7-70)
Figure 7-70
NOTE: The cursor remains
fixed and the page display
moves up or down one line at a
time through the cursor. Fifteen
lines of text can be entered.
(Figure 7-71)
SEND AFIS MSG
$
>
DELAYED DUE TO WX
NEW ETA IS 1430Z
PLS ARR GND TRANS
ALSO PLS HAV MECH
%
AVAIL TO DISCUSS POS
MAINT PROB
The following guidelines are
used for entering and editing
text:
<
>
SEND MESSAGE?
a. Entering a character
causes the character at
the cursor position and
all the characters to the
right to be shifted one
position.
Figure 7-71
b. The BACK Key may be used to delete characters one at a
time from right to left.
c. The SP Key may be used as a spacer to separate words.
d. The PRV Key may be used to move the cursor one space to
the left.
e. The NXT Key may be used to move the cursor one space to
the right.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f. The Line Select Key moves cursor to SEND MESSAGE?
field if a TO or # entry field has been inserted.
g. Top two left Line Select keys move cursor up and down
page.
11. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position over SEND MES-
SAGE? It will be necessary
SEND AFIS MSG
$
%
>
to press the ENT Key after
15 lines of text, or if there
are two succeeding blank
lines, in order for the cursor
to appear over SEND MES-
SAGE? field. (Figure 7-72)
DELAYED DUE TO WX
NEW ETA IS 1430Z
PLS ARR GND TRANS
ALSO PLS HAV MECH
AVAIL TO DISCUSS POS
MAINT PROB
<
>
SEND MESSAGE?
12. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The
message is sent to the
Global Data Center via the
data link.
Figure 7-72
NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple
requests.
TO RETURN TO THE AFIS MENU PAGE
13. Press AFIS or NXT Key with the cursor off the page.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SENDING/BUILDING A PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE
The PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGES MENU Page is accessed
from the SEND AFIS MSG
Page. (Figure 7-73) An entry in
SEND AFIS MSG
MESSAGE
TO: DISPATCH
FR: N2175C
$
%
>
the TO or # field must be made
before access to PPM is avail-
able.
PPM
#: SNABCDE
1. Line
Select
Key
-
DELAYED DUE TO WX
NEW ETA IS 1430Z
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over the PPM field.
<
>
SEND MESSAGE?
2. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Up
to six messages can be list-
ed on the PPM MENU Page
which appears.
Figure 7-73
3. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired mes-
sage title or blank title field.
(Figure 7-74)
PPM MENU
4. MESSAGE TITLE - VERIFY
or ENTER. A new title may
be entered with a maximum
of 18 characters.
<
1 ETA CHANGE
2 FILE FLT PLAN REQ
<
3 HOTEL RESERVATIONS
4
<
To change an existing title,
5
type characters over the old
6
<
Title. The BACK Key can
be used to delete charac-
ters one at a time.
Figure 7-74
NOTE: Whenever a title is
changed or erased, the preprogrammed message associated with
the title will be erased also.
5. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The preprogrammed message associat-
ed with that title will appear. If no message has been pro-
grammed the display will be blank. Insert message as required
up to 7 lines of text.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EDITING/ENTERING A PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE
6. TEXT - EDIT or ENTER using the following guidelines.
a. Entering a character causes the character at the cursor posi-
tion and all the characters to the right to be shifted one position.
b. The BACK Key may be
used to delete characters
one at a time from right to
PPM MENU
left.
<
1 ETA CHANGE
c. The SP Key may be
2 FILE FLT PLAN REQ
<
used as a spacer to sepa-
rate words.
3 HOTEL RESERVATIONS
4
<
5
6
d. The PRV Key may be
<
used to move the cursor
one space to the left.
Figure 7-75
e. The NXT Key may be
used to move the cursor
one space to the right.
CONTINUE SENDING MESSAGE
7. NXT Key - DEPRESS to
position cursor over the
SEND MESSAGE? field. It
will be necessary to press
the ENT Key after seven
PREPROGRAMMED MSG
ETA CHANGE
<NEW ETA IS 1300 KPRC
lines of text in order for the
HAVE A GOOD DAY
SEND MESSAGE? field to
appear. (Figure 7-76)
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The
<
>
SEND MESSAGE?
message will be downlinked
and the AFIS MENU Page
will appear. TO, FROM and
# field information of SEND
MESSAGE Page will be
used in downlink message.
Figure 7-76
NOTE: DATA LINK DISABLED will appear in the SEND MES-
SAGE? field if the downlink is disabled.
Wait for DATA CENT AK message if sending multiple requests.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AFIS MESSAGES REVIEW
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS MENU
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
2. Line
Select
Key
-
<
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 7, DISPL
AFIS MSG. (Figure 7-77)
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS. DIS-
PLAY AFIS MSG Page
appears.
Figure 7-77
4. MESSAGE - REVIEW.
(Figure 7-78)
DISPLAY AFIS MSG 1/1
5. AFIS, NXT, PRV or BACK
Key
Subsequent
pages appear or old AFIS
MENU Page returns with
cursor positioned over
Option 8.
-
DEPRESS.
message
DISPATCH:
MESSAGE RECEIVED.
NEW ETA IS 1430Z.
TRANSPORTATION
ARRANGED.
NOTE: Messages will remain in
the system until the system is
powered off.
Figure 7-78
SELECTING OPERATING MODES (FOR AFIS USERS
EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM)
AUTO REPORTING
When the system is initialized, the Automatic Reporting and Auto Wx
update function will retain the status at aircraft shutdown. The follow-
ing procedures allow the function to be turned OFF and back ON.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TURNING AUTO REPORT / AUTO WX UPDATE OFF
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS MENU
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
2 SIGMETS
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
3 TERMINAL WX
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
to position cursor over
Option 8, OPERATING
MODES. (Figure 7-79)
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
<
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
<
8 OPERATING MODES
Figure 7-79
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line
Select
Key
-
AFIS OPERATING MODES
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over ON option of
AUTO REPORT or AUTO
WX UPDATE field. (Figure
7-80)
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
OFF appears in the cursor.
(Figure 7-81)
Figure 7-80
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
turn OFF the AUTO
REPORT or AUTO WX
UPDATE function.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
OFF
ON
ON
ON
NOTE: If all networks are OFF,
then AUTO REPORT and
AUTO WX UPDATE will be
OFF.
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-81
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RETURNING TO AUTO REPORT/AUTO WX UPDATE
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS MENU
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to
position cursor over Option 8,
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
OPERATING
MODES.
2 SIGMETS
(Figure 7-82)
3 TERMINAL WX
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
<
<
<
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Figure 7-82
4. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over OFF option of
AUTO REPORT or AUTO
WX UPDATE field. (Figure
7-83)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
OFF
ON
ON
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
ON appears in the cursor.
(Figure 7-84)
ON
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-83
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
turn ON the AUTO
REPORT or AUTO WX
UPDATE function.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
NOTE: If all networks are OFF,
then AUTO REPORT and
AUTO WX UPDATE will be
OFF.
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
ON
ON
ON
>
>
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-84
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO WEATHER UPDATE
AFIS MENU
When the system is initialized,
the Automatic Weather Update
function will retain the status at
aircraft shutdown. The following
procedures allow the function to
be turned OFF and back ON.
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
TURNING AUTO WX UPDT
OFF
Figure 7-85
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
2. Line
Select
Key
-
AFIS OPERATING MODES
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 8, OPER-
ATING MODES. (Figure 7-
85)
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
ON
ON
ON
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line
Select
Key
-
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over ON option of
AUTO WX UPDT field.
(Figure 7-86)
Figure 7-86
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
OFF appears in the cursor.
(Figure 7-87)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
turn OFF the AUTO WX
UPDT function.
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
OFF
ON
ON
NOTE: A Weather Update
Request must be performed to
notify the GDC of the change in
status of AUTO WX UPDT.
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-87
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RETURNING TO AUTO WX UPDT
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS MENU
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
2. Line
Select
Key
-
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 8, OPER-
ATING MODES. (Figure 7-
88)
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
Figure 7-88
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
4. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over OFF option of
AUTO WX UPDT field.
(Figure 7-89)
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
ON appears in the cursor.
(Figure 7-90)
Figure 7-89
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
turn ON the AUTO WX
UPDT function.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
OFF
ON
NOTE: A Weather Update
Request must be performed to
notify the GDC of the change in
status of AUTO WX UPDT.
ON
ON
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-90
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VHF AND SATELLITE NETWORK OPERATING MODES
The status of each network is
held in non-volatile memory.
When the system is initialized,
AFIS MENU
all networks will prefill with the
status at system shut-down.
The following procedures allow
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
2 SIGMETS
3 TERMINAL WX
<
the VHF and satellite networks
to be manually operated, turned
OFF, or returned to AUTO.
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
<
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
<
8 OPERATING MODES
TURNING VHF NETWORK OFF
Figure 7-91
The VHF network has prece-
dence over the satellite network
in areas of shared coverage and
must be turned OFF in order for
SATCOM to be the Active Link.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
ON
ON
ON
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor over Option
8, OPERATING MODES.
(Figure 7-91)
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Figure 7-92
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor over ON
option of VHF NETWORK
field. (Figure 7-92)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
OFF? appears in the cursor.
(Figure 7-93)
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
ON
OFF?
ON
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to turn
the VHF network OFF.
ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM
NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK infor-
mation at the bottom of the page
indicates the network that is
Figure 7-93
being serviced at that time. If all networks are turned OFF or none are
operational, NONE will be displayed.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TURNING VHF NETWORK ON
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
2. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 8, OPER-
ATING MODES.
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
ON
OFF
ON
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM
Figure 7-94
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor over OFF
option of VHF NETWORK
field. (Figure 7-94)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
ON
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
ON? appears in the cursor.
(Figure 7-95)
ON ?
ON
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
turn VHF network on. VHF
LINK CONTROL Page
appears. (Figure 7-96)
Figure 7-95
AFIS OPERATING MODES
VHF LINK CONTROL
NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK
information at the bottom of the
page indicates the network that
is being serviced at that time.
>
>
ARINC
SITA/AVICOM
AUTO
AUTO
7. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over AUTO option of
desired ground network.
Figure 7-96
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TURNING AUTO TO MAN OR OFF
NOTE: SITA/AVICOM are two different ground networks covering
different regions. The appropriate network is automatically selected
for operation based on current Lat/Lon location of aircraft, if mode is
set to AUTO.
8. BACK Key - DEPRESS
until MAN or OFF appears
in the cursor.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
VHF LINK CONTROL
>
ARINC
SITA/AVICOM
MAN
OFF
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select MAN or OFF.
>
NOTE: If MAN is selected, all
other networks will indicate
OFF. (Figure 7-97)
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 to
turn OFF desired ground
networks or DEPRESS ENT
Figure 7-97
Key to cursor through option fields and return to AFIS
OPERATING MODEs Page.
RETURNING TO AUTO
11. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF or MAN
option of desired ground network.
12. BACK Key - DEPRESS
until AUTO appears in cur-
sor. (Figure 7-98)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
VHF LINK CONTROL
>
>
13. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select AUTO option.
ARINC
SITA/AVICOM
AUTO
OFF
14. Repeat Steps 11 through 13
to return desired ground
networks to AUTO or
DEPRESS ENT Key to cur-
sor through option fields
and return to AFIS
Operating Modes Page.
Figure 7-98
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TURNING SATELLITE NETWORK OFF
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS MENU
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
2. Line
Select
Key
-
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 8, OPER-
ATING MODES. (Figure 7-
99)
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
Figure 7-99
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
4. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over ON option of SAT
(satellite) NETWORK field.
(Figure 7-100)
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
OFF? appears in the cursor.
Figure 7-100
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
turn the satellite network
OFF. (Figure 7-101)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK
information at the bottom of the
page indicates the network that
is being serviced at that time. If
all networks are turned OFF or
none are operational, NONE will
be displayed.
ON
OFF
OFF?
ACTIVE LINK: NONE
Figure 7-101
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TURNING SATELLITE NETWORK ON
The satellite network must be
turned ON to send non-flight
related messages. Since the
VHF network has precedence
over the satellite network in areas
of shared coverage, the VHF
NETWORK must be turned OFF
in order for SATCOM to be the
Active Link. If the VHF network
cannot be received and the SAT-
COM mode is set to ON the sys-
tem will automatically select the
SATCOM mode for transmit and
receive.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ACTIVE LINK: NONE
Figure 7-102
AFIS OPERATING MODES
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to dis-
play AFIS MENU Page.
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
VHF NETWORK
SAT NETWORK
PRINTER CTRL
ON
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor over Option
8, OPERATING MODES.
ON
OFF
ON ?
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor over OFF
option of SAT NETWORK
field. (Figure 7-102)
Figure 7-103
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
SAT LINK CONTROL
ON? appears in the cursor.
(Figure 7-103)
$
%
SAT COM: AUTO
NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK infor-
mation at the bottom of the page
indicates the network that is
being serviced at that time.
REGION: W. ATLANTIC
LINK:OPERATIONAL
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to turn
satellite network on. SAT
(satellite) LINK CONTROL
Page appears with cursor
over AUTO. (Figure 7-104)
Figure 7-104
DEPRESS ENT Key to cursor through option fields and return to AFIS
OPERATING MODES Page or proceed to Step 7.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TURNING AUTO TO MAN
7. Line Select Key
-
DEPRESS until MAN
appears in the cursor.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
SAT LINK CONTROL
$
%
SAT COM: MAN
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Cursor moves to REGION
field.
REGION: PACIFIC
9. BACK Key - DEPRESS
until desired region appears
in cursor, either W. Atlantic,
E. Atlantic, Pacific, or
Indian. (Figure 7-105)
LINK:OPERATIONAL
Figure 7-105
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select region.
moves to LINK field.
(Figure 7-106)
Cursor
AFIS OPERATING MODES
$ SAT LINK CONTROL
%
SAT COM: MAN
NOTE: All other regions are
now considered OFF.
REGION: PACIFIC
LINK:ACTIVATE?
11. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
ACTIVATE the SAT net-
work link as operational and
return to AFIS OPERATING
MODES Page.
Figure 7-106
NOTE: When in MAN mode, the ACTIVE LINK will display NONE
until the aircraft is within the boundaries of the selected region.
RETURNING TO AUTO
12. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over MAN field.
13. BACK Key - DEPRESS until AUTO appears in cursor.
14. ENT Key - DEPRESS to select AUTO option. Cursor moves to
the LINK field.
15. ENT Key - DEPRESS to ACTIVATE the SAT network link as
operational and return to AFIS OPERATING MODES Page.
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRINTER CTRL
The AFIS DMU has two RS-232 printer interfaces. Users may print
messages or weather to either or both printer ports. Automatic print-
ing is also available. Controls for these options, as well as Auto Form
Feed control, are accessed on the PRINTER CONTROL page. Auto
Form Feed currently applies to the -0211 and the -2011 DMUs.
Access the PRINTER CONTROL page by line selecting the PRINT-
ER CTRL field on the OPERATING MODES page and pressing
ENTER.
MESSAGE DEST
The Message Destination field is used to assign the printer port that
will be used when messages are printed. Messages can be sent to
printer port 1 (PRT1), printer port 2 (PRT2), or BOTH.
1. AFIS key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING
MODES.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the PRINT-
ER CTRL field. SEL will appear in the field.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL
page.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over MESSAGE
DEST.
7. BACK Key - DEPRESS to cycle destination field between PRT1,
PRT2, and BOTH.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to set Message Destination field to its
present value (PRT1, PRT2, or BOTH.)
WEATHER DEST
The Weather Destination field is used to assign the printer port that
will be used when weather is printed. Weather can be sent to printer
port 1 (PRT1), printer port 2 (PRT2), or BOTH.
1. AFIS key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING
MODES.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option
of PRINTER CTRL field.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL
page.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over WEATHER
DEST.
7. BACK Key - DEPRESS to cycle destination field between PRT1,
PRT2, and BOTH.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to set Message Destination field to its
present value (PRT1, PRT2, or BOTH.)
AUTO FORM FEED
The Auto Form Feed option, when set to YES, will cause the printer
to Form Feed, or eject the page, after each message or weather
report is printed. Setting the Auto Form Feed option to NO will print
messages and weather reports on the same page until the page is
full, then eject the page.
1. AFIS key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING
MODES.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option
of PRINTER CTRL field.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL
page.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO
FORM FEED.
7. BACK Key - DEPRESS to toggle Auto Form Feed option
between YES and NO.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to set Auto Form Feed to its present
value (YES or NO.)
Auto Form Feed currently applies to the -0211 and the -2011 DMUs.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO PRINT MSG
The Auto Print Message field is used to select or deselect the auto-
matic printing of messages. If AUTO PRINT MSG is set to YES, then
messages will automatically be printed upon receipt. If AUTO PRINT
MSG is set to NO, then messages will not be printed upon receipt.
1. AFIS key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING
MODES.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option
of PRINTER CTRL field.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL
page.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO
PRINT MSG.
7. BACK Key - DEPRESS to toggle Auto Print Message field
between YES and NO.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to set Auto Print Message field to its
present value (YES or NO.)
AUTO PRINT WX
The Auto Print Weather field is used to select or deselect the auto-
matic printing of weather. If AUTO PRINT WX is set to YES, then
weather will automatically be printed upon receipt. If AUTO PRINT
WX is set to NO, then weather will not be printed upon receipt.
1. AFIS key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING
MODES.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option
of PRINTER CTRL field.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL
page.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRINT WX.
7. BACK Key - DEPRESS to toggle Auto Print Weather field
between YES and NO.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to set Auto Print Weather field to its
present value (YES or NO.)
PRINTING PROCEDURES
PRINTING FLIGHT PLANS
Following is a step by step procedure to print a flight plan in the air-
craft:
Note: The aircraft must be specially REGISTERED with the Global
Data Center (GDC) for this feature.
1. Enable AUTO PRINT WX from the printer control page of the
AFIS OPERATING MODES page.
2. Select SEND AFIS MSG from the AFIS MENU.
3. Leave the TO and FR fields blank. At the address (#) field, type:
PRFPD1234, where D1234 is the flight plan number.
4. Transmit the request to the GDC.
5. When uplinked, the flight plan will be treated like weather and will
print automatically.
PRINTING MESSAGES
Messages may be printed automatically as the message is uplinked,
and/or individually at any time.
To Automatically Print Messages Upon Receipt:
1. Select AUTO PRINT MSG from the AFIS OPERATING MODES,
PRINTER CONTROL page, to YES. All uplinked messages will
print automatically upon receipt.
To Manually Print a Message:
1. While reviewing the message, line select one of the white caret
symbols at the bottom of the message page.
2. The PRINT MESSAGE? prompt will display. Press ENTER to
send the message to the printer currently selected for messages.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Manually Print All Messages:
1. From the AFIS MENU, select the SEND AFIS MSG page.
2. On the send message page, leave the TO and FR fields blank.
At the address (#) field, type ONE of the following commands:
MSG 1
MSG 2
MSG 3
Send messages to printer one.
Send messages to printer two.
Send messages to both printers.
3. Press ENTER until the SEND MESSAGE? prompt is displayed.
Press ENTER again to initiate printing to the specified printer(s).
PRINTING WEATHER
SIGMETS, Winds Aloft, and Terminal Weather may be printed auto-
matically or manually.
To Automatically Print SIGMETS, Winds Aloft, and Terminal
Weather Upon Receipt:
1. Select AUTO PRINT WX from the AFIS OPERATING MODES,
PRINTER CONTROL page. All SIGMETS, Winds Aloft, and
Terminal Weather reports will print automatically as they are
received.
To Manually Print All SIGMETS, Winds Aloft, or Terminal
Weather:
1. From the AFIS MENU, select the SEND AFIS MSG page.
2. On the send message page, leave the TO and FR fields blank.
At the address (#) field, type ONE of the following commands
(note- there is a space between the command and the numeral,
ex. SIG<space>1):
SIG 1
SIG 2
SIG 3
Send SIGMETS to printer one.
Send SIGMETS to printer two.
Send SIGMETS to both printers.
WND 1
WND 2
WND 3
Send Winds Aloft to printer one.
Send Winds Aloft to printer two.
Send Winds Aloft to both printers.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TWX 1
TWX 2
TWX 3
Send Terminal Weather to printer one.
Send Terminal Weather to printer two.
Send Terminal Weather to both printers.
3. Press ENTER until the SEND MESSAGE? prompt is displayed.
Press ENTER again to initiate printing to the specified printer.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECTING OPERATING MODES (FOR AFIS USERS NOT
EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM)
AUTO REPORTING
When the system is initialized,
AFIS MENU
the Automatic Reporting and or
Auto Wx update function will
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
2 SIGMETS
retain the status at aircraft shut-
3 TERMINAL WX
<
down. The following proce-
dures allow the function to be
turned OFF and back ON.
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
<
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
<
8 OPERATING MODES
TURNING AUTO REPORT
OFF
Figure 7-107
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
2. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 8, OPER-
ATING MODES. (Figure 7-
107)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
ON
ON
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
AUTO
OFF
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
4. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over ON option of
AUTO REPORT field.
(Figure 7-108)
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-108
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
OFF appears in the cursor.
(Figure 7-109)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
turn OFF the AUTO
REPORT function.
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
OFF
ON
>
>
AUTO
OFF
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
NOTE: If all ground networks
are OFF, then AUTO REPORT
will be OFF.
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-109
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RETURNING TO AUTO REPORT
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS MENU
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
2. Line
Select
Key
-
3 TERMINAL WX
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 8, OPER-
ATING MODES. (Figure 7-
110)
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Figure 7-110
4. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over OFF option of
AUTO REPORT field.
(Figure 7-111)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
OFF
ON
AUTO
OFF
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
ON appears in the cursor.
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-111
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
turn ON the AUTO
REPORT function. (Figure
7-112)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
NOTE: If all ground networks
are OFF, then AUTO REPORT
will be OFF.
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
ON
ON
AUTO
OFF
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-112
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO WEATHER UPDATE
When the system is initialized,
the Automatic Weather Update
function will retain the status at
aircraft shutdown. The following
procedures allow the function to
be turned OFF and back ON.
AFIS MENU
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
TURNING AUTO WX UPDT
OFF
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
Figure 7-113
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor over
Option 8, OPERATING
MODES. (Figure 7-113)
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
ON
ON
AUTO
OFF
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
4. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cursor
over ON option of AUTO
WX UPDT field. (Figure 7-
114)
Figure 7-114
AFIS OPERATING MODES
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
OFF appears in the cursor.
(Figure 7-115)
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
ON
OFF
AUTO
OFF
>
>
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to turn
OFF the AUTO WX UPDT
function.
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-115
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RETURNING TO AUTO WX UPDT
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS MENU
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
2. Line
Select
Key
-
3 TERMINAL WX
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 8, OPER-
ATING MODES. (Figure 7-
116)
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Figure 7-116
4. Line
Select
Key
-
AFIS OPERATING MODES
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over OFF option of
AUTO WX UPDT field.
(Figure 7-117)
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
OFF
OFF
AUTO
OFF
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
ON appears in the cursor.
(Figure 7-118)
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-117
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
turn ON the AUTO WX
UPDT function.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
ON
ON
AUTO
OFF
NOTE: A Weather Update
Request must be performed to
notify the GDC of the change in
status of AUTO WX UPDT.
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-118
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GROUND NETWORK OPERATING MODES
The status of each network is
held in non-volatile memory.
When the system is initialized,
all networks will prefill with the
status at system shut-down.
The following procedures allow
the ground networks to be man-
ually operated, turned OFF, or
returned to AUTO.
AFIS MENU
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
NOTE: SITA/AVICOM are two
different ground networks cover-
ing different regions. The
appropriate network is selected
for operation based on current
Lat/Lon location of aircraft.
Figure 7-119
AFIS OPERATING MODES
AUTO TO MAN OR OFF MODE
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
ON
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
ON
AUTO
AUTO
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
2. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 8, OPER-
ATING MODES. (Figure 7-
119)
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-120
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line
Select
Key
-
AFIS OPERATING MODES
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over AUTO option of
desired ground network
field. (Figure 7-120)
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
ON
ON
MAN
OFF
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS
until MAN or OFF appears
in the cursor.
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select MAN or OFF mode.
(Figure 7-121)
Figure 7-121
NOTE: If MAN is selected, all other networks will indicate OFF.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RETURNING TO AUTO
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS MENU
2. Line
Select
Key
-
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 8, OPER-
ATING MODES. (Figure 7-
122)
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
4. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over MAN or OFF
option of ground network
field. (Figure 7-123)
Figure 7-122
AFIS OPERATING MODES
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS
until AUTO appears in the
cursor. (Figure 7-124)
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
select AUTO mode.
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
NOTE:
AUTO REPORT,
ACTIVE LINK: NONE
AUTO WX UPDT, and OPER-
ATING MODE selection status
are stored in non-volatile memo-
ry. If the operator turns to OFF
or MAN, the operator must res-
elect to turn ON.
Figure 7-123
AFIS OPERATING MODES
The ACTIVE LINK information
at the bottom of the page indi-
cates the network that is being
serviced at that time. If the
system is operating in automatic
mode and the network selected
by the present position informa-
tion is turned OFF or none are
operational, NONE will be dis-
played.
>
>
>
AUTO REPORT
AUTO WX UPDT
ARINC
ON
ON
AUTO
OFF
SITA/AVICOM
PRINTER CTRL
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-124
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UPDATING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN AND WEATHER
UPDATING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to dis-
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
FR RW19R -----
TO ORD -----
AZO -----
KDTW -----
******
<
<
play Active Flight Plan Page.
1
2
3
4
2. Active Flight Plan - VERIFY
the Active Flight Plan route or
AMEND as necessary.
<
<
<
DEPART
ARRIVE
ERASE
AFIS UPDATED
ETE
3. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
until cursor is positioned over
AFIS UPDATE? (Figure 7-
125)
>
ERASE
Figure 7-125
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS. AFIS
FPL UPDATE Page appears
with cursor positioned over
ACTUAL FL value field.
(Figure 7-126)
AFIS FPL UPDATE
ACTUAL FL
ASSIGNED FL
PAYLOAD
NOTE: Values entered are
checked against aircraft limita-
tions stored in GDC computers.
Invalid entries prevent cursor
movement and cause the field to
flash. Amend and re-enter to
advance cursor.
FUEL REM
CRUISE MODE
Figure 7-126
NOTE: SIGMETS Winds and Terminal Wx are automatically updated
when a AFIS FPL update is received.
5. ACTUAL FL value - VERIFY or INSERT actual flight level.
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
7. ASSIGNED FL value - VERIFY or INSERT new flight level assign-
ment.
8. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
9. PAYLOAD value - VERIFY or INSERT amended payload value.
10. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
11. FUEL REM value - VERIFY or INSERT amended fuel remaining
value.
12. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. CRUISE MODE - VERIFY or
INSERT an amended cruise
mode.
AFIS FPL UPDATE
ACTUAL FL
ASSIGNED FL
PAYLOAD
410
370
14. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The
cursor positions over
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
field. (Figure 7-127)
1200
FUEL
CRUISE MODE
REM11985
M80
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
15. ENT Key - DEPRESS to initi-
ate a Flight Plan Update.
ACTIVE FPL Page will
appear.
Figure 7-127
NOTE: For aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit, if DATA
LINK DISABLED message appears DEPRESS momentary AFIS
annunciator to enable the air to ground data link. Also enable VHF or
satellite network.
Wait for DATA CENT AK message if sending multiple requests.
SELECTING UPDATE AS
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
AFIS
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS until
<
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST
CYUL-KJFK
UPDA-KORD
06APR9O
16APR90
Page appears with Updated
Flight Plan (UPDA - XXXX).
(Figure 7-128)
<
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor over
Updated Flight Plan.
REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?
Figure 7-128
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Cursor positions itself over
REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?
AFIS
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4
4. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
replace Active Flight Plan
with Updated Flight Plan.
(Figure 7-129)
<
<
CYUL-KJFK
UPDA-KORD
06APR9O
16APR90
5. ACTIVE FPL - CONFIRM.
Updated
Flight
Plan
REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?
becomes the Active Flight
Plan.
Figure 7-129
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UPDATING SIGMETS
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page.
2. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 2, SIG-
METS. (Figure 7-130)
AFIS SIGMETS 1/2
9APR90
TO (KMIA)
ALPHA 2: SEV CAT
<
FR (KSNA)
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display first SIGMETS
Page.
EXT FR SO CENT VA
THRU DE AT 14000 TO
24000 FT.
4. Line
Select
Key
-
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over FROM field.
Figure 7-130
5. Desired Identifier - INSERT.
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
NOTE: Parentheses appear
indicating a request has not yet
been sent or received.
AFIS SIGMETS 1/2
9APR90
<
FR KSNA
TO KMIA
SIGMET ECHO 7 VALID
UNTIL 222205 CA
7. Line
Select
Key
-
FROM RNO TO EED TO
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over TO field.
8. Desired Identifier - INSERT.
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS.
Figure 7-131
10. Line
Select
Key
-
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over TRANSMIT
REQUEST? (Figure 7-131)
AFIS SIGMETS 1/26
20OCT91
11. ENT Key - DEPRESS to ini-
FR NAT
TO
tiate a SIGMET update.
NAT TRACKS FLS 310
370 INCLUSIVE OCT
20/11 30Z TO OCT 20
190002
NOTE: When an updated SIG-
MET is received it replaces all
previous SIGMETS. If NAT is
entered as FR option, a North
Atlantic Tracks update is sent.
(Figure 7-132)
A 53/15 52/20 50/30
Figure 7-132
Wait for DATA CENT AK if
sending multiple requests.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UPDATING WEATHER
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to dis-
AFIS MENU
play AFIS MENU Page.
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor over Option
3, TERMINAL WX. (Figure
7-133)
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to dis-
play TERMINAL WX Menu
Page.
Figure 7-133
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor in next
available field. (Figure 7-134)
TERMINAL WX
NOTE: If desired, when no field
is available, place cursor over an
existing identifier.
<
>
KSNA
KSTL
(KMKC)
(ENO)
(DQO)
<
<
<
>
>
>
5. Terminal ICAO Identifier -
INSERT.
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The
newly entered ID appears in
parentheses on the Menu.
Figure 7-134
7. Repeat Steps (5) and (6) to
enter additional requests.
8. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT
REQUEST?
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Identifiers listed on this page will be trans-
mitted to the ground via the data link.
NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK if sending multiple requests.
TERMINAL WEATHER 1/5
TO UPDATE TERMINAL
WEATHER DATA PAGES
KSTL
09APR90
SA: 1547 50 SCT E90
BKN 120 BKN 10 156
82 /70 /1912G18 /001
CB NW-NE
10. Access the TERMINAL
WEATHER Data Page
(Figure 7-135) by selecting
an Identifier on the TERMI-
NAL WX MENU Page.
MOVG NE
Figure 7-135
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER
11. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the iden-
tifier field.
12. IDENTIFIER - INSERT. The data text fields will go blank.
13. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The TERMINAL WEATHER Menu Page
appears with the new identifier in place of the original identifier,
and the cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier
selected. If there is no data available for the new identifier, it will
appear in parentheses.
UPDATING WINDS ALOFT
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page.
AFIS MENU
2. Line
Select
Key
-
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
<
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 4, WINDS
ALOFT. (Figure 7-137)
3 TERMINAL WX
<
<
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
3. ENT Key - DEPRESS to
display WINDS ALOFT
Menu Page.
4. Line
Select
Key
-
Figure 7-137
DEPRESS to position cur-
sor in next available field.
(Figure 7-138)
TERMINAL WX
NOTE: If desired, when no field
is available, place cursor over
existing identifier.
<
>
KSNA
KSTL
(MKC)
(ENO)
(DQO)
<
<
<
>
>
>
5. Desired Identifier - INSERT.
NOTE: Identifier can be VOR,
airport, waypoint, Lat/Lon or
VORTAC ident.
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
6. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The
newly entered ID appears in
parentheses on the Menu.
Figure 7-138
7. Repeat Steps (5) and (6) to enter additional requests.
8. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT
REQUEST?
Rev. 3
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
Oct/02
7-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. ENT Key - DEPRESS. Identifiers listed on this page will be trans-
mitted to the ground via the data link.
NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK if sending multiple requests.
TO UPDATE THE WINDS ALOFT DATA PAGES
10. Access the WINDS ALOFT Data Pages (Figure 7-139) by select-
ing an identifier on the WINDS ALOFT menu Page.
TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER
WINDS ALOFT
11. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position the cursor over
the identifier field.
ICT
122356Z
18000 310/23-17
24000 290/34-31
30000 290/44-47
34000 300/53-54
39000 310/68-56
45000 310/57-59
12. IDENTIFIER - INSERT.
The data text fields will go
blank.
13. ENT Key - DEPRESS. The
WINDS ALOFT Menu Page
appears with the new identi-
fier in place of the original
Figure 7-139
identifier, and the cursor positioned at the location of the original
identifier selected. If there is no data available for the new identi-
fier, it will appear in parentheses.
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rev. 3
Oct/02
GNS-XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation
7-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
ACARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Actual Vertical Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-57, 3-93, 6-1
ADI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Advisory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30, 2-75, 7-24
Airborne Flight Information System (AFIS)1-1, 1-6, 2-2, 2-13, 2-21, 2-26, 2-29, 2-32,
2-40, 2-42, 3-4~3-5, 3-78, 3-85, 6-1, 7-1~7-66
Aircraft Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aircraft Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48, 3-105
Airdata. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 3-118
Airport Continuation Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68, 3-3
Airport Reference Point(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68, 3-3, 6-1
Airports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-65, 2-67, 3-55
Airspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62, 2-70, 2-76, 3-37, 3-63, 3-129
Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 2-62, 2-77, 3-16, 6-6, 7-6
Airways
Enroute Airway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Jet Airway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Red Airway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Upper Green. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
VOR Airway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 2-13~2-14, 2-32, 2-78, 3-67, 3-86
Altitude Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38, 3-72, 3-84~3-85
Altitude Trajectory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 2-40
Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
APPR/APRCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-75, 3-40~3-41, 3-45, 6-1
APPROACH . . . . . . 1-2, 2-3~2-5, 2-7~2-12, 2-18, 2-30, 2-38, 2-54, 2-64, 2-75, 2-78,
3-8~3-10, 3-16~3-17, 3-20, 3-27, 3-29, 3-32~3-42, 3-44~3-49, 3-51, 3-54,
3-61~3-63, 3-73, 3-75, 3-78, 3-80, 3-82, 3-114, 3-116, 6-1, 6-3~6-6
Approach Armed Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37, 3-114
APPROACH CANCELED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35~3-36, 3-54
ARINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1, 7-1, 7-7, 7-19~7-20, 7-22
Armed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75, 3-36~3-37, 3-39, 3-41, 3-44, 3-46, 3-114
ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65, 2-68, 3-3~3-4, 3-54, 3-75, 3-85, 6-1
Asterisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 2-69, 2-73, 2-75, 2-78, 3-123, 7-24
Rev. 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
At or Above/Below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 2-33, 2-37, 2-40, 3-72~3-73, 3-80, 6-1
ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39~3-40, 3-44, 6-1, 7-23
Atlantic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11, 7-11, 7-21, 7-53, 7-62
Auto Leg Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-10, 2-18, 2-38, 3-12, 3-37, 3-108~3-109
Auto Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7, 7-18~7-19, 7-21~7-22, 7-44~7-45, 7-54~7-55, 7-59
Auto-computed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
Auto-TAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 3-117~3-118
Automatic Fuel Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-49, 3-95, 3-102, 7-9, 7-30
Automatic Weather Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46, 7-56
AVICOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 7-7, 7-20, 7-22, 7-50, 7-58
B
BARO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32, 2-37, 3-76, 3-82, 3-85, 6-1
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Bearing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-20, 2-27, 2-56, 3-55, 3-93, 6-1
Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 3-1
BUSY-STANDBY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
C
CALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44~2-45, 2-51, 3-132
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30, 2-51, 3-85, 3-133
CDI Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-75, 3-37, 3-54
CDU . 1-1, 1-8, 2-55~2-57, 2-75~2-77, 2-79, 3-1, 3-16, 3-41, 3-46, 3-74, 3-81, 3-86,
3-89~3-91, 3-93, 3-112~3-113, 3-123, 3-127, 5-2, 6-2, 7-1~7-2
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27~2-28, 2-30, 6-2
Circling Type Approach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32, 3-38
Closest Airport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65, 3-54
COMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 3-89
Company Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 3-36.1, 3-36.2
Compass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-75
Composite Position . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-20~2-21, 2-25~2-26, 2-29, 2-64, 2-77, 3-15,
3-110~3-113, 3-121~3-122, 3-126~3-127
Computation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 2-51~2-52, 2-78, 3-133
CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24~7-25
Constraint . . . 2-11~2-13, 2-33~2-34, 2-37, 3-49, 3-72~3-75, 3-78~3-80, 3-82~3-84,
3-86, 3-116, 6-1, 6-3
Constraint Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 2-13, 2-33, 2-37, 2-40
Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69, 3-5, 3-112, 3-117
Rev- 1
Jul/98
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Cross-at. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78, 3-86
Cross-AT-or-BELOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Cross-AT-or-ABOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Cross-BETWEEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78, 3-80
Cross-between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78, 3-80
Crossfill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Crosstrack Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18~2-19, 2-77, 3-58
Crosswind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
CRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 2-62, 3-63~3-64, 3-66, 6-4
Cruise Altitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 2-38, 3-71~3-72, 3-84, 6-2
Cutout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
D
DATA CENTER AK . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-33~7-35, 7-37~7-38, 7-40, 7-42, 7-61~7-63, 7-65
DATA LINK DISABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12, 7-15, 7-23, 7-37, 7-42, 7-61
Data-base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Database Expiration Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Dead Reckoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-26, 2-75~2-76, 2-79, 3-110
Declination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70, 3-129
DEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42, 3-74, 3-77, 6-2
DEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-31
Departing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Departure-destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Descents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Deselect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24, 3-120~3-121
Desired Track. . . . . . 2-14, 2-18~2-19, 2-45, 2-54, 3-49, 3-55, 3-58~3-60, 3-114, 6-2
DEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 7-27
Deviation(s) (DEV) . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-32~2-34, 2-39, 2-54, 2-75, 3-16, 3-74~3-78, 3-83,
3-85, 3-114, 6-2, 6-7
Digital Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Direct To . . . . . . 2-9, 2-45, 2-47, 2-54, 2-63~2-65, 2-71, 3-2, 3-13~3-14, 3-35~3-36,
3-41~3-42, 3-46, 3-48, 3-51~3-56, 3-59, 3-63, 3-65~3-66, 3-68, 3-77, 3-81,
3-83, 3-96, 3-98, 3-100~3-101, 3-103~3-104, 3-108, 3-114, 3-122, 6-2, 7-4
Discontinuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-11, 2-18, 2-38
Discrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-78, 3-37, 3-86
Displacement (DISPL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 7-7, 7-43
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62, 3-64, 3-66, 6-4
DME Arc . . . . . . 2-4, 2-8, 2-10, 2-13, 2-15~2-17, 2-19, 3-33, 3-39, 3-41, 3-44~3-47,
3-60, 6-1
DN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 2-41, 3-74, 6-2
Downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-42
Drift Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
DRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
DTK . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-45, 2-54, 3-14, 3-40, 3-45, 3-49, 3-51~3-52, 3-54~3-62, 3-99,
3-107, 6-2
E
EFIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-32, 2-72, 2-76, 3-39, 3-46, 3-122, 6-2
ELEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66, 6-2
Endpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
ENRTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 6-2
ENTR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 3-125
ENTR SET HDG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 3-125
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 3-118
EST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 2-40, 6-2
Estimated Fuel Remaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Estimated Position Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE). . . 2-4, 2-11, 2-14, 2-16~2-17, 2-34, 2-39, 2-45, 2-78,
3-44, 3-47, 3-85~3-86, 3-99, 3-114, 6-2, 7-6, 7-8, 7-28
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA). . 2-4, 2-11, 2-13, 2-15, 2-18, 2-44, 3-49, 3-72, 3-99,
3-115, 6-2, 7-5, 7-28
Estimated Time of Departure (ETD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-14, 7-37
EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122~3-123
Exit Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15~2-16, 2-62, 3-67
Exit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 2-63, 3-65~3-66
EXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76, 6-2
Expiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76, 3-2
EXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
F
FAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-21, 2-26, 2-78, 6-4
FCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-33, 6-3
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
FDE Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 3-133
FDE Prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49, 3-15, 3-130~3-131, 3-133
Fence . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-9~2-11, 2-18, 2-45, 2-47, 3-12, 3-36~3-37, 3-54, 3-108, 3-122
FF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Final Approach Course Alignment Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-33
Final Approach Fix (FAF) . . . 2-4, 2-8, 2-12, 2-32, 2-64, 2-75, 3-33, 3-37, 3-40~3-41,
3-44~3-46, 3-62, 6-3
Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Flight Level . . . . . . . 2-12, 2-33, 2-37, 3-71, 3-73, 3-80, 6-3, 7-1, 7-4, 7-6, 7-9, 7-14,
7-23, 7-30, 7-60
Flight Path Angle (FPA). . . . . . . . . 2-12, 2-33~2-34, 2-39, 2-41, 3-71~3-80, 3-82, 6-3
FPL FULL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 3-25~3-26
FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 2-41, 6-3, 6-6
Frequency (FREQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56~2-57, 2-66, 3-89, 3-91, 6-3
FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65, 2-75, 6-3, 7-13, 7-23
Fuel Flow1-1, 2-43~2-44, 2-46~2-47, 2-49, 3-95, 3-102~3-103, 3-105, 7-5, 7-9, 7-30
Fuel Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-46, 2-65, 3-99~3-101, 3-103~3-104
Fuel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42, 2-47, 3-95, 3-100, 3-103
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-1, 2-69, 3-36, 3-96, 3-100
G
GDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1~7-2, 7-46~7-47, 7-57, 7-60
Glide Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 2-33, 2-37, 3-75, 6-3
GPS . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-20, 2-29~2-31, 2-45, 2-49, 2-51, 2-75, 2-78, 3-15, 3-37~3-39,
3-104, 3-110, 3-112~3-113, 3-121~3-122, 3-130, 6-3~6-5
GPS Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30, 3-104
GRAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 6-2
Groundspeed . . . . . 2-11, 2-14, 2-17, 2-34, 2-40, 2-44, 2-46~2-48, 2-72, 2-74, 2-77,
3-15, 3-98~3-104, 3-127, 6-3, 7-5~7-6
Guidance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-14, 3-37, 3-39, 3-41, 3-44, 3-46, 3-75, 3-83
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67, 7-39, 7-42
H
H-field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74, 2-77, 3-119
HDOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Heading Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-53, 3-16, 3-37, 3-48, 3-57~3-61
Headwind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
HLTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31, 6-3
Holding. . . . 1-5, 2-4, 2-8, 2-10, 2-13, 2-15~2-17, 2-19, 2-33, 2-58, 2-62~2-64, 2-76,
3-33, 3-52, 3-63, 6-3, 7-8
Holding Fix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-15~2-17, 2-58, 2-62, 3-66~3-68
Holding Pattern. . . . . . . 1-5, 2-4, 2-8, 2-10, 2-13, 2-15~2-16, 2-58, 2-62~2-64, 2-76,
3-33, 3-52, 3-63, 6-3
Holding Pattern Entry
Direct Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 2-58, 3-63
Parallel Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 2-58, 2-61
Teardrop Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 2-58, 2-60
Holding Status Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Horizontal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29, 2-78, 6-3~6-4
Horizontal Position Error (HPE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29, 2-78, 6-4
HPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
HQM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
I
ICAO Airport Identifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 3-18
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56, 7-18, 7-21, 7-63~7-64
Ident-insert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-39
Identifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70, 3-129
Idents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-22
ILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37, 3-91, 6-4
In-flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117, 7-1
Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32, 2-37, 3-114
Inbound CRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 2-62, 3-63~3-64, 3-66, 6-4
Indented Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-10
Inertial Reference System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 3-15, 6-4
Initial Approach Fix (IAF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-8, 2-64, 3-33, 3-44, 3-46, 6-4
Initialize(d) 2-30, 3-109, 3-117~3-118, 3-126, 7-4, 7-43, 7-46, 7-48, 7-54, 7-56, 7-58
INMARSAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 7-3
INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-25, 6-4
Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72, 3-25~3-26, 3-107, 3-127
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-66
Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-45, 2-49, 2-78, 6-5
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 3-61
Intercept Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 3-61
Intercept . . . . 2-13, 2-15, 2-34, 2-53~2-54, 2-71~2-72, 2-78, 3-16, 3-40, 3-44~3-45,
3-47~3-49, 3-55, 3-57, 3-59~3-62, 3-85~3-86, 3-109, 3-114
Interfaced Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 7-1, 7-19~7-22
Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65, 2-69
Invert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-14
IRS-align. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
J
Jeppesen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67, 2-69, 6-4
K
KG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42, 3-96, 6-4
KHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
KTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15, 3-130~3-131
L
Land(ing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48, 3-11, 3-104, 6-4, 7-9
Latitude insert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5, 3-53~3-54, 3-107, 3-112
Latitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118, 3-124
LB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42, 2-44, 3-95, 6-4
LDWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9, 7-30
Leg Change Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 2-17, 3-55~3-56, 3-59~3-61, 3-109
Leg Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46, 3-103
Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96, 3-98, 7-28~7-29
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16, 7-60
Line-of-sight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Load(ing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22, 3-30, 3-38, 3-65, 3-75, 7-4
LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
LON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 7-8, 7-11, 7-13, 7-50, 7-58, 7-64
Longitude insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5, 3-53~3-54, 3-107, 3-112
LVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9, 7-30
M
MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-62, 3-124, 6-4
Magnetic Variation . . . . . . . . 2-19, 2-66, 2-70, 2-74, 3-115, 3-118, 3-124, 3-129, 6-7
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
MAN HDG REQD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74, 3-119
MAN TAS REQD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74, 3-118
Manual Fuel Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49, 3-95, 3-102
Manual Ground Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
MDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 2-32
MEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76, 2-78, 3-8, 3-128
MEM FULL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78, 3-8, 3-128
Message Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Miscompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Missed Approach Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-64, 3-16, 3-33, 3-37, 6-5
Missed Approach Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-36~3-38, 3-48~3-49
MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6, 7-1
N
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58, 3-11, 6-4, 7-15, 7-39
Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 3-18, 3-47
NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11, 7-62
NAV RDY-VERIFY POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Navaids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-65, 3-15, 3-91, 3-126
Navigate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15, 7-28
Navigational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1~4-2
NAVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 3-90
NB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
NDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-66~2-67, 2-76, 3-8, 3-37, 6-5, 6-7
NDB-WW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
NO AFIS FLT PLANS ON DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
NO APPROACH AVAILABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
No APPROACH Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
NO ARC INTERCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 3-45, 3-61
NO AUTO LEG CHG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76, 3-54, 3-108~3-109, 3-122~3-123
NO COURSE INTERCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 3-61
No Data Received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
NO DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
NO FPL AVAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
NO ROOM ON FPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
NO SIDS AVAILABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-19
No SIDs Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-19
NO SIGMETS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12, 7-32
NO STARS AVAILABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 3-28
Non-directional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67, 6-5
Non-enterable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Non-ICAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Non-IRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74, 3-3
Non-precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-8, 3-61
Non-standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
NOPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
NOTAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13~2-14, 2-17, 2-19, 3-46, 3-67, 6-5
O
Oceanic/Remote Operation . . . . . . . 2-30, 2-49~2-50, 2-72, 3-10, 3-15, 3-130~3-131
Offset(s) . . . . . . 1-3, 2-11~2-13, 2-19, 2-33, 2-37, 2-41, 2-65, 2-70, 3-8, 3-51, 3-54,
3-73~3-74, 3-79~3-82, 3-84, 3-100, 3-107, 3-112, 3-114, 3-116, 3-118, 3-123,
3-127~3-130
Omega Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22, 2-24
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34, 3-47, 3-66, 3-79, 7-10
Outer Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Overflying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111~3-112
Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37~3-39
P
Parallax Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 3-1
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30, 2-58, 3-63, 3-79, 3-105
Part Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Path Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 2-37, 2-39, 2-41, 3-74, 3-78, 3-81, 3-83
PCMCIA Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Personalized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65, 2-69, 3-127~3-129
PIREPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Plan Crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Position Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 2-30, 2-63, 2-72, 3-112~3-113
Position Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110~3-113, 3-118
PPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-17, 7-41
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Pre-departure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, 3-71, 7-1, 7-27
Pre-selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39, 3-84, 3-86
PRED IN PROGRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Prefill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5~2-7, 2-53, 3-73, 3-77, 7-48, 7-58
Preselector (PRESL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38, 3-72, 3-84, 6-5
Prev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Procedure Turn. . . . . . 2-4, 2-8, 2-10, 2-13, 2-15~2-17, 2-19, 2-64, 3-33, 3-39~3-42,
3-44, 3-62, 3-75, 6-4~6-5
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 3-57, 3-63, 3-74, 3-83, 3-86
Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, 3-89
Pseudo-VORTAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 3-55~3-56, 3-58~3-60
Q
QTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50~2-51
Quality Factor (QUAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-21, 2-26, 2-78, 6-4
R
RAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70, 3-128, 6-5
Radar (Vectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76, 3-39, 3-44, 3-122~3-123
Radial insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113, 3-127
Radios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-55, 3-89, 3-92~3-93
RAIM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-20, 2-31, 2-45, 2-75, 2-78, 3-37, 3-99, 6-5
RCVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22, 6-6
RCVR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24, 2-79
RDY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76, 2-78, 3-16, 3-110, 3-117
RDY-verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
READING DISK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-45, 6-5
REQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41, 6-6, 7-5, 7-28
REQD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74, 3-118~3-119
Required Vertical Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 2-41
RNAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 3-37, 6-6
RNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27, 6-6
Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-77, 3-16, 3-51, 3-114
Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 3-11, 3-24
Rubidium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-79
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Runway Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Runways (RWY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-65, 3-33, 3-35~3-36
S
SATCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-48, 7-52
SATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31, 2-50, 3-131~3-132
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 3-36, 3-39~3-41, 3-44~3-46
SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 3-33, 3-36
SEL RWY FROM STAR PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 3-33, 3-36
SEL RWY From STAR PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 3-33, 3-36
Selected Crosstrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 3-114, 6-6
Self Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 3-1, 3-126
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-75, 3-36~3-37, 3-54
Sensor Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 2-24, 2-26, 2-73, 2-78, 3-2, 3-15, 3-121, 3-125
Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-42, 3-47
Shutdown . . . . . 1-4, 2-12, 2-32, 2-43, 3-3, 3-5, 3-95, 3-129, 7-43, 7-46, 7-48, 7-54,
7-56, 7-58
SID . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-3~2-4, 2-6, 2-10, 3-8~3-10, 3-16~3-23, 3-29~3-30, 3-73, 3-75,
3-80, 3-82, 3-116, 6-6
SIGMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11~7-12, 7-62
Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 6-6
Signal-to-noise (SNR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31, 6-6
Software Modification Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50, 3-131
SPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-24
Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45, 2-52, 3-61, 3-133
STAR . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-3~2-4, 2-7~2-8, 2-10, 3-8~3-10, 3-16~3-17, 3-20, 3-27~3-31,
3-33, 3-36, 3-73, 3-75, 3-78, 3-80, 3-82, 3-116, 6-6
Station Amplitude Ranging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
STD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-79
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-19, 2-77, 3-114
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69, 3-128
Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-55, 3-123
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
STRG (INVALID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 3-58
Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
SYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 2-73, 3-2, 3-8, 3-37, 3-61, 3-109~3-110, 3-119,
3-122~3-123, 3-126, 3-128, 7-24~7-25
T
TACAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91, 6-6~6-7
Tailwind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Takeoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48, 3-16, 3-104
Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33~2-34, 2-37
Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 2-24, 3-1, 3-126
TK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-72, 2-76, 3-124, 6-6
TKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 6-6
Too Far . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Top of Climb (TOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33~2-34, 2-37, 3-72, 3-84, 6-6
Top of Descent (TOD). . . . . . . . . . 2-33~2-34, 2-37, 2-39, 2-78, 3-72, 3-78, 3-84, 6-6
Total Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42, 2-47, 3-102, 7-5
Track Angle (Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-20, 6-6
Trajectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 2-40
TRANS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39, 3-71, 6-7
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2~7-3
Transition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38, 3-71~3-73, 3-80, 6-7
Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1, 7-2
Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 3-93, 6-7
TRMNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 3-39, 3-41, 3-44, 3-46, 6-7
True Airspeed (TAS) . . . . . 2-19, 2-48, 2-62, 2-74, 2-76, 3-16, 3-104, 3-117, 6-6, 7-6
Turns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55, 2-57, 3-28, 7-19, 7-22, 7-59
U
UG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Unavailable (UNAVAIL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30~2-31, 2-51, 3-126, 3-133
UNCERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Unstable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-24
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
UPDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
UPDA-XXXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Update. . . . . 1-5, 2-20, 2-32, 2-42~2-43, 2-63, 2-75, 3-2, 3-95, 3-100, 3-103~3-105,
3-110~3-113, 3-117~3-118, 3-123, 3-127, 5-1, 7-1, 7-3~7-4, 7-7~7-12,
7-18~7-19, 7-21~7-24, 7-29~7-34, 7-43~7-47, 7-54, 7-56~7-57, 7-60~7-65
Uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
USING MAN HDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 3-119, 3-126
UTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
V
Valids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48, 3-104
Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39, 3-44
Velocity (ies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-30, 3-112~3-113, 3-118, 3-122, 7-6, 7-14
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 2-42, 3-95, 7-23
VERIFY POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74, 3-110, 3-117
VERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32~2-34, 2-39, 6-7
Vertical Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-33, 3-74~3-78, 3-83, 3-85, 3-114, 6-7
Vertical Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40, 3-84
VNAV Direct To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81, 3-83
VNAV Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32, 2-37
VNAV Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
VS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
VSPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
W
Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Warn(ing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74~2-75, 2-77, 3-37, 3-63
Waypoint-to-waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Waypoints
Database Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73, 3-107~3-108, 3-129
Descent Reference Waypoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 3-78, 3-85~3-87
Duplicate Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
External Waypoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76, 3-122
Identifiers . . . 1-2, 2-3, 2-10, 2-38, 2-67, 2-69, 3-3, 3-8, 3-11, 3-17~3-18, 3-26,
3-100, 3-107, 3-128, 7-4~7-7, 7-12~7-13, 7-28, 7-33~7-35, 7-63, 7-65
Intersection Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Obsolete Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65, 2-73
Oceanic Waypoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50, 3-130
Offset Waypoint . . . . . . . . . 2-70, 3-51, 3-54, 3-81, 3-100, 3-107, 3-112, 3-123,
3-127~3-130
Pilot Entered Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53, 3-123, 3-128
Power Off Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72, 3-126
Special Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
VNAV Profile Waypoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
VNAV Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39, 3-73~3-77, 3-79~3-83, 3-116
Waypoints of STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Weight-off-wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48, 3-15~3-16, 3-104, 3-117
Weight-on-wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48, 3-104
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-48~2-49, 2-76, 3-105, 6-1, 7-9~7-10
Wind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-17, 3-118, 7-6, 7-13~7-14, 7-19, 7-22, 7-35
WPT MEM FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78, 3-8, 3-128
WPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69, 3-33
WSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 4-1
X
XFILL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 2-14, 3-7, 3-44, 3-46, 3-66
XPDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-57, 3-93, 6-7
XTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-32, 3-114, 6-7
Y
Z
Rev- 0
Oct/96
GNS-XL Flight Management System
I-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Honeywell International Inc.
One Technology Center
23500 West 105th Street
Olathe, Kansas 66061
FAX 913-791-1302
Telephone: (913) 712-0400
006-08852-0000
Rev. 4 Nov/04
N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|